SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1


                                                                  INTRODUCTION


SQL is divided into the following


               Data Definition Language (DDL)

            Data Manipulation Language (DML)
               Data Retrieval Language (DRL)
               Transaction Control Language (TCL)
               Data Control Language (DCL)


DDL -- create, alter, drop, truncate, rename
DML -- insert, update, delete
DRL -- select
TCL -- commit, rollback, savepoint
DCL -- grant, revoke


CREATE TABLE SYNTAX


Create table <table_name> (col1 datatype1, col2 datatype2 …coln datatypen);
Ex:
  SQL>   create table student (no number (2), name varchar (10), marks number (3));


INSERT


This will be used to insert the records into table.
We have two methods to insert.
               By value method
               By address method


a) USING VALUE METHOD


   Syntax:
      insert into <table_name) values (value1, value2, value3 …. Valuen);




© Copy rights are reserved.
2

     Ex:
           SQL>   insert into student values (1, ’sudha’, 100);
           SQL>   insert into student values (2, ’saketh’, 200);


     To insert a new record again you have to type entire insert command, if there are lot of
     records this will be difficult.
     This will be avoided by using address method.


b) USING ADDRESS METHOD


     Syntax:
        insert into <table_name) values (&col1, &col2, &col3 …. &coln);
     This will prompt you for the values but for every insert you have to use forward slash.


     Ex:
           SQL>   insert into student values (&no, '&name', &marks);


           Enter value for no: 1
           Enter value for name: Jagan
           Enter value for marks: 300
           old    1: insert into student values(&no, '&name', &marks)
           new     1: insert into student values(1, 'Jagan', 300)


           SQL>   /
           Enter value for no: 2
           Enter value for name: Naren
           Enter value for marks: 400
           old    1: insert into student values(&no, '&name', &marks)
           new     1: insert into student values(2, 'Naren', 400)


c) INSERTING DATA INTO SPECIFIED COLUMNS USING VALUE METHOD


     Syntax:
           insert into <table_name)(col1, col2, col3 … Coln) values (value1, value2, value3
….




© Copy rights are reserved.
3

                                           Valuen);
   Ex:
         SQL>   insert into student (no, name) values (3, ’Ramesh’);
         SQL>   insert into student (no, name) values (4, ’Madhu’);


d) INSERTING DATA INTO SPECIFIED COLUMNS USING ADDRESS METHOD


   Syntax:
      insert into <table_name)(col1, col2, col3 … coln) values (&col1, &col2 ….&coln);
   This will prompt you for the values but for every insert you have to use forward slash.


   Ex:
         SQL>   insert into student (no, name) values (&no, '&name');
         Enter value for no: 5
         Enter value for name: Visu
         old    1: insert into student (no, name) values(&no, '&name')
         new     1: insert into student (no, name) values(5, 'Visu')


         SQL>   /
         Enter value for no: 6
         Enter value for name: Rattu
         old    1: insert into student (no, name) values(&no, '&name')
         new     1: insert into student (no, name) values(6, 'Rattu')


SELECTING DATA


Syntax:
  Select * from <table_name>;              -- here * indicates all columns
                        or
  Select col1, col2, … coln from <table_name>;


Ex:
  SQL>    select * from student;


                    NO NAME        MARKS




© Copy rights are reserved.
4

              --- ------      --------
               1   Sudha       100
               2   Saketh      200
               1   Jagan       300
               2   Naren       400
               3   Ramesh
               4   Madhu
               5   Visu
               6   Rattu


  SQL>   select no, name, marks from student;


              NO NAME         MARKS
              --- ------      --------
               1   Sudha       100
               2   Saketh      200
               1   Jagan       300
               2   Naren       400
               3   Ramesh
               4   Madhu
               5   Visu
               6   Rattu


  SQL>   select no, name from student;


              NO NAME
              --- -------
               1   Sudha
               2   Saketh
               1   Jagan
               2   Naren
               3   Ramesh
               4   Madhu
               5   Visu
               6   Rattu




© Copy rights are reserved.
5



                              CONDITIONAL SELECTIONS AND OPERATORS

We have two clauses used in this
             Where
             Order by


USING WHERE


Syntax:
   select * from <table_name> where <condition>;


the following are the different types of operators used in where clause.


                   Arithmetic operators

                   Comparison operators
                   Logical operators


    Arithmetic operators         -- highest precedence
          +, -, *, /

    Comparison operators
             =, !=, >, <, >=, <=, <>

           between, not between
           in, not in
           null, not null
             like

             Logical operators

             And

           Or                    -- lowest precedence

             not


a) USING =, >, <, >=, <=, !=, <>




© Copy rights are reserved.
6

   Ex:
     SQL>   select * from student where no = 2;


                NO NAME            MARKS
                --- -------        ---------
                 2       Saketh     200
                 2       Naren      400


     SQL>   select * from student where no < 2;


                NO NAME            MARKS
                --- -------        ----------
                 1       Sudha      100
                 1       Jagan      300


     SQL>   select * from student where no > 2;


                     NO NAME         MARKS
                     --- -------     ----------
                     3    Ramesh
                     4    Madhu
                     5    Visu
                     6    Rattu


      SQL>   select * from student where no <= 2;


                     NO NAME         MARKS
                     --- -------     ----------
                     1    Sudha       100
                     2    Saketh      200
                     1    Jagan       300
                     2    Naren       400


      SQL>   select * from student where no >= 2;




© Copy rights are reserved.
7

                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   2   Saketh       200
                   2   Naren       400
                   3   Ramesh
                   4   Madhu
                   5   Visu
                   6   Rattu


      SQL>   select * from student where no != 2;


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ----------
                   1   Sudha       100
                   1   Jagan       300
                   3   Ramesh
                   4   Madhu
                   5   Visu
                   6   Rattu


      SQL>   select * from student where no <> 2;


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ----------
                   1   Sudha       100
                   1   Jagan       300
                   3   Ramesh
                   4   Madhu
                   5   Visu
                   6   Rattu


b) USING AND


   This will gives the output when all the conditions become true.




© Copy rights are reserved.
8

   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <condition1> and <condition2> and ..
                                                   <conditionn>;
   Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student where no = 2 and marks >= 200;


                   NO NAME        MARKS
                   --- -------    --------
                   2   Saketh      200
                   2   Naren       400


c) USING OR


   This will gives the output when either of the conditions become true.


   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <condition1> and <condition2> or ..
                                                <conditionn>;
   Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student where no = 2 or marks >= 200;


                   NO NAME        MARKS
                   --- -------    ---------
                   2   Saketh      200
                   1   Jagan      300
                   2   Naren       400


d) USING BETWEEN


   This will gives the output based on the column and its lower bound, upperbound.


   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <col> between <lower bound> and <upper
                                                     bound>;




© Copy rights are reserved.
9

   Ex:
      SQL>    select * from student where marks between 200 and 400;


                    NO NAME          MARKS
                    --- -------      ---------
                    2   Saketh        200
                    1   Jagan         300
                    2   Naren         400


e) USING NOT BETWEEN


   This will gives the output based on the column which values are not in its lower bound,
   upperbound.


   Syntax:
   select * from <table_name> where <col> not between <lower bound> and <upper
                                                 bound>;
   Ex:
      SQL>    select * from student where marks not between 200 and 400;


                    NO NAME          MARKS
                    --- -------      ---------
                    1   Sudha        100


f) USING IN


  This will gives the output based on the column and its list of values specified.


  Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <col> in ( value1, value2, value3 … valuen);


   Ex:
      SQL>    select * from student where no in (1, 2, 3);


                    NO NAME          MARKS




© Copy rights are reserved.
10

                   --- -------      ---------
                   1   Sudha        100
                   2   Saketh        200
                   1   Jagan        300
                   2   Naren        400
                   3   Ramesh


g) USING NOT IN


   This will gives the output based on the column which values are not in the list of
    values specified.


   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <col> not in ( value1, value2, value3 … valuen);


   Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student where no not in (1, 2, 3);


                   NO NAME          MARKS
                   --- -------      ---------
                   4   Madhu
                   5   Visu
                   6   Rattu


h) USING NULL


   This will gives the output based on the null values in the specified column.


   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <col> is null;


   Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student where marks is null;


                   NO NAME          MARKS




© Copy rights are reserved.
11

                    --- -------     ---------
                    3   Ramesh
                    4   Madhu
                    5   Visu
                    6   Rattu


i) USING NOT NULL


  This will gives the output based on the not null values in the specified column.


   Syntax:
      select * from <table_name> where <col> is not null;


   Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student where marks is not null;
                    NO NAME         MARKS
                    --- -------     ---------
                    1   Sudha       100
                    2   Saketh       200
                    1   Jagan       300
                    2   Naren       400


j) USING LIKE


  This will be used to search through the rows of database column based on the pattern
  you specify.


   Syntax:
     select * from <table_name> where <col> like <pattern>;


   Ex:
     i) This will give the rows whose marks are 100.


         SQL>   select * from student where marks like 100;




© Copy rights are reserved.
12

                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   1    Sudha       100
     ii) This will give the rows whose name start with ‘S’.


         SQL>   select * from student where name like 'S%';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   1    Sudha       100
                   2    Saketh      200


     iii) This will give the rows whose name ends with ‘h’.


         SQL>   select * from student where name like '%h';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   2    Saketh      200
                   3    Ramesh


     iV) This will give the rows whose name’s second letter start with ‘a’.


          SQL>   select * from student where name like '_a%';


                    NO NAME         MARKS
                    --- -------     --------
                    2   Saketh      200
                    1   Jagan       300
                    2   Naren       400
                    3   Ramesh
                    4   Madhu
                    6   Rattu


     V) This will give the rows whose name’s third letter start with ‘d’.




© Copy rights are reserved.
13



         SQL>   select * from student where name like '__d%';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   1   Sudha       100
                   4   Madhu


     Vi) This will give the rows whose name’s second letter start with ‘t’ from ending.


          SQL>   select * from student where name like '%_t%';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   2   Saketh       200
                   6   Rattu


     Vii) This will give the rows whose name’s third letter start with ‘e’ from ending.


           SQL>   select * from student where name like '%e__%';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                   --- -------     ---------
                   2   Saketh       200
                   3   Ramesh


     Viii) This will give the rows whose name cotains 2 a’s.


           SQL>   select * from student where name like '%a% a %';


                   NO NAME         MARKS
                    --- -------    ----------
                   1   Jagan       300


* You have to specify the patterns in like using underscore ( _ ).




© Copy rights are reserved.
14




USING ORDER BY


This will be used to ordering the columns data (ascending or descending).


Syntax:
      Select * from <table_name> order by <col> desc;
By default oracle will use ascending order.
If you want output in descending order you have to use desc keyword after the column.


Ex:
      SQL>   select * from student order by no;


                 NO NAME          MARKS
                 --- -------     ---------
                  1   Sudha        100
                  1   Jagan        300
                  2   Saketh       200
                  2   Naren        400
                  3   Ramesh
                  4   Madhu
                  5   Visu
                  6   Rattu


      SQL>   select * from student order by no desc;


                 NO NAME          MARKS
                 --- -------     ---------
                  6 Rattu
                  5 Visu
                  4 Madhu
                  3 Ramesh
                  2 Saketh        200




© Copy rights are reserved.
15

                 2 Naren        400
                 1 Sudha        100
                 1 Jagan        300

                                                                            USING DML


USING UPDATE


This can be used to modify the table data.


Syntax:
   Update <table_name> set <col1> = value1, <col2> = value2 where <condition>;


Ex:
   SQL>   update student set marks = 500;
   If you are not specifying any condition this will update entire table.


   SQL>   update student set marks = 500 where no = 2;
   SQL>   update student set marks = 500, name = 'Venu' where no = 1;


USING DELETE


This can be used to delete the table data temporarily.


Syntax:
  Delete <table_name> where <condition>;


Ex:
   SQL>   delete student;
   If you are not specifying any condition this will delete entire table.


   SQL>   delete student where no = 2;




© Copy rights are reserved.
16




                                                                         USING DDL

USING ALTER


This can be used to add or remove columns and to modify the precision of the datatype.


a) ADDING COLUMN


  Syntax:
     alter table <table_name> add <col datatype>;


  Ex:
     SQL>   alter table student add sdob date;


b) REMOVING COLUMN


  Syntax:
     alter table <table_name> drop <col datatype>;


  Ex:
      SQL>   alter table student drop column sdob;


c) INCREASING OR DECREASING PRECISION OF A COLUMN


  Syntax:
        alter table <table_name> modify <col datatype>;
  Ex:
        SQL>   alter table student modify marks number(5);


        * To decrease precision the column should be empty.


d) MAKING COLUMN UNUSED




© Copy rights are reserved.
17

  Syntax:
       alter table <table_name> set unused column <col>;
  Ex:
       SQL>   alter table student set unused column marks;


       Even though the column is unused still it will occupy memory.


d) DROPPING UNUSED COLUMNS


  Syntax:
       alter table <table_name> drop unused columns;


  Ex:
       SQL>   alter table student drop unused columns;
       * You can not drop individual unused columns of a table.


e) RENAMING COLUMN


  Syntax:
       alter table <table_name> rename column <old_col_name> to <new_col_name>;


  Ex:
       SQL>   alter table student rename column marks to smarks;


USING TRUNCATE


This can be used to delete the entire table data permanently.
Syntax:
      truncate table <table_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   truncate table student;


USING DROP




© Copy rights are reserved.
18

This will be used to drop the database object;


Syntax:
   Drop table <table_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   drop table student;


USING RENAME


This will be used to rename the database object;


Syntax:
   rename <old_table_name> to <new_table_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   rename student to stud;




© Copy rights are reserved.
19




                                                                          USING TCL

USING COMMIT


This will be used to save the work.
Commit is of two types.
              Implicit
              Explicit


a) IMPLICIT


   This will be issued by oracle internally in two situations.
      When any DDL operation is performed.
      When you are exiting from SQL * PLUS.


b) EXPLICIT


   This will be issued by the user.


   Syntax:
          Commit or commit work;
          * When ever you committed then the transaction was completed.


USING ROLLBACK


This will undo the operation.
This will be applied in two methods.
              Upto previous commit
              Upto previous rollback


Syntax:
       Roll or roll work;




© Copy rights are reserved.
20

       Or
       Rollback or rollback work;
* While process is going on, if suddenly power goes then oracle will rollback the
transaction.
USING SAVEPOINT


You can use savepoints to rollback portions of your current set of transactions.


Syntax:
   Savepoint <savepoint_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   savepoint s1;
   SQL>   insert into student values(1, ‘a’, 100);
   SQL>   savepoint s2;
   SQL>   insert into student values(2, ‘b’, 200);
   SQL>   savepoint s3;
   SQL>   insert into student values(3, ‘c’, 300);
   SQL>   savepoint s4;
   SQL>   insert into student values(4, ‘d’, 400);


   Before rollback


   SQL>   select * from student;


               NO NAME        MARKS
               --- -------    ----------
               1      a       100
               2      b       200
               3      c       300
               4      d       400


   SQL>   rollback to savepoint s3;
                      Or
   SQL>   rollback to s3;




© Copy rights are reserved.
21



  This will rollback last two records.
   SQL>   select * from student;


              NO NAME         MARKS
              --- -------     ----------
               1     a        100
               2     b        200




© Copy rights are reserved.
22




                                                                                USING DCL


DCL commands are used to granting and revoking the permissions.

USING GRANT

This is used to grant the privileges to other users.


Syntax:
   Grant <privileges> on <object_name> to <user_name> [with grant option];


Ex:
   SQL>   grant select on student to sudha;    -- you can give individual privilege
   SQL>   grant select, insert on student to sudha;    -- you can give set of privileges
   SQL>   grant all on student to sudha;       -- you can give all privileges


   The sudha user has to use dot method to access the object.
   SQL>   select * from saketh.student;
   The sudha user can not grant permission on student table to other users. To get this
      type of option use the following.
   SQL>   grant all on student to sudha with grant option;
   Now sudha user also grant permissions on student table.


USING REVOKE


This is used to revoke the privileges from the users to which you granted the privileges.


Syntax:
   Revoke <privileges> on <object_name> from <user_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   revoke select on student form sudha;         -- you can revoke individual privilege
   SQL>   revoke select, insert on student from sudha;    -- you can revoke set of privileges
   SQL>   revoke all on student from sudha;    -- you can revoke all privileges




© Copy rights are reserved.
23



                                                                       USING ALIASES

CREATE WITH SELECT

We can create a table using existing table [along with data].


Syntax:
  Create table <new_table_name> [col1, col2, col3 ... coln] as select * from
                                        <old_table_name>;
Ex:
  SQL>   create table student1 as select * from student;


  Creating table with your own column names.
  SQL>   create table student2(sno, sname, smarks) as select * from student;


  Creating table with specified columns.
  SQL>   create table student3 as select no,name from student;


  Creating table with out table data.
  SQL>   create table student2(sno, sname, smarks) as select * from student where 1 = 2;
  In the above where clause give any condition which does not satisfy.


INSERT WITH SELECT


Using this we can insert existing table data to a another table in a single trip. But the
table structure should be same.


Syntax:
   Insert into <table1> select * from <table2>;


Ex:
   SQL>   insert into student1 select * from student;


   Inserting data into specified columns
   SQL>   insert into student1(no, name) select no, name from student;



© Copy rights are reserved.
24



COLUMN ALIASES


Syntax:
   Select <orginal_col> <alias_name> from <table_name>;


Ex:
   SQL>   select no sno from student;
                     or
   SQL>   select no “sno” from student;


TABLE ALIASES


If you are using table aliases you can use dot method to the columns.


Syntax:
   Select <alias_name>.<col1>, <alias_name>.<col2> … <alias_name>.<coln> from
                                   <table_name> <alias_name>;
Ex:
  SQL>   select s.no, s.name from student s;




© Copy rights are reserved.
25




                                                                       USING MERGE


MERGE

You can use merge command to perform insert and update in a single command.

Ex:

SQL>   Merge into student1 s1
       Using (select *From student2) s2
       On(s1.no=s2.no)
       When matched then
       Update set marks = s2.marks
       When not matched then
       Insert (s1.no,s1.name,s1.marks)
       Values(s2.no,s2.name,s2.marks);


In the above the two tables are with the same structure but we can merge different
structured tables also but the datatype of the columns should match.


Assume that student1 has columns like no,name,marks and student2 has columns like no,
name, hno, city.


SQL>   Merge into student1 s1
       Using (select *From student2) s2
       On(s1.no=s2.no)
       When matched then
       Update set marks = s2.hno
       When not matched then
       Insert (s1.no,s1.name,s1.marks)
       Values(s2.no,s2.name,s2.hno);




© Copy rights are reserved.
26




                                                              MULTIBLE INSERTS

We have table called DEPT with the following columns and data


DEPTNO           DNAME        LOC
--------         --------     ----
10               accounting   new york
20               research     dallas
30               sales        Chicago
40               operations   boston


a) CREATE STUDENT TABLE


  SQL>     Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks number(3));


b) MULTI INSERT WITH ALL FIELDS


     SQL>   Insert all
            Into student values(1,’a’,100)
            Into student values(2,’b’,200)
            Into student values(3,’c’,300)
            Select *from dept where deptno=10;


     -- This inserts 3 rows


c) MULTI INSERT WITH SPECIFIED FIELDS


     SQL>   insert all
            Into student (no,name) values(4,’d’)
            Into student(name,marks) values(’e’,400)
            Into student values(3,’c’,300)
            Select *from dept where deptno=10;


     -- This inserts 3 rows



© Copy rights are reserved.
27



d) MULTI INSERT WITH DUPLICATE ROWS


   SQL>   insert all
          Into student values(1,’a’,100)
          Into student values(2,’b’,200)
          Into student values(3,’c’,300)
          Select *from dept where deptno > 10;


   -- This inserts 9 rows because in the select statement retrieves 3 records (3 inserts for
      each row retrieved)


e) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED


   SQL>   Insert all
          When deptno > 10 then
          Into student1 values(1,’a’,100)
          When dname = ‘SALES’ then
          Into student2 values(2,’b’,200)
          When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then
          Into student3 values(3,’c’,300)
          Select *from dept where deptno>10;


   -- This inserts 4 rows because the first condition satisfied 3 times, second condition
      satisfied once and the last none.


f) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED AND ELSE


  SQL>   Insert all
         When deptno > 100 then
         Into student1 values(1,’a’,100)
         When dname = ‘S’ then
         Into student2 values(2,’b’,200)
         When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then
         Into student3 values(3,’c’,300)
         Else


© Copy rights are reserved.
28

        Into student values(4,’d’,400)
        Select *from dept where deptno>10;


   -- This inserts 3 records because the else satisfied 3 times


g) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED AND FIRST


   SQL>   Insert first
          When deptno = 20 then
          Into student1 values(1,’a’,100)
          When dname = ‘RESEARCH’ then
          Into student2 values(2,’b’,200)
          When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then
          Into student3 values(3,’c’,300)
          Select *from dept where deptno=20;


   -- This inserts 1 record because the first clause avoid to check the remaining
      conditions once the condition is satisfied.


h) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED, FIRST AND ELSE


   SQL>   Insert first
          When deptno = 30 then
          Into student1 values(1,’a’,100)
          When dname = ‘R’ then
          Into student2 values(2,’b’,200)
          When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then
          Into student3 values(3,’c’,300)
          Else
          Into student values(4,’d’,400)
          Select *from dept where deptno=20;


   -- This inserts 1 record because the else clause satisfied once




© Copy rights are reserved.
29



i) MULTI INSERT WITH MULTIBLE TABLES


  SQL>   Insert all
         Into student1 values(1,’a’,100)
         Into student2 values(2,’b’,200)
         Into student3 values(3,’c’,300)
         Select *from dept where deptno=10;


  -- This inserts 3 rows


  ** You can use multi tables with specified fields, with duplicate rows, with conditions,
      with first and else clauses.




© Copy rights are reserved.
30




                                                                          FUNCTIONS

Functions can be categorized as follows.


             Single row functions
             Group functions


SINGLE ROW FUNCTIONS


Single row functions can be categorized into five. These will be applied for each row and
produces individual output for each row.


             Numeric functions
             String functions
             Date functions
             Miscellaneous functions
             Conversion functions


NUMERIC FUNCTIONS

                             Abs
                             Sign
                             Sqrt
                             Mod
                             Nvl
                             Power
                             Exp
                             Ln
                             Log
                             Ceil
                             Floor
                             Round
                             Trunk
                             Bitand
                             Greatest


© Copy rights are reserved.
31

                                 Least
                                 Coalesce
a) ABS


   Absolute value is the measure of the magnitude of value.
   Absolute value is always a positive number.


   Syntax: abs (value)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select abs(5), abs(-5), abs(0), abs(null) from dual;


                 ABS(5)       ABS(-5)      ABS(0) ABS(NULL)
                 ---------- ----------     ---------- -------------
                    5             -5            0


b) SIGN


   Sign gives the sign of a value.


   Syntax: sign (value)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select sign(5), sign(-5), sign(0), sign(null) from dual;


                 SIGN(5)      SIGN(-5)       SIGN(0) SIGN(NULL)
                 ----------   ----------     ---------- --------------
                      1           -1             0


c) SQRT


   This will give the square root of the given value.


   Syntax: sqrt (value)           -- here value must be positive.




© Copy rights are reserved.
32

   Ex:
         SQL>   select sqrt(4), sqrt(0), sqrt(null), sqrt(1) from dual;
                 SQRT(4)        SQRT(0) SQRT(NULL)           SQRT(1)
                 ----------     ---------- ---------------   ----------
                       2             0                          1


d) MOD


   This will give the remainder.


   Syntax: mod (value, divisor)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select mod(7,4), mod(1,5), mod(null,null), mod(0,0), mod(-7,4) from dual;


                 MOD(7,4)       MOD(1,5) MOD(NULL,NULL)             MOD(0,0) MOD(-7,4)
                 ------------    ---------- ---------------------    ----------- -------------
                       3             1                                    0            -3


e) NVL


   This will substitutes the specified value in the place of null values.


   Syntax: nvl (null_col, replacement_value)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select * from student;           -- here for 3rd row marks value is null


                  NO NAME          MARKS
                  --- -------     ---------
                   1       a       100
                   2    b          200
                   3    c


         SQL>   select no, name, nvl(marks,300) from student;




© Copy rights are reserved.
33

                 NO NAME NVL(MARKS,300)
                 --- ------- ---------------------
                  1     a          100
                  2     b          200
                  3     c         300


         SQL>   select nvl(1,2), nvl(2,3), nvl(4,3), nvl(5,4) from dual;


                  NVL(1,2)     NVL(2,3)      NVL(4,3)         NVL(5,4)
                  ----------   ----------    ----------       ----------
                       1           2           4                   5


         SQL>   select nvl(0,0), nvl(1,1), nvl(null,null), nvl(4,4) from dual;


                  NVL(0,0)     NVL(1,1) NVL(null,null) NVL(4,4)
                  ----------   ---------- -----------------       ----------
                       0          1                                    4


f) POWER


   Power is the ability to raise a value to a given exponent.


   Syntax: power (value, exponent)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select power(2,5), power(0,0), power(1,1), power(null,null), power(2,-5)
                from dual;


                 POWER(2,5) POWER(0,0) POWER(1,1) POWER(NULL,NULL) POWER(2,-5)
                 -------------- -------------- ----- --------- ----------------------- ---------------
                      32                 1                1                                .03125


g) EXP


   This will raise e value to the give power.




© Copy rights are reserved.
34



   Syntax: exp (value)
   Ex:
         SQL>   select exp(1), exp(2), exp(0), exp(null), exp(-2) from dual;


                 EXP(1)         EXP(2)        EXP(0) EXP(NULL)         EXP(-2)
                 --------       ---------     -------- -------------   ----------
                 2.71828183 7.3890561                 1                .135335283


h) LN


   This is based on natural or base e logarithm.


   Syntax: ln (value)           -- here value must be greater than zero which is positive only.


   Ex:
         SQL>   select ln(1), ln(2), ln(null) from dual;


                 LN(1)       LN(2)     LN(NULL)
                 -------     -------   ------------
                    0       .693147181


         Ln and Exp are reciprocal to each other.
         EXP   (3) = 20.0855369
         LN   (20.0855369) = 3


i) LOG


  This is based on 10 based logarithm.


  Syntax: log (10, value) -- here value must be greater than zero which is positive only.


  Ex:
         SQL>   select log(10,100), log(10,2), log(10,1), log(10,null) from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
35

                  LOG(10,100) LOG(10,2) LOG(10,1) LOG(10,NULL)
                  ---------------    -----------    ------------ -----------------
                         2          .301029996            0


          LN   (value) = LOG (EXP(1), value)


          SQL>   select ln(3), log(exp(1),3) from dual;


                  LN(3)      LOG(EXP(1),3)
                  -------    -----------------
                  1.09861229        1.09861229


j) CEIL


   This will produce a whole number that is greater than or equal to the specified value.


   Syntax: ceil (value)


   Ex:
          SQL>   select ceil(5), ceil(5.1), ceil(-5), ceil( -5.1), ceil(0), ceil(null) from dual;


                  CEIL(5) CEIL(5.1)        CEIL(-5) CEIL(-5.1)         CEIL(0) CEIL(NULL)
                  --------- -----------     ---------- ------------     -------- --------------
                         5          6              -5         -5           0
k) FLOOR


   This will produce a whole number that is less than or equal to the specified value.


   Syntax: floor (value)


   Ex:
          SQL>   select floor(5), floor(5.1), floor(-5), floor( -5.1), floor(0), floor(null) from
                 dual;


                  FLOOR(5) FLOOR(5.1) FLOOR(-5) FLOOR(-5.1)                    FLOOR(0) FLOOR(NULL)




© Copy rights are reserved.
36

                 ----------- -------------   ------------ --------------       ----------- ----------------
                       5           5             -5             -6                 0
l) ROUND


  This will rounds numbers to a given number of digits of precision.


   Syntax: round (value, precision)


   Ex:
       SQL>     select round(123.2345), round(123.2345,2), round(123.2354,2) from dual;


       ROUND(123.2345) ROUND(123.2345,0) ROUND(123.2345,2) ROUND(123.2354,2)
       ---------------------    ------------------------ ----------------------- -----------------------
                        123                     123                        123.23                  123.24


      SQL>      select round(123.2345,-1), round(123.2345,-2), round(123.2345,-3),
                round(123.2345,-4) from dual;


ROUND(123.2345,-1) ROUND(123.2345,-2) ROUND(123.2345,-3) ROUND(123.2345,-4)
------------------------ ------------------------- ------------------------         ------------------------
                     120                         100                       0                           0


         SQL>   select round(123,0), round(123,1), round(123,2) from dual;


                 ROUND(123,0) ROUND(123,1) ROUND(123,2)
                 ----------------- ----------------- ----------------
                       123               123                  123


         SQL>   select round(-123,0), round(-123,1), round(-123,2) from dual;


                 ROUND(-123,0) ROUND(-123,1) ROUND(-123,2)
                 ------------------ -----------------   -------------------
                        -123              -123                -123


         SQL>   select round(123,-1), round(123,-2), round(123,-3), round(-123,-1), round(
                -123,-2), round(-123,-3) from dual;



© Copy rights are reserved.
37




       ROUND(123,-1) ROUND(123,-2) ROUND(123,-3) ROUND(-123,-1) ROUND(-123,-2)
       ROUND(-123,-3)
       ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------- -------------- --------------------------
               120          100         0            -120            -100           0


       SQL> select round(null,null), round(0,0), round(1,1), round(-1,-1), round(-2,-2)
               from dual;


               ROUND(NULL,NULL) ROUND(0,0) ROUND(1,1) ROUND(-1,-1) ROUND(-2,-2)
               ----------------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------- ----------------
                                            0                  1              0               0


m) TRUNC


    This will truncates or chops off digits of precision from a number.


    Syntax: trunc (value, precision)


    Ex:
       SQL>   select trunc(123.2345), trunc(123.2345,2), trunc(123.2354,2) from dual;


               TRUNC(123.2345) TRUNC(123.2345,2) TRUNC(123.2354,2)
               --------------------- ----------------------- -----------------------
                        123                 123.23                  123.23


       SQL>   select trunc(123.2345,-1), trunc(123.2345,-2), trunc(123.2345,-3),
              trunc(123.2345,-4) from dual;


TRUNC(123.2345,-1) TRUNC(123.2345,-2) TRUNC(123.2345,-3) TRUNC(123.2345,-4)
------------------------ ------------------------   ----------------------- ------------------------
                  120                       100                        0                     0


       SQL>   select trunc(123,0), trunc(123,1), trunc(123,2) from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
38




                 TRUNC(123,0) TRUNC(123,1) TRUNC(123,2)
                 ----------------    ---------------- -----------------
                        123                123              123


         SQL>   select trunc(-123,0), trunc(-123,1), trunc(-123,2) from dual;


                 TRUNC(-123,0) TRUNC(-123,1) TRUNC(-123,2)
                 -----------------   ----------------- -----------------
                        -123                -123             -123


         SQL>   select trunc(123,-1), trunc(123,-2), trunc(123,-3), trunc(-123,-1), trunc(
                -123,2), trunc(-123,-3) from dual;




TRUNC(123,-1) TRUNC(123,-2) TRUNC(123,-3) TRUNC(-123,-1) TRUNC(-123,2) TRUNC(-
         123,-3)
------------- ------------- ------------- -------------- ------------- ---------------------------------
                 120           100          0              -120           -123       0


         SQL>   select trunc(null,null), trunc(0,0), trunc(1,1), trunc(-1,-1), trunc(-2,-2) from
                dual;


                 TRUNC(NULL,NULL) TRUNC(0,0) TRUNC(1,1) TRUNC(-1,-1) TRUNC(-2,-2)
                 ----------------------- ------------- ------------- --------------- ----------------
                                                 0             1                 0            0


n) BITAND


   This will perform bitwise and operation.


   Syntax: bitand (value1, value2)


   Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
39

      SQL>    select bitand(2,3), bitand(0,0), bitand(1,1), bitand(null,null), bitand(-2,-3)
              from dual;
                BITAND(2,3) BITAND(0,0) BITAND(1,1) BITAND(NULL,NULL) BITAND(-2,-3)
                -------------- --------------- --------------   ------------------------ -----------------
                      2               0             1                                             -4


o) GREATEST


   This will give the greatest number.


   Syntax: greatest (value1, value2, value3 … valuen)


   Ex:
      SQL>    select greatest(1, 2, 3), greatest(-1, -2, -3) from dual;


                       GREATEST(1,2,3) GREATEST(-1,-2,-3)
                       -------------------- -----------------------
                                 3                  -1


            If all the values are zeros then it will display zero.
            If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.
            If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing.


p) LEAST


  This will give the least number.


  Syntax: least (value1, value2, value3 … valuen)


   Ex:
      SQL>    select least(1, 2, 3), least(-1, -2, -3) from dual;


                       LEAST(1,2,3)         LEAST(-1,-2,-3)
                       -------------------- -----------------------
                                 1                  -3
            If all the values are zeros then it will display zero.


© Copy rights are reserved.
40

            If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.
            If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing.
q) COALESCE


  This will return first non-null value.


  Syntax: coalesce (value1, value2, value3 … valuen)


   Ex:
      SQL>    select coalesce(1,2,3), coalesce(null,2,null,5) from dual;


                COALESCE(1,2,3) COALESCE(NULL,2,NULL,5)
                -------------------    -------------------------------
                          1                            2


STRING FUNCTIONS


                              Initcap
                              Upper
                              Lower
                              Length
                              Rpad
                              Lpad
                              Ltrim
                              Rtrim
                              Trim
                              Translate
                              Replace
                              Soundex
                              Concat ( ‘ || ‘ Concatenation operator)
                              Ascii
                              Chr
                              Substr
                              Instr
                              Decode
                              Greatest



© Copy rights are reserved.
41

                             Least
                             Coalesce
a) INITCAP


   This will capitalize the initial letter of the string.


   Syntax: initcap (string)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select initcap('computer') from dual;


                     INITCAP
                     -----------
                     Computer


b) UPPER


   This will convert the string into uppercase.


   Syntax: upper (string)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select upper('computer') from dual;
                     UPPER
                     -----------
                     COMPUTER


c) LOWER


   This will convert the string into lowercase.


   Syntax: lower (string)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select lower('COMPUTER') from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
42




                     LOWER
                     -----------
                     computer


d) LENGTH


   This will give length of the string.


   Syntax: length (string)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select length('computer') from dual;


                     LENGTH
                     -----------
                          8


e) RPAD


   This will allows you to pad the right side of a column with any set of characters.


   Syntax: rpad (string, length [, padding_char])


   Ex:
      SQL>   select rpad('computer',15,'*'), rpad('computer',15,'*#') from dual;


                     RPAD('COMPUTER' RPAD('COMPUTER'
                     ---------------------- ----------------------
                     computer*******         computer*#*#*#*


         -- Default padding character was blank space.


f) LPAD




© Copy rights are reserved.
43



   This will allows you to pad the left side of a column with any set of characters.
   Syntax: lpad (string, length [, padding_char])


   Ex:
      SQL>      select lpad('computer',15,'*'), lpad('computer',15,'*#') from dual;


                        LPAD('COMPUTER' LPAD('COMPUTER'
                        ---------------------      ---------------------
                        *******computer            *#*#*#*computer


         -- Default padding character was blank space.


g) LTRIM


   This will trim off unwanted characters from the left end of string.


   Syntax: ltrim (string [,unwanted_chars])


   Ex:
      SQL>      select ltrim('computer','co'), ltrim('computer','com') from dual;


                        LTRIM( LTRIM
                        -------- ---------
                        mputer       puter


         SQL>   select ltrim('computer','puter'), ltrim('computer','omputer') from dual;


                        LTRIM('C LTRIM('C
                        ----------    ----------
                        computer       computer


         -- If you haven’t specify any unwanted characters it will display entire string.


h) RTRIM




© Copy rights are reserved.
44



   This will trim off unwanted characters from the right end of string.
   Syntax: rtrim (string [, unwanted_chars])


   Ex:
      SQL>       select rtrim('computer','er'), rtrim('computer','ter') from dual;
                         RTRIM( RTRIM
                         -------- ---------
                         comput       compu


          SQL>   select rtrim('computer','comput’), rtrim('computer','compute') from dual;


                         RTRIM('C RTRIM('C
                         ----------   ----------
                         computer      computer
          -- If you haven’t specify any unwanted characters it will display entire string.


i) TRIM


   This will trim off unwanted characters from the both sides of string.


   Syntax: trim (unwanted_chars from string)


   Ex:
      SQL>       select trim( 'i' from 'indiani') from dual;


                         TRIM(
                         -----
                         ndian


          SQL>   select trim( leading'i' from 'indiani') from dual;    -- this will work as LTRIM


                         TRIM(L
                         ------
                         ndiani




© Copy rights are reserved.
45




         SQL>   select trim( trailing'i' from 'indiani') from dual;       -- this will work as RTRIM


                        TRIM(T
                        ------
                        Indian


j) TRANSLATE


   This will replace the set of characters, character by character.


   Syntax: translate (string, old_chars, new_chars)


   Ex:
      SQL>      select translate('india','in','xy') from dual;


                        TRANS
                        --------
                        xydxa


k) REPLACE


   This will replace the set of characters, string by string.


   Syntax: replace (string, old_chars [, new_chars])


   Ex:
      SQL>      select replace('india','in','xy'), replace(‘india’,’in’) from dual;


                        REPLACE     REPLACE
                        ----------- -----------
                        Xydia        dia


l) SOUNDEX




© Copy rights are reserved.
46

  This will be used to find words that sound like other words, exclusively used in where
  clause.
  Syntax: soundex (string)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select * from emp where soundex(ename) = soundex('SMIT');


            EMPNO ENAME          JOB           MGR HIREDATE           SAL     DEPTNO
            -------- --------    -----         ----- ------------   --------- ----------
             7369    SMITH       CLERK         7902   17-DEC-80        500        20


m) CONCAT


  This will be used to combine two strings only.


  Syntax: concat (string1, string2)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select concat('computer',' operator') from dual;


                       CONCAT('COMPUTER'
                       -------------------------
                       computer operator


  If you want to combine more than two strings you have to use concatenation
  operator(||).


      SQL>   select 'how' || ' are' || ' you' from dual;


                       'HOW'||'ARE
                       ---------------
                       how are you


n) ASCII




© Copy rights are reserved.
47

  This will return the decimal representation in the database character set of the first
   character of the string.


  Syntax: ascii (string)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select ascii('a'), ascii('apple') from dual;


                       ASCII('A') ASCII('APPLE')
                       ------------ ------------------
                               97       97


o) CHR


  This will return the character having the binary equivalent to the string in either the
  database character set or the national character set.


  Syntax: chr (number)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select chr(97) from dual;


                       CHR
                       -----
                         a


p) SUBSTR


   This will be used to extract substrings.


   Syntax: substr (string, start_chr_count [, no_of_chars])


   Ex:
         SQL>   select substr('computer',2), substr('computer',2,5), substr('computer',3,7)
                from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
48




                       SUBSTR( SUBST SUBSTR
                       ---------- ------- --------
                       omputer omput mputer


             If no_of_chars parameter is negative then it will display nothing.
             If both parameters except string are null or zeros then it will display nothing.
             If no_of_chars parameter is greater than the length of the string then it
               ignores and calculates based on the orginal string length.

             If start_chr_count is negative then it will extract the substring from right
               end.


                       1      2        3    4       5      6       7      8

                       C      O        M    P       U      T       E      R

                       -8     -7       -6   -5      -4     -3      -2     -1


q) INSTR


   This will allows you for searching through a string for set of characters.


   Syntax: instr (string, search_str [, start_chr_count [, occurrence] ])


   Ex:
      SQL>   select instr('information','o',4,1), instr('information','o',4,2) from dual;


               INSTR('INFORMATION','O',4,1) INSTR('INFORMATION','O',4,2)
               ------------------------------------ -------------------------------------
                                   4                               10


          If you are not specifying start_chr_count and occurrence then it will start
            search from the beginning and finds first occurrence only.

          If both parameters start_chr_count and occurrence are null, it will display
            nothing.




© Copy rights are reserved.
49

r) DECODE


  Decode will act as value by value substitution.
  For every value of field, it will checks for a match in a series of if/then tests.


  Syntax: decode (value, if1, then1, if2, then2, ……. else);


  Ex:
        SQL>   select sal, decode(sal,500,'Low',5000,'High','Medium') from emp;


                                   SAL     DECODE
                                   -----   ---------
                                   500       Low
                                  2500       Medium
                                  2000       Medium
                                  3500       Medium
                                  3000       Medium
                                  5000       High
                                  4000       Medium
                                  5000       High
                                  1800       Medium
                                  1200       Medium
                                  2000       Medium
                                  2700       Medium
                                  2200       Medium
                                  3200       Medium


        SQL>   select decode(1,1,3), decode(1,2,3,4,4,6) from dual;


                       DECODE(1,1,3) DECODE(1,2,3,4,4,6)
                       ----------------- ------------------------
                                3                    6

           If the number of parameters are odd and different then decode will display
            nothing.
           If the number of parameters are even and different then decode will display last
            value.


© Copy rights are reserved.
50

            If all the parameters are null then decode will display nothing.
            If all the parameters are zeros then decode will display zero.


s) GREATEST


   This will give the greatest string.


   Syntax: greatest (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn)


   Ex:
         SQL>   select greatest('a', 'b', 'c'), greatest('satish','srinu','saketh') from dual;



                        GREAT GREAT
                        ------- -------
                           c     srinu


            If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.
            If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing.


t) LEAST


  This will give the least string.


  Syntax: greatest (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn)


  Ex:
         SQL>   select least('a', 'b', 'c'), least('satish','srinu','saketh') from dual;



                        LEAST LEAST
                        ------- -------
                           a     saketh


            If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.
            If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing.




© Copy rights are reserved.
51

u) COALESCE


  This will gives the first non-null string.


  Syntax: coalesce (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select coalesce('a','b','c'), coalesce(null,'a',null,'b') from dual;


                      COALESCE COALESCE
                      -----------   -----------
                           a             a


DATE FUNCTIONS


                              Sysdate
                              Current_date
                              Current_timestamp
                              Systimestamp
                              Localtimestamp
                              Dbtimezone
                              Sessiontimezone
                              To_char
                              To_date
                              Add_months
                              Months_between
                              Next_day
                              Last_day
                              Extract
                              Greatest
                              Least
                              Round
                              Trunc
                              New_time
                              Coalesce




© Copy rights are reserved.
52

Oracle default date format is DD-MON-YY.
We can change the default format to our desired format by using the following command.


SQL>   alter session set nls_date_format = ‘DD-MONTH-YYYY’;
       But this will expire once the session was closed.


a) SYSDATE


   This will give the current date and time.
    Ex:
        SQL>   select sysdate from dual;


                       SYSDATE
                       -----------
                       24-DEC-06


b) CURRENT_DATE


   This will returns the current date in the session’s timezone.


    Ex:
        SQL>   select current_date from dual;


                       CURRENT_DATE
                       ------------------
                           24-DEC-06


c) CURRENT_TIMESTAMP


   This will returns the current timestamp with the active time zone information.


    Ex:
        SQL>   select current_timestamp from dual;


                CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
                ---------------------------------------------------------------------------


© Copy rights are reserved.
53

                24-DEC-06 03.42.41.383369 AM +05:30




d) SYSTIMESTAMP


   This will returns the system date, including fractional seconds and time zone of the
    database.


    Ex:
        SQL>   select systimestamp from dual;
                SYSTIMESTAMP
                ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
                24-DEC-06 03.49.31.830099 AM +05:30


e) LOCALTIMESTAMP


   This will returns local timestamp in the active time zone information, with no time
   zone information shown.


    Ex:
        SQL>   select localtimestamp from dual;

                LOCALTIMESTAMP
                ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
                24-DEC-06 03.44.18.502874 AM


f) DBTIMEZONE


  This will returns the current database time zone in UTC format. (Coordinated Universal
  Time)


  Ex:
        SQL>   select dbtimezone from dual;

                DBTIMEZONE
                ---------------
                  -07:00


g) SESSIONTIMEZONE


© Copy rights are reserved.
54



  This will returns the value of the current session’s time zone.


  Ex:
      SQL>    select sessiontimezone from dual;


                SESSIONTIMEZONE
                ------------------------------------
                +05:30



h) TO_CHAR


  This will be used to extract various date formats.
  The available date formats as follows.


  Syntax: to_char (date, format)


  DATE FORMATS



        D              --      No of days in week
        DD             --      No of days in month
        DDD            --      No of days in year
        MM             --      No of month
        MON            --      Three letter abbreviation of month
        MONTH          --      Fully spelled out month
        RM             --      Roman numeral month
        DY             --      Three letter abbreviated day
        DAY            --      Fully spelled out day
        Y              --      Last one digit of the year
        YY             --      Last two digits of the year
        YYY            --      Last three digits of the year
        YYYY           --      Full four digit year
        SYYYY          --      Signed year
        I              --      One digit year from ISO standard
        IY             --      Two digit year from ISO standard



© Copy rights are reserved.
55

       IYY             --      Three digit year from ISO standard
       IYYY            --      Four digit year from ISO standard
       Y, YYY          --      Year with comma
       YEAR            --      Fully spelled out year
       CC              --      Century
       Q               --      No of quarters
       W               --      No of weeks in month
       WW              --      No of weeks in year
       IW              --      No of weeks in year from ISO standard
       HH              --      Hours
       MI              --      Minutes
       SS              --      Seconds
       FF              --      Fractional seconds
       AM    or PM     --      Displays AM or PM depending upon time of day
       A.M   or P.M    --      Displays A.M or P.M depending upon time of day
       AD    or BC     --      Displays AD or BC depending upon the date
       A.D   or B.C    --      Displays AD or BC depending upon the date
       FM              --      Prefix to month or day, suppresses padding of month or day
       TH              --      Suffix to a number
       SP              --      suffix to a number to be spelled out
       SPTH            --      Suffix combination of TH and SP to be both spelled out
       THSP            --      same as SPTH


Ex:
  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'dd month yyyy hh:mi:ss am dy') from dual;


                TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DD MONTH YYYYHH:MI
                ----------------------------------------------------
                24 december 2006 02:03:23 pm sun


  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'dd month year') from dual;




                TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDMONTHYEAR')
                -------------------------------------------------------




© Copy rights are reserved.
56

               24 december two thousand six


  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'dd fmmonth year') from dual;


               TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DD FMMONTH YEAR')
               -------------------------------------------------------
               24 december two thousand six


  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'ddth DDTH') from dual;


               TO_CHAR(S
               ------------
               24th 24TH


  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'ddspth DDSPTH') from dual;


               TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDSPTHDDSPTH
               ------------------------------------------
               twenty-fourth TWENTY-FOURTH


  SQL>   select to_char(sysdate,'ddsp Ddsp DDSP ') from dual;


               TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDSPDDSPDDSP')
               ------------------------------------------------
               twenty-four Twenty-Four TWENTY-FOUR


i) TO_DATE


  This will be used to convert the string into data format.


  Syntax: to_date (date)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select to_char(to_date('24/dec/2006','dd/mon/yyyy'), 'dd * month * day')
             from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
57

                TO_CHAR(TO_DATE('24/DEC/20
                --------------------------
                24 * december * Sunday


     -- If you are not using to_char oracle will display output in default date format.


j) ADD_MONTHS


  This will add the specified months to the given date.


  Syntax: add_months (date, no_of_months)


  Ex:
        SQL>   select add_months(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), 5) from dual;


                       ADD_MONTHS
                       ----------------
                       11-JUN-90


        SQL>   select add_months(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), -5) from dual;


                       ADD_MONTH
                       ---------------
                       11-AUG-89


         If no_of_months is zero then it will display the same date.
         If no_of_months is null then it will display nothing.


k) MONTHS_BETWEEN


  This will give difference of months between two dates.


  Syntax: months_between (date1, date2)


  Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
58

      SQL>   select months_between(to_date('11-aug-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), to_date('11-
             jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy')) from dual;




        MONTHS_BETWEEN(TO_DATE('11-AUG-1990','DD-MON-YYYY'),TO_DATE('11-JAN-
        1990','DD-MON-YYYY'))
        -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               7
      SQL>   select months_between(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), to_date('11-
             aug-1990','dd-mon-yyyy')) from dual;


        MONTHS_BETWEEN(TO_DATE('11-JAN-1990','DD-MON-YYYY'),TO_DATE('11-AUG-
        1990','DD-MON-YYYY'))
        -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              -7


l) NEXT_DAY


  This will produce next day of the given day from the specified date.


  Syntax: next_day (date, day)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select next_day(to_date('24-dec-2006','dd-mon-yyyy'),'sun') from dual;


                       NEXT_DAY(
                       -------------
                       31-DEC-06


     -- If the day parameter is null then it will display nothing.


m) LAST_DAY


  This will produce last day of the given date.




© Copy rights are reserved.
59



  Syntax: last_day (date)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select last_day(to_date('24-dec-2006','dd-mon-yyyy'),'sun') from dual;
                      LAST_DAY(
                      -------------
                      31-DEC-06


n) EXTRACT


  This is used to extract a portion of the date value.


  Syntax: extract ((year | month | day | hour | minute | second), date)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select extract(year from sysdate) from dual;
               EXTRACT(YEARFROMSYSDATE)
               ------------------------------------
                              2006


     -- You can extract only one value at a time.


o) GREATEST


   This will give the greatest date.


   Syntax: greatest (date1, date2, date3 … daten)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select greatest(to_date('11-jan-90','dd-mon-yy'),to_date('11-mar-90','dd-
             mon-yy'),to_date('11-apr-90','dd-mon-yy')) from dual;


                       GREATEST(
                       -------------




© Copy rights are reserved.
60

                         11-APR-90


p) LEAST


   This will give the least date.
   Syntax: least (date1, date2, date3 … daten)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select least(to_date('11-jan-90','dd-mon-yy'),to_date('11-mar-90','dd-mon-
             yy'),to_date('11-apr-90','dd-mon-yy')) from dual;


                       LEAST(
                       -------------
                         11-JAN-90


q) ROUND


  Round will rounds the date to which it was equal to or greater than the given date.


  Syntax: round (date, (day | month | year))


  If the second parameter was year then round will checks the month of the given date in
  the following ranges.


                     JAN      --       JUN
                     JUL      --       DEC


  If the month falls between JAN and JUN then it returns the first day of the current year.
  If the month falls between JUL and DEC then it returns the first day of the next year.


  If the second parameter was month then round will checks the day of the given date in
  the following ranges.


                     1        --       15
                     16       --       31




© Copy rights are reserved.
61

  If the day falls between 1 and 15 then it returns the first day of the current month.
  If the day falls between 16 and 31 then it returns the first day of the next month.


  If the second parameter was day then round will checks the week day of the given date
  in the following ranges.


                      SUN     --     WED
                      THU     --     SUN


  If the week day falls between SUN and WED then it returns the previous sunday.
  If the weekday falls between THU and SUN then it returns the next sunday.


       If the second parameter was null then it returns nothing.

    If the you are not specifying the second parameter then round will resets the time
        to the begining of the current day in case of user specified date.

    If the you are not specifying the second parameter then round will resets the time
        to the begining of the next day in case of sysdate.


  Ex:
       SQL>   select round(to_date('24-dec-04','dd-mon-yy'),'year'), round(to_date('11-mar-
              06','dd-mon-yy'),'year') from dual;


                      ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_
                      ------------   ---------------
                      01-JAN-05      01-JAN-06


       SQL>   select round(to_date('11-jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month'), round(to_date('18-
              jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month') from dual;


                      ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_
                      ------------- ---------------
                      01-JAN-04       01-FEB-04


       SQL>   select round(to_date('26-dec-06','dd-mon-yy'),'day'), round(to_date('29-dec-
              06','dd-mon-yy'),'day') from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
62

                     ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_
                     -------------- --------------
                     24-DEC-06       31-DEC-06


      SQL>   select to_char(round(to_date('24-dec-06','dd-mon-yy')), 'dd mon yyyy
             hh:mi:ss am') from dual;
                     TO_CHAR(ROUND(TO_DATE('
                     ---------------------------------
                     24 dec 2006 12:00:00 am
r) TRUNC


  Trunc will chops off the date to which it was equal to or less than the given date.


  Syntax: trunc (date, (day | month | year))


    If the second parameter was year then it always returns the first day of the current
        year.

    If the second parameter was month then it always returns the first day of the
        current month.

    If the second parameter was day then it always returns the previous sunday.
    If the second parameter was null then it returns nothing.
    If the you are not specifying the second parameter then trunk will resets the time
        to the begining of the current day.


  Ex:
      SQL>   select trunc(to_date('24-dec-04','dd-mon-yy'),'year'), trunc(to_date('11-mar-
             06','dd-mon-yy'),'year') from dual;


                     TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_
                     ------------- --------------
                     01-JAN-04      01-JAN-06


      SQL>   select trunc(to_date('11-jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month'), trunc(to_date('18-jan-
             04','dd-mon-yy'),'month') from dual;




© Copy rights are reserved.
63

                     TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_
                     ------------- -------------
                     01-JAN-04      01-JAN-04


      SQL>   select trunc(to_date('26-dec-06','dd-mon-yy'),'day'), trunc(to_date('29-dec-
             06','dd-mon-yy'),'day') from dual;
                      TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_
                     ------------- --------------
                     24-DEC-06 24-DEC-06


     SQL>   select to_char(trunc(to_date('24-dec-06','dd-mon-yy')), 'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss
             am') from dual;


                     TO_CHAR(TRUNC(TO_DATE('
                     ---------------------------------
                     24 dec 2006 12:00:00 am


s) NEW_TIME


   This will give the desired timezone’s date and time.


   Syntax: new_time (date, current_timezone, desired_timezone)


   Available timezones are as follows.


  TIMEZONES



               AST/ADT        --    Atlantic standard/day light time
               BST/BDT        --    Bering standard/day light time
               CST/CDT        --    Central standard/day light time
               EST/EDT        --    Eastern standard/day light time
               GMT            --    Greenwich mean time
               HST/HDT        --    Alaska-Hawaii standard/day light time
               MST/MDT        --    Mountain standard/day light time
               NST            --    Newfoundland standard time
               PST/PDT        --    Pacific standard/day light time



© Copy rights are reserved.
64

               YST/YDT        --      Yukon standard/day light time


  Ex:
     SQL>   select to_char(new_time(sysdate,'gmt','yst'),'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from
            dual;


                      TO_CHAR(NEW_TIME(SYSDAT
                      -----------------------------------
                      24 dec 2006 02:51:20 pm


     SQL>   select to_char(new_time(sysdate,'gmt','est'),'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from
            dual;


                      TO_CHAR(NEW_TIME(SYSDAT
                      -----------------------
                      24 dec 2006 06:51:26 pm


t) COALESCE


  This will give the first non-null date.


  Syntax: coalesce (date1, date2, date3 … daten)


  Ex:
      SQL>   select coalesce('12-jan-90','13-jan-99'), coalesce(null,'12-jan-90','23-mar-
             98',null) from dual;


                      COALESCE( COALESCE(
                      ------------- ------------
                      12-jan-90       12-jan-90


MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS


                             Uid
                             User
                             Vsize




© Copy rights are reserved.
65

                               Rank
                               Dense_rank


a) UID


   This will returns the integer value corresponding to the user currently logged in.


   Ex:
         SQL>   select uid from dual;


                           UID
                      ----------
                           319


b) USER


   This will returns the login’s user name.


   Ex:
      SQL>   select user from dual;


                        USER
                        ----------------
                        SAKETH


c) VSIZE


   This will returns the number of bytes in the expression.


   Ex:
         SQL>   select vsize(123), vsize('computer'), vsize('12-jan-90') from dual;


                 VSIZE(123) VSIZE('COMPUTER') VSIZE('12-JAN-90')
                 ------------- ----------------------- ----------------------
                       3                8                    9




© Copy rights are reserved.
66

d) RANK


   This will give the non-sequential ranking.


   Ex:
      SQL>   select rownum,sal from (select sal from emp order by sal desc);
                         ROWNUM        SAL
                         ---------- ----------
                              1    5000
                              2    3000
                              3    3000
                              4    2975
                              5    2850
                              6    2450
                              7    1600
                              8    1500
                              9    1300
                              10    1250
                              11    1250
                              12    1100
                              13    1000
                              14    950
                              15    800


  SQL>    select rank(2975) within group(order by sal desc) from emp;


               RANK(2975)WITHINGROUP(ORDERBYSALDESC)
               ---------------------------------------------------------
                                        4


d) DENSE_RANK


   This will give the sequential ranking.


Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
67

  SQL>    select dense_rank(2975) within group(order by sal desc) from emp;


               DENSE_RANK(2975)WITHINGROUP(ORDERBYSALDESC)
               -----------------------------------------------------------------
                                            3



CONVERSION FUNCTIONS


                             Bin_to_num
                             Chartorowid
                             Rowidtochar
                             To_number
                             To_char
                             To_date
a) BIN_TO_NUM


   This will convert the binary value to its numerical equivalent.


   Syntax: bin_to_num( binary_bits)


   Ex:
       SQL>   select bin_to_num(1,1,0) from dual;


                      BIN_TO_NUM(1,1,0)
                      ------------------------
                                 6


        If all the bits are zero then it produces zero.
        If all the bits are null then it produces an error.


b) CHARTOROWID


   This will convert a character string to act like an internal oracle row identifier or rowid.


c) ROWIDTOCHAR



© Copy rights are reserved.
68



  This will convert an internal oracle row identifier or rowid to character string.


d) TO_NUMBER


  This will convert a char or varchar to number.


e) TO_CHAR


  This will convert a number or date to character string.


f) TO_DATE


  This will convert a number, char or varchar to a date.



GROUP FUNCTIONS


                             Sum
                             Avg
                             Max
                             Min
                             Count


Group functions will be applied on all the rows but produces single output.


a) SUM


   This will give the sum of the values of the specified column.


   Syntax: sum (column)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select sum(sal) from emp;


                     SUM(SAL)



© Copy rights are reserved.
69

                      ----------
                       38600


b) AVG


   This will give the average of the values of the specified column.


   Syntax: avg (column)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select avg(sal) from emp;


                      AVG(SAL)
                      ---------------
                      2757.14286


c) MAX


   This will give the maximum of the values of the specified column.


   Syntax: max (column)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select max(sal) from emp;


                      MAX(SAL)
                      ----------
                       5000


d) MIN


   This will give the minimum of the values of the specified column.


   Syntax: min (column)


   Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
70

      SQL>   select min(sal) from emp;


                      MIN(SAL)
                      ----------
                       500




e) COUNT


   This will give the count of the values of the specified column.


   Syntax: count (column)


   Ex:
      SQL>   select count(sal),count(*) from emp;


                    COUNT(SAL)       COUNT(*)
                    --------------   ------------
                         14              14




© Copy rights are reserved.
71




                                                                        CONSTRAINTS


Constraints are categorized as follows.


       Domain integrity constraints
           Not null
           Check


       Entity integrity constraints
           Unique
           Primary key


       Referential integrity constraints
           Foreign key


Constraints are always attached to a column not a table.
We can add constraints in three ways.


           Column level          -- along with the column definition

           Table level           -- after the table definition

           Alter level           -- using alter command


While adding constraints you need not specify the name but the type only, oracle will
internally name the constraint.
If you want to give a name to the constraint, you have to use the constraint clause.


NOT NULL



© Copy rights are reserved.
72



This is used to avoid null values.
We can add this constraint in column level only.


Ex:
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) not null, name varchar(10), marks
          number(3));


   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) constraint nn not null, name varchar(10),
          marks number(3));


CHECK


This is used to insert the values based on specified condition.
We can add this constraint in all three levels.


Ex:
   COLUMN LEVEL



   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3) check
          (marks > 300));
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3)
          constraint ch check(marks > 300));


   TABLE LEVEL



   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), check
          (marks > 300));
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          constraint ch check(marks > 300));


   ALTER LEVEL


   SQL>   alter table student add check(marks>300);
   SQL>   alter table student add constraint ch check(marks>300);




© Copy rights are reserved.
73

UNIQUE


This is used to avoid duplicates but it allow nulls.
We can add this constraint in all three levels.




Ex:
   COLUMN LEVEL


   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) unique, name varchar(10), marks
           number(3));
   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) constraint un unique, name varchar(10),
           marks number(3));


      TABLE LEVEL


   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
           unique(no));
   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
           constraint un unique(no));


   ALTER LEVEL


   SQL>    alter table student add unique(no);
   SQL>    alter table student add constraint un unique(no);



PRIMARY KEY


       This is used to avoid duplicates and nulls. This will work as combination of unique
          and not null.
         Primary key always attached to the parent table.

       We can add this constraint in all three levels.


Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
74

   COLUMN LEVEL



   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) primary key, name varchar(10), marks
           number(3));
   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) constraint pk primary key, name varchar(10),
           marks number(3));




   TABLE LEVEL


   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
           primary key(no));
   SQL>    create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
           constraint pk primary key(no));


   ALTER LEVEL


   SQL>    alter table student add primary key(no);
   SQL>    alter table student add constraint pk primary key(no);



FOREIGN KEY


       This is used to reference the parent table primary key column which allows
          duplicates.
         Foreign key always attached to the child table.

       We can add this constraint in table and alter levels only.


Ex:
   TABLE LEVEL


   SQL>    create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
           primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno));
   SQL>    create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
           constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references
           dept(deptno));




© Copy rights are reserved.
75

   ALTER LEVEL


   SQL>   alter table emp add foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno);
   SQL>   alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno);


Once the primary key and foreign key relationship has been created then you can not
remove any parent record if the dependent childs exists.




USING ON DELTE CASCADE


By using this clause you can remove the parent record even it childs exists.
Because when ever you remove parent record oracle automatically removes all its
dependent records from child table, if this clause is present while creating foreign key
constraint.


Ex:
   TABLE LEVEL



   SQL>   create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
          primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete
          cascade);
   SQL>   create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
          constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references
          dept(deptno) on delete cascade);


   ALTER LEVEL


   SQL>   alter table emp add foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete
          cascade;
   SQL>   alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on
          delete cascade;


COMPOSITE KEYS


A composite key can be defined on a combination of columns.
We can define composite keys on entity integrity and referential integrity constraints.



© Copy rights are reserved.
76

Composite key can be defined in table and alter levels only.


Ex:
   UNIQUE (TABLE LEVEL)


   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          unique(no,name));
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          constraint un unique(no,name));


   UNIQUE (ALTER LEVEL)


   SQL>   alter table student add unique(no,name);
   SQL>   alter table student add constraint un unique(no,name);


   PRIMARY KEY (TABLE LEVEL)



   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          primary key(no,name));
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          constraint pk primary key(no,name));


   PRIMARY KEY (ALTER LEVEL)


   SQL>   alter table student add primary key(no,anme);
   SQL>   alter table student add constraint pk primary key(no,name);


   FOREIGN KEY (TABLE LEVEL)


   SQL>   create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
          dname varchar(10), primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno,dname) references
          dept(deptno,dname));
   SQL>   create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2),
          dname varchar(10), constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign
          key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname));


   FOREIGN KEY (ALTER LEVEL)




© Copy rights are reserved.
77

   SQL>   alter table emp add foreign key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname);
   SQL>   alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno,dname) references
          dept(deptno,dname);


DEFERRABLE CONSTRAINTS


Each constraint has two additional attributes to support deferred checking of constraints.
                     Deferred initially immediate
                     Deferred initially deferred
Deferred initially immediate checks for constraint violation at the time of insert.
Deferred initially deferred checks for constraint violation at the time of commit.


Ex:
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2), name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          constraint un unique(no) deferred initially immediate);
   SQL>   create table student(no number(2), name varchar(10), marks number(3),
          constraint un unique(no) deferred initially deferred);
   SQL>   alter table student add constraint un unique(no) deferrable initially deferred;


   SQL>   set constraints all immediate;
   This will enable all the constraints violations at the time of inserting.


   SQL>   set constraints all deferred;
   This will enable all the constraints violations at the time of commit.


OPERATIONS WITH CONSTRAINTS


Possible operations with constraints as follows.


                     Enable

                   Disable
                     Enforce
                     Drop


ENABLE




© Copy rights are reserved.
78

This will enable the constraint. Before enable, the constraint will check the existing data.


Ex:
   SQL>   alter table student enable constraint un;


DISABLE



This will disable the constraint.


Ex:
   SQL>   alter table student enable constraint un;


ENFORCE



This will enforce the constraint rather than enable for future inserts or updates.
This will not check for existing data while enforcing data.


Ex:
   SQL>   alter table student enforce constraint un;


DROP



This will remove the constraint.


Ex:
   SQL>   alter table student drop constraint un;
   Once the table is dropped, constraints automatically will drop.




© Copy rights are reserved.
79




                                                              CASE AND DEFAULT


CASE


Case is similar to decode but easier to understand while going through coding


Ex:
SQL>   Select sal,
        Case sal
              When 500 then ‘low’
              When 5000 then ‘high’
              Else ‘medium’
        End case
        From emp;


                     SAL      CASE
                     -----    --------
                     500      low
                     2500     medium
                     2000     medium
                     3500     medium
                     3000     medium
                     5000     high
                     4000     medium
                     5000     high
                     1800     medium



© Copy rights are reserved.
80

                     1200      medium
                     2000      medium
                     2700      medium
                     2200      medium
                     3200      medium




DEFAULT


Default can be considered as a substitute behavior of not null constraint when applied to
new rows being entered into the table.
When you define a column with the default keyword followed by a value, you are actually
telling the database that, on insert if a row was not assigned a value for this column, use
the default value that you have specified.
Default is applied only during insertion of new rows.


Ex:
   SQL>      create table student(no number(2) default 11,name varchar(2));
   SQL>      insert into student values(1,'a');
   SQL>      insert into student(name) values('b');


   SQL>      select * from student;


                       NO   NAME
                     ------ ---------
                       1       a
                       11      b


      SQL>   insert into student values(null, ‘c’);


      SQL>   select * from student;


                       NO   NAME
                     ------ ---------
                       1       a


© Copy rights are reserved.
81

                     11       b
                              C
      -- Default can not override nulls.




                                                                ABSTRACT DATA TYPES


Some times you may want type which holds all types of data including numbers, chars
and special characters something like this. You can not achieve this using pre-defined
types.
You can define custom types which holds your desired data.


Ex:
   Suppose in a table we have address column which holds hno and city information.
   We will define a custom type which holds both numeric as well as char data.


   CREATING ADT



   SQL>    create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10)); /


   CREATING TABLE BASED ON ADT



   SQL>    create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),address addr);


   INSERTING DATA INTO ADT TABLES



   SQL>    insert into student values(1,'a',addr(111,'hyd'));
   SQL>    insert into student values(2,'b',addr(222,'bang'));
   SQL>    insert into student values(3,'c',addr(333,'delhi'));


   SELECTING DATA FROM ADT TABLES



   SQL>   select * from student;




© Copy rights are reserved.
82

       NO NAME ADDRESS(HNO, CITY)
       --- ------- -------------------------
       1       a       ADDR(111, 'hyd')
       2       b       ADDR(222, 'bang')
       3       c       ADDR(333, 'delhi')


   SQL>    select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s;


       NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY
       ---- ------- ----------------- ----------------
       1           a       111         hyd
       2           b       222         bang
       3           c       333         delhi


UPDATE WITH ADT TABLES



SQL>   update student s set s.address.city = 'bombay' where s.address.hno = 333;
SQL>   select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s;


       NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY
       ---- ------- ----------------- ----------------
       1           a       111         hyd
       2           b       222         bang
       3           c       333         bombay


DELETE WITH ADT TABLES



SQL>   delete student s where s.address.hno = 111;
SQL>   select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s;


       NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY
       ---- ------- ----------------- ----------------
       2           b       222         bang
       3           c       333         bombay


DROPPING ADT




© Copy rights are reserved.
83

SQL>   drop type addr;




                                                    OBJECT VIEWS AND METHODS

OBJECT VIEWS


If you want to implement objects with the existing table, object views come into picture.
You define the object and create a view which relates this object to the existing table
nothing but object view.


Object views are used to relate the user defined objects to the existing table.


Ex:
   1) Assume that the table student has already been created with the following columns
        SQL>   create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),hno number(3),city
               varchar(10));
   2) Create the following types
        SQL>   create type addr as object(hno number(2),city varchar(10));/
        SQL>   create type stud as object(name varchar(10),address addr);/
   3) Relate the objects to the student table by creating the object view
        SQL>   create view student_ov(no,stud_info) as select no,stud(name,addr(hno,city))
               from student;
   4) Now you can insert data into student table in two ways
        a) By regular insert
           SQL>   Insert into student values(1,’sudha’,111,’hyd’);
        b) By using object view
           SQL>   Insert into student_ov values(1,stud(‘sudha’,addr(111,’hyd’)));


METHODS




© Copy rights are reserved.
84

You can define methods which are nothing but functions in types and apply in the tables
which holds the types;


Ex:
  1) Defining methods in types
       SQL>   Create type stud as object(name varchar(10),marks number(3),
              Member function makrs_f(marks in number) return number,
                Pragma restrict_references(marks_f,wnds,rnds,wnps,fnps));/
   2) Defining type body
        SQL>   Create type body stud as
               Member function marks_f(marks in number) return number is
               Begin
                 Return (marks+100);
               End marks_f;
               End;/
      3) Create a table using stud type
         SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),info stud);
      4) Insert some data into student table
         SQL>   Insert into student values(1,stud(‘sudha’,100));
      5) Using method in select
         SQL>   Select s.info.marks_f(s.info.marks) from student s;
      -- Here we are using the pragma restrict_references to avoid the writes to the
        Database.




© Copy rights are reserved.
85




                                                  VARRAYS AND NESTED TABLES


VARRAYS

A varying array allows you to store repeating attributes of a record in a single row but
with limit.


Ex:
  1) We can create varrays using oracle types as well as user defined types.
      a) Varray using pre-defined types
         SQL>    Create type va as varray(5) of varchar(10);/
      b) Varrays using user defined types
         SQL>    Create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10));/
         SQL>    Create type va as varray(5) of addr;/
  2) Using varray in table
      SQL>    Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),address va);
  3) Inserting values into varray table
      SQL>    Insert into student values(1,’sudha’,va(addr(111,’hyd’)));
      SQL>    Insert into student values(2,’jagan’,va(addr(111,’hyd’),addr(222,’bang’)));
  4) Selecting data from varray table
      SQL>    Select * from student;
      -- This will display varray column data along with varray and adt;
      SQL>    Select no,name, s.* from student s1, table(s1.address) s;
      -- This will display in general format
  5) Instead of s.* you can specify the columns in varray
      SQL>    Select no,name, s.hno,s.city from student s1,table(s1.address) s;


  -- Update and delete not possible in varrays.



© Copy rights are reserved.
86

  -- Here we used table function which will take the varray column as input for producing
      output excluding varray and types.




NESTED TABLES

A nested table is, as its name implies, a table within a table. In this case it is a table that
is represented as a column within another table.
Nested table has the same effect of varrays but has no limit.


Ex:
  1) We can create nested tables using oracle types and user defined types which has no
      limit.
      a) Nested tables using pre-defined types
         SQL>    Create type nt as table of varchar(10);/
      b) Nested tables using user defined types
         SQL>    Create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10));/
         SQL>    Create type nt as table of addr;/
  2) Using nested table in table
      SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),address nt) nested table
               address store as student_temp;
  3) Inserting values into table which has nested table
      SQL>   Insert into student values (1,’sudha’,nt(addr(111,’hyd’)));
      SQL>   Insert into student values (2,’jagan’,nt(addr(111,’hyd’),addr(222,’bang’)));
  4) Selecting data from table which has nested table
      SQL>   Select * from student;
      -- This will display nested table column data along with nested table and adt;
      SQL>   Select no,name, s.* from student s1, table(s1.address) s;
      -- This will display in general format
  5) Instead of s.* you can specify the columns in nested table
      SQL>   Select no,name, s.hno,s.city from student s1,table(s1.address) s;
  6) Inserting nested table data to the existing row
      SQL>   Insert into table(select address from student where no=1)



© Copy rights are reserved.
87

             values(addr(555,’chennai’));
  7) Update in nested tables
      SQL>   Update table(select address from student where no=2) s set s.city=’bombay’
             where s.hno = 222;
  8) Delete in nested table
      SQL>   Delete table(select address from student where no=3) s where s.hno=333;


DATA MODEL

                     ALL_COLL_TYPES
                     ALL_TYPES
                     DBA_COLL_TYPES
                     DBA_TYPES
                     USER_COLL_TYPES
                     USER_TYPES




© Copy rights are reserved.
88




                                                                    FLASHBACK QUERY

Used to retrieve the data which has been already committed with out going for recovery.


Flashbacks are of two types
          Time base flashback
          SCN based flashback (SCN stands for System Change Number)


Ex:


1) Using time based flashback
   a) SQL> Select *from student;
          -- This will display all the rows
   b) SQL> Delete student;
   c) SQL> Commit;             -- this will commit the work.
   d) SQL> Select *from student;
          -- Here it will display nothing
   e) Then execute the following procedures
          SQL>   Exec dbms_flashback.enable_at_time(sysdate-2/1440)
   f) SQL> Select *from student;
          -- Here it will display the lost data
          -- The lost data will come but the current system time was used
   g) SQL> Exec dbms_flashback.disable
          -- Here we have to disable the flashback to enable it again


2) Using SCN based flashback
   a) Declare a variable to store SCN
          SQL>   Variable s number




© Copy rights are reserved.
89

   b) Get the SCN
      SQL>   Exec :s := exec dbms_flashback.get_system_change_number
   c) To see the SCN
      SQL>   Print s
   d) Then execute the following procedures
      SQL>   Exec dbms_flashback.enable_at_system_change_number(:s)
      SQL>   Exec dbms_flashback.disable

                                                                  EXTERNAL TABLES

You can user external table feature to access external files as if they are tables inside the
database.
When you create an external table, you define its structure and location with in oracle.
When you query the table, oracle reads the external table and returns the results just as
if the data had been stored with in the database.


ACCESSING EXTERNAL TABLE DATA


To access external files from within oracle, you must first use the create directory
command to define a directory object pointing to the external file location
Users who will access the external files must have the read and write privilege on the
directory.


Ex:


CREATING DIRECTORY AND OS LEVEL FILE


  SQL>   Sqlplus system/manager
  SQL>   Create directory saketh_dir as ‘/Visdb/visdb/9.2.0/external’;
  SQL>   Grant all on directory saketh_dir to saketh;
  SQL>   Conn saketh/saketh
  SQL>   Spool dept.lst
  SQL>   Select deptno || ‘,’ || dname || ‘,’ || loc from dept;
  SQL>   Spool off


CREATING EXTERNAL TABLE




© Copy rights are reserved.
90

SQL>   Create table dept_ext
       (deptno number(2),
       Dname varchar(14),
       Loc varchar(13))
       Organization external ( type oracle_loader
                                 Default directory saketh_dir
                                 Access parameters
                                 ( records delimited by newline
                                  Fields terminated by “,”
                                  ( deptno number(2),
                                    Dname varchar(14),
                                    Loc varchar(13)))
       Location (‘/Visdb/visdb/9.2.0/dept.lst’));


SELECTING DATA FROM EXTERNAL TABLE


SQL>   select * from dept_ext;
This will read from dept.lst which is a operating system level file.


LIMITATIONS ON EXTERNAL TABLES


   a) You can not perform insert, update, and delete operations
   a) Indexing not possible
   b) Constraints not possible


BENEFITS OF EXTERNAL TABLES


   a) Queries of external tables complete very quickly even though a full table scan id
        required with each access
   b) You can join external tables to each other or to standard tables




© Copy rights are reserved.
91




                                                                        REF DEREF VALUE

REF


         The ref function allows referencing of existing row objects.
         Each of the row objects has an object id value assigned to it.
         The object id assigned can be seen by using ref function.


DEREF


         The deref function performs opposite action.
         It takes a reference value of object id and returns the value of the row objects.


VALUE


       Even though the primary table is object table, still it displays the rows in general
          format.
         To display the entire structure of the object, this will be used.


Ex:
  1) create vendot_adt type
          SQL>   Create type vendor_adt as object (vendor_code number(2), vendor_name
                 varchar(2), vendor_address varchar(10));/
  2) create object tables vendors and vendors1
          SQL>   Create table vendors of vendor_adt;
          SQL>   Create table vendors1 of vendor_adt;
  3) insert the data into object tables
          SQL>   insert into vendors values(1, ‘a’, ‘hyd’);



© Copy rights are reserved.
92

      SQL>   insert into vendors values(2, ‘b’, ‘bang’);
      SQL>   insert into vendors1 values(3, ‘c’, ‘delhi’);
      SQL>   insert into vendors1 values(4, ‘d’, ‘chennai’);
  4) create another table orders which holds the vendor_adt type also.
      SQL>   Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt);
                                    Or


      SQL>   Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt with
             rowid);
  5) insert the data into orders table
      The vendor_info column in the following syntaxes will store object id of any table
      which is referenced by vendor_adt object ( both vendors and vendors1).
      SQL>   insert into orders values(11,(select ref(v) from vendors v where vendor_code
             = 1));
      SQL>   insert into orders values(12,(select ref(v) from vendors v where vendor_code
             = 2));
      SQL>   insert into orders values(13,(select ref(v1) from vendors1 v1 where
             vendor_code = 1));
      SQL>   insert into orders values(14,(select ref(v1) from vendors1 v1 where
             vendor_code = 1));
   6) To see the object ids of vendor table
      SQL>   Select ref(V) from vendors v;
   7) If you see the vendor_info of orders it will show only the object ids not the values,
      to see the values
      SQL>   Select deref(o.vendor_info) from orders o;
   8) Even though the vendors table is object table it will not show the adt along with
      data, to see the data along with the adt
      SQL>Select      * from vendors;
      This will give the data without adt.
      SQL>Select      value(v) from vendors v;
      This will give the columns data along wih the type.


REF CONSTRAINTS


          Ref can also acts as constraint.




© Copy rights are reserved.
93


         Even though vendors1 also holding vendor_adt, the orders table will store the
           object ids of vendors only because it is constrained to that table only.

         The vendor_info column in the following syntaxes will store object ids of
           vendors only.




SQL>   Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt scope is
       vendors);
                                  Or
SQL>   Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt constraint fk
       references vendors);




© Copy rights are reserved.
94




                                            OBJECT VIEWS WITH REFERENCES

To implement the objects and the ref constraints to the existing tables, what we can do?
Simply drop the both tables and recreate with objects and ref constrains.


But you can achieve this with out dropping the tables and without losing the data by
creating object views with references.


Ex:
   a) Create the following tables
      SQL>   Create table student1(no number(2) primary key,name varchar(2),marks
             number(3));
      SQL>   Create table student2(no number(2) primary key,hno number(3),city
             varchar(10),id number(2),foreign Key(id) references student1(no));
   b) Insert the records into both tables
      SQL>   insert into student1(1,’a’,100);
      SQL>   insert into student1(2,’b’,200);
      SQL>   insert into student2(11,111,’hyd’,1);
      SQL>   insert into student2(12,222,’bang’,2);
      SQL>   insert into student2(13,333,’bombay’,1);
   c) Create the type
      SQL>   create or replace type stud as object(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks
             number(3));/
   d) Generating OIDs
      SQL>   Create or replace view student1_ov of stud with object identifier(or id) (no) as
             Select * from Student1;
   e) Generating references
      SQL>   Create or replace view student2_ov as select no,hno,city,



© Copy rights are reserved.
95

              make_ref(student1_ov,id) id from Student2;
   d) Query the following
       SQL>   select *from student1_ov;
       SQL>   select ref(s) from student1_ov s;
       SQL>   select values(s) from student1_ov;
       SQ>   select *from student2_ov;
       SQL>   select deref(s.id) from student2_ov s;

                                                                               PARTITIONS

A single logical table can be split into a number of physically separate pieces based on
ranges of key values. Each of the parts of the table is called a partition.
A non-partitioned table can not be partitioned later.


TYPES


       Range partitions
       List partitions
       Hash partitions
       Sub partitions


ADVANTAGES


       Reducing    downtime       for   scheduled   maintenance,   which   allows   maintenance
        operations to be carried out on selected partitions while other partitions are
        available to users.
       Reducing downtime due to data failure, failure of a particular partition will no way
        affect other partitions.
       Partition independence allows for concurrent use of the various partitions for
        various purposes.


ADVANTAGES OF PARTITIONS BY STORING THEM IN DIFFERENT TABLESPACES


       Reduces the possibility of data corruption in multiple partitions.
       Back up and recovery of each partition can be done independently.




© Copy rights are reserved.
96

DISADVANTAGES


      Partitioned tables cannot contain any columns with long or long raw datatypes,
       LOB types or object types.




RANGE PARTITIONS


a) Creating range partitioned table
   SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by range(no)
          (partition p1 values less than(10), partition p2 values less than(20), partition p3
          values less than(30),partition p4 values less than(maxvalue));


  ** if you are using maxvalue for the last partition, you can not add a partition.
b) Inserting records into range partitioned table
   SQL>   Insert into student values(1,’a’);      -- this will go to p1
   SQL>   Insert into student values(11,’b’);     -- this will go to p2
   SQL>   Insert into student values(21,’c’);     -- this will go to p3
   SQL>   Insert into student values(31,’d’);     -- this will go to p4
c) Retrieving records from range partitioned table
   SQL>   Select *from student;
   SQL>   Select *from student partition(p1);
d) Possible operations with range partitions
            Add
            Drop
            Truncate
            Rename
            Split
            Move
            Exchange
e) Adding a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student add partition p5 values less than(40);
f) Dropping a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student drop partition p4;



© Copy rights are reserved.
97

g) Renaming a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student rename partition p3 to p6;
h) Truncate a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student truncate partition p6;
i) Splitting a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student split partition p2 at(15) into (partition p21,partition p22);


j) Exchanging a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student exchange partition p1 with table student2;
k) Moving a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student move partition p21 tablespace saketh_ts;


LIST PARTITIONS


a) Creating list partitioned table
   SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by list(no)
          (partition p1 values(1,2,3,4,5), partition p2 values(6,7,8,9,10),partition p3
          values(11,12,13,14,15), partition p4 values(16,17,18,19,20));
b) Inserting records into list partitioned table
    SQL>   Insert into student values(1,’a’);    -- this will go to p1
    SQL>   Insert into student values(6,’b’);    -- this will go to p2
    SQL>   Insert into student values(11,’c’);   -- this will go to p3
    SQL>   Insert into student values(16,’d’);   -- this will go to p4
c) Retrieving records from list partitioned table
   SQL>   Select *from student;
   SQL>   Select *from student partition(p1);
d) Possible operations with list partitions
             Add
             Drop
             Truncate
             Rename
             Move
             Exchange
e) Adding a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student add partition p5 values(21,22,23,24,25);




© Copy rights are reserved.
98

f) Dropping a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student drop partition p4;
g) Renaming a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student rename partition p3 to p6;
h) Truncate a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student truncate partition p6;


i) Exchanging a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student exchange partition p1 with table student2;
j) Moving a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student move partition p2 tablespace saketh_ts;


HASH PARTITIONS


a) Creating hash partitioned table
   SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by hash(no)
          partitions 5;
   Here oracle automatically gives partition names like
                     SYS_P1
                     SYS_P2
                     SYS_P3
                     SYS_P4
                     SYS_P5
b) Inserting records into hash partitioned table
   it will insert the records based on hash function calculated by taking the partition key
   SQL>   Insert into student values(1,’a’);
   SQL>   Insert into student values(6,’b’);
   SQL>   Insert into student values(11,’c’);
   SQL>   Insert into student values(16,’d’);
c) Retrieving records from hash partitioned table
   SQL>   Select *from student;
   SQL>   Select *from student partition(sys_p1);
d) Possible operations with hash partitions
            Add
            Truncate




© Copy rights are reserved.
99

            Rename
            Move
            Exchange
e) Adding a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student add partition p6 ;
f) Renaming a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student rename partition p6 to p7;
g) Truncate a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student truncate partition p7;
h) Exchanging a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student exchange partition sys_p1 with table student2;
i) Moving a partition
  SQL>   Alter table student move partition sys_p2 tablespace saketh_ts;


SUB-PARTITIONS WITH RANGE AND HASH


Subpartitions clause is used by hash only. We can not create subpartitions with list and
hash partitions.


a) Creating subpartitioned table
   SQL>   Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks number(3))
          Partition by range(no) subpartition by hash(name) subpartitions 3
          (Partition p1 values less than(10),partition p2 values less than(20));


This will create two partitions p1 and p2 with three subpartitions for each partition
               P1 –   SYS_SUBP1
                      SYS_SUBP2
                      SYS_SUBP3
               P2 –   SYS_SUBP4
                      SYS_SUBP5
                      SYS_SUBP6
   ** if you are using maxvalue for the last partition, you can not add a partition.
b) Inserting records into subpartitioned table
   SQL>   Insert into student values(1,’a’);       -- this will go to p1
   SQL>   Insert into student values(11,’b’);      -- this will go to p2
c) Retrieving records from subpartitioned table


© Copy rights are reserved.
100

   SQL>   Select *from student;
   SQL>   Select *from student partition(p1);
   SQL>   Select *from student subpartition(sys_subp1);
d) Possible operations with subpartitions
            Add
            Drop
            Truncate
            Rename
            Split
e) Adding a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student add partition p3 values less than(30);
f) Dropping a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student drop partition p3;
g) Renaming a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student rename partition p2 to p3;
h) Truncate a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student truncate partition p1;
i) Splitting a partition
   SQL>   Alter table student split partition p3 at(15) into (partition p31,partition p32);


DATA MODEL


              ALL_IND_PARTITIONS
              ALL_IND_SUBPARTITIONS
              ALL_TAB_PARTITIONS
              ALL_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS
              DBA_IND_PARTITIONS
              DBA_IND_SUBPARTITIONS
              DBA_TAB_PARTITIONS
              DBA_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS
              USER_IND_PARTITIONS
              USER_IND_SUBPARTITIONS
              USER_TAB_PARTITIONS
              USER_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS




© Copy rights are reserved.
101




                                                       GROUP BY AND HAVING


GROUP BY


Using group by, we can create groups of related information.
Columns used in select must be used with group by, otherwise it was not a group by
expression.


Ex:
  SQL>   select deptno, sum(sal) from emp group by deptno;


              DEPTNO      SUM(SAL)
              ---------- ----------
                    10        8750
                    20        10875
                    30        9400


  SQL>   select deptno,job,sum(sal) from emp group by deptno,job;


              DEPTNO JOB              SUM(SAL)
              ---------- ---------    ----------
                    10   CLERK            1300
                    10   MANAGER          2450
                    10   PRESIDENT        5000
                    20   ANALYST          6000
                    20   CLERK            1900
                    20   MANAGER          2975




© Copy rights are reserved.
102

                        30   CLERK             950
                        30   MANAGER          2850
                        30   SALESMAN         5600


HAVING


This will work as where clause which can be used only with group by because of absence
of where clause in group by.
Ex:
   SQL>      select deptno,job,sum(sal) tsal from emp group by deptno,job having sum(sal) >
             3000;


                     DEPTNO     JOB             TSAL
                     ---------- ---------     ----------
                        10    PRESIDENT        5000
                        20    ANALYST          6000
                        30    SALESMAN         5600


      SQL>   select deptno,job,sum(sal) tsal from emp group by deptno,job having sum(sal) >
             3000 order by job;


                  DEPTNO       JOB          TSAL
                  ---------- ---------      ----------
                      20      ANALYST          6000
                      10      PRESIDENT        5000
                      30      SALESMAN         5600


ORDER OF EXECUTION


         Group the rows together based on group by clause.
         Calculate the group functions for each group.
         Choose and eliminate the groups based on the having clause.
         Order the groups based on the specified column.




© Copy rights are reserved.
103




                                                       ROLLUP GROUPING CUBE


These are the enhancements to the group by feature.


USING ROLLUP


This will give the salaries in each department in each job category along wih the total
salary for individual departments and the total salary of all the departments.


SQL>   Select deptno,job,sum(sal) from emp group by rollup(deptno,job);


              DEPTNO      JOB        SUM(SAL)
              ---------- ---------   ----------
                    10   CLERK           1300
                    10   MANAGER         2450
                    10   PRESIDENT       5000
                    10                   8750
                    20   ANALYST         6000
                    20   CLERK           1900
                    20   MANAGER         2975
                    20                  10875
                    30   CLERK            950
                    30   MANAGER         2850
                    30   SALESMAN         5600
                    30                   9400
                                        29025




© Copy rights are reserved.
104



USING GROUPING


In the above query it will give the total salary of the individual departments but with a
blank in the job column and gives the total salary of all the departments with blanks in
deptno and job columns.


To replace these blanks with your desired string grouping will be used


 SQL>   select decode(grouping(deptno),1,'All Depts',deptno),decode(grouping(job),1,'All
        jobs',job),sum(sal) from emp group by rollup(deptno,job);


        DECODE(GROUPING(DEPTNO),1,'ALLDEPTS',DEP DECODE(GR                       SUM(SAL)
        ----------------------------------- ----------------------------------   --------------
               10                                           CLERK                 1300
               10                                           MANAGER               2450
               10                                           PRESIDENT             5000
               10                                           All jobs              8750
               20                                           ANALYST               6000
               20                                           CLERK                 1900
               20                                           MANAGER               2975
               20                                           All jobs             10875
               30                                           CLERK                   950
               30                                           MANAGER               2850
               30                                           SALESMAN              5600
               30                                           All jobs              9400
               All Depts                                    All jobs             29025


  Grouping will return 1 if the column which is specified in the grouping function has been
  used in rollup.
  Grouping will be used in association with decode.


USING CUBE




© Copy rights are reserved.
105

This will give the salaries in each department in each job category, the total salary for
individual departments, the total salary of all the departments and the salaries in each job
category.


SQL>   select decode(grouping(deptno),1,’All Depts’,deptno),decode(grouping(job),1,’All
       Jobs’,job),sum(sal) from emp group by cube(deptno,job);




        DECODE(GROUPING(DEPTNO),1,'ALLDEPTS',DEP DECODE(GR                       SUM(SAL)
        ----------------------------------- ------------------------------------ ------------
               10                                   CLERK                         1300
               10                                   MANAGER                       2450
               10                                   PRESIDENT                     5000
               10                                   All Jobs                      8750
               20                                   ANALYST                       6000
               20                                   CLERK                         1900
               20                                   MANAGER                       2975
               20                                   All Jobs                     10875
               30                                   CLERK                           950
               30                                   MANAGER                       2850
               30                                   SALESMAN                      5600
               30                                   All Jobs                      9400
               All Depts                            ANALYST                       6000
               All Depts                            CLERK                         4150
               All Depts                            MANAGER                       8275
               All Depts                            PRESIDENT                     5000
               All Depts                            SALESMAN                      5600
               All Depts                            All Jobs                     29025




© Copy rights are reserved.
106




                                                                     SET OPERATORS

TYPES


              Union
              Union all
              Intersect
              Minus


UNION


This will combine the records of multiple tables having the same structure.


Ex:
   SQL>   select * from student1 union select * from student2;


UNION ALL


This will combine the records of multiple tables having the same structure but including
duplicates.


Ex:
   SQL>   select * from student1 union all select * from student2;


INTERSECT



© Copy rights are reserved.
107



This will give the common records of multiple tables having the same structure.


Ex:
   SQL>   select * from student1 intersect select * from student2;




MINUS


This will give the records of a table whose records are not in other tables having the same
structure.


Ex:
   SQL>   select * from student1 minus select * from student2;




© Copy rights are reserved.
108




                                                                                    VIEWS

A view is a database object that is a logical representation of a table. It is delivered from
a table but has no storage of its own and often may be used in the same manner as a
table.


A view takes the output of the query and treats it as a table, therefore a view can be
thought of as a stored query or a virtual table.


TYPES
               Simple view
               Complex view


Simple view can be created from one table where as complex view can be created from
multiple tables.


WHY VIEWS?


        Provides additional level of security by restricting access to a predetermined set of
         rows and/or columns of a table.
        Hide the data complexity.
        Simplify commands for the user.


VIEWS WITHOUT DML




© Copy rights are reserved.
109

               Read only view
               View with group by
               View with aggregate functions
               View with rownum
               Partition view
               View with distinct


Ex:
   SQL>   Create view dept_v as select *from dept with read only;
   SQL>   Create view dept_v as select deptno, sum(sal) t_sal from emp group by deptno;
   SQL>   Create view stud as select rownum no, name, marks from student;
   SQL>   Create view student as select *from student1 union select *from student2;
   SQL>   Create view stud as select distinct no,name from student;


VIEWS WITH DML


       View with not null column -- insert with out not null column not possible
                                      -- update not null column to null is not possible
                                      -- delete possible

       View with out not null column which was in base table -- insert not possible
                                                                    -- update, delete possible

       View with expression -- insert , update not possible
                                 -- delete possible

       View with functions (except aggregate) -- insert, update not possible
                                                      -- delete possible

       View was created but the underlying table was dropped then we will get the
         message like “ view has errors ”.

       View was created but the base table has been altered but still the view was with
         the initial definition, we have to replace the view to affect the changes.

       Complex view (view with more than one table) -- insert not possible
                                                      -- update, delete possible (not always)


CREATING VIEW WITHOUT HAVING THE BASE TABLE




© Copy rights are reserved.
110

SQL>   Create force view stud as select *From student;
    -- Once the base table was created then the view is validated.


VIEW WITH CHECK OPTION CONSTRAINT


SQL>   Create view stud as select *from student where marks = 500 with check option
       constraint Ck;
    - Insert possible with marks value as 500
    - Update possible excluding marks column
    - Delete possible


DROPPING VIEWS


SQL>   drop view dept_v;


DATA MODEL


ALL_VIEW
DBA_VIEW
USER_VIEWS




© Copy rights are reserved.
111




                                                       SYNONYM AND SEQUENCE

SYNONYM


A synonym is a database object, which is used as an alias for a table, view or sequence.


TYPES

              Private
              Public
Private synonym is available to the particular user who creates.
Public synonym is created by DBA which is available to all the users.


ADVANTAGES



       Hide the name and owner of the object.
       Provides location transparency for remote objects of a distributed database.


CREATE AND DROP



SQL>   create synonym s1 for emp;
SQL>   create public synonym s2 for emp;
SQL>   drop synonym s1;


SEQUENCE




© Copy rights are reserved.
112

A sequence is a database object, which can generate unique, sequential integer values.
It can be used to automatically generate primary key or unique key values.
A sequence can be either in an ascending or descending order.


Syntax:
      Create sequence <seq_name> [increment bty n] [start with n] [maxvalue n]
                          [minvalue n] [cycle/nocycle] [cache/nocache];


By defalult the sequence starts with 1, increments by 1 with minvalue of 1 and with
nocycle, nocache.
Cache option pre-alloocates a set of sequence numbers and retains them in memory for
faster access.


Ex:
   SQL>      create sequence s;
   SQL>      create sequence s increment by 10 start with 100 minvalue 5 maxvalue 200 cycle
             cache 20;


USING SEQUENCE


SQL>      create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10));
SQL>      insert into student values(s.nextval, ‘saketh’);


          Initially currval is not defined and nextval is starting value.
          After that nextval and currval are always equal.


CREATING ALPHA-NUMERIC SEQUENCE


SQL>      create sequence s start with 111234;
SQL>      Insert into student values (s.nextval || translate
          (s.nextval,’1234567890’,’abcdefghij’));


ALTERING SEQUENCE



      We can alter the sequence to perform the following.

       Set or eliminate minvalue or maxvalue.



© Copy rights are reserved.
113

          Change the increment value.
          Change the number of cached sequence numbers.


Ex:
   SQL>     alter sequence s minvalue 5;
   SQL>     alter sequence s increment by 2;
   SQL>     alter sequence s cache 10;


DROPPING SEQUENCE



SQL>      drop sequence s;

                                                                                        JOINS

          The purpose of a join is to combine the data across tables.
          A join is actually performed by the where clause which combines the specified rows
           of tables.
          If a join involves in more than two tables then oracle joins first two tables based on
           the joins condition and then compares the result with the next table and so on.


TYPES
                 •      Equi join
                 •      Non-equi join
                 •      Self join
                 •      Natural join
                 •      Cross join
                 •      Outer join
                              Left outer
                              Right outer
                              Full outer
                 •      Inner join
                 •      Using clause
                 •      On clause


Assume that we have the following tables.




© Copy rights are reserved.
114

SQL>   select * from dept;


  DEPTNO DNAME              LOC
   ------ ---------- ----------
       10       mkt        hyd
       20       fin       bang
       30       hr        bombay




SQL>   select * from emp;


      EMPNO      ENAME         JOB       MGR     DEPTNO
      ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
      111        saketh        analyst         444        10
      222        sudha      clerk              333        20
      333        jagan      manager            111        10
      444        madhu      engineer           222        40


EQUI JOIN


A join which contains an ‘=’ operator in the joins condition.


Ex:
   SQL>     select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno=d.deptno;


                        EMPNO        ENAME       JOB      DNAME      LOC
                        ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                         111         saketh     analyst    mkt       hyd
                         333         jagan      manager mkt           hyd
                         222         sudha      clerk      fin      bang


USING CLAUSE




© Copy rights are reserved.
115

SQL>   select empno,ename,job ,dname,loc from emp e join dept d using(deptno);


                      EMPNO       ENAME        JOB     DNAME       LOC
                      ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                      111         saketh     analyst    mkt        hyd
                      333         jagan      manager mkt            hyd
                      222         sudha       clerk      fin      bang


ON CLAUSE


SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e join dept d on(e.deptno=d.deptno);
                      EMPNO       ENAME        JOB     DNAME       LOC
                      ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                      111         saketh     analyst    mkt        hyd
                      333         jagan      manager mkt            hyd
                      222         sudha       clerk      fin      bang


NON-EQUI JOIN


A join which contains an operator other than ‘=’ in the joins condition.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno >
          d.deptno;


                      EMPNO       ENAME      JOB       DNAME       LOC
                      ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                            222   sudha       clerk        mkt        hyd
                            444   madhu       engineer     mkt       hyd
                            444   madhu       engineer     fin       bang
                            444   madhu       engineer     hr         bombay


SELF JOIN


Joining the table itself is called self join.




© Copy rights are reserved.
116



Ex:
   SQL>   select e1.empno,e2.ename,e1.job,e2.deptno from emp e1,emp e2 where
          e1.empno=e2.mgr;


                  EMPNO        ENAME         JOB       DEPTNO
                  ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                   111         jagan      analyst            10
                   222         madhu         clerk           40
                   333         sudha         manager         20
                   444         saketh        engineer        10
NATURAL JOIN


Natural join compares all the common columns.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp natural join dept;


                  EMPNO       ENAME          JOB       DNAME       LOC
                 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                   111         saketh        analyst    mkt         hyd
                   333         jagan      manager       mkt         hyd
                   222         sudha         clerk      fin         bang


CROSS JOIN


This will gives the cross product.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp cross join dept;


               EMPNO ENAME             JOB         DNAME          LOC
              ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                   111        saketh    analyst        mkt        hyd
                   222        sudha     clerk          mkt        hyd




© Copy rights are reserved.
117

                    333       jagan     manager      mkt         hyd
                    444       madhu     engineer     mkt         hyd
                    111       saketh    analyst      fin         bang
                    222       sudha     clerk        fin         bang
                    333       jagan     manager      fin         bang
                    444       madhu     engineer     fin         bang
                    111       saketh    analyst      hr          bombay
                    222       sudha     clerk        hr          bombay
                    333       jagan     manager      hr          bombay
                    444       madhu     engineer     hr          bombay


OUTER JOIN


Outer join gives the non-matching records along with matching records.



LEFT OUTER JOIN


This will display the all matching records and the records which are in left hand side table
those that are not in right hand side table.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e left outer join dept d
          on(e.deptno=d.deptno);
                                                Or
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where
          e.deptno=d.deptno(+);


                   EMPNO       ENAME      JOB        DNAME        LOC
                   ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                    111        saketh     analyst          mkt     hyd
                    333        jagan      manager          mkt     hyd
                    222        sudha      clerk            fin     bang
                    444        madhu      engineer


RIGHT OUTER JOIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
118

This will display the all matching records and the records which are in right hand side
table those that are not in left hand side table.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e right outer join dept d
          on(e.deptno=d.deptno);
                                                Or
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno(+) =
          d.deptno;




                  EMPNO        ENAME       JOB       DNAME        LOC
                  ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                   111         saketh      analyst        mkt     hyd
                   333         jagan       manager        mkt     hyd
                   222         sudha      clerk           fin     bang
                                                          hr      bombay


FULL OUTER JOIN


This will display the all matching records and the non-matching records from both tables.


Ex:
   SQL>   select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e full outer join dept d
          on(e.deptno=d.deptno);


               EMPNO     ENAME         JOB        DNAME         LOC
              ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                   333        jagan     manager      mkt        hyd
                   111        saketh    analyst      mkt         hyd
                   222        sudha     clerk        fin        bang
                   444        madhu     engineer
                                                     hr         bombay


INNER JOIN


This will display all the records that have matched.


© Copy rights are reserved.
119



Ex:
   SQL>    select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp inner join dept using(deptno);


                    EMPNO         ENAME    JOB       DNAME      LOC
                    ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
                      111         saketh   analyst      mkt       hyd
                      333         jagan    manager      mkt       hyd
                      222         sudha    clerk        fin       bang




                                                                 SUBQUERIES AND EXISTS


SUBQUERIES


         Nesting of queries, one within the other is termed as a subquery.
         A statement containing a subquery is called a parent query.
         Subqueries are used to retrieve data from tables that depend on the values in the
          table itself.


TYPES



              Single row subqueries
              Multi row subqueries
                Multiple subqueries

              Correlated subqueries


SINGLE ROW SUBQUERIES



In single row subquery, it will return one value.


Ex:
  SQL>     select * from emp where sal > (select sal from emp where empno = 7566);


             EMPNO        ENAME      JOB      MGR     HIREDATE        SAL    COMM   DEPTNO


© Copy rights are reserved.
120

             ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------ ------- ---------- ----------
              7788        SCOTT    ANALYST       7566    19-APR-87       3000                 20
              7839        KING     PRESIDENT             17-NOV-81 5000                       10
              7902        FORD     ANALYST       7566    03-DEC-81       3000                 20


MULTI ROW SUBQUERIES



In multi row subquery, it will return more than one value. In such cases we should
include operators like any, all, in or not in between the comparision operator and the
subquery.


Ex:
   SQL>      select * from emp where sal > any (select sal from emp where sal between 2500
             and 4000);


              EMPNO       ENAME       JOB      MGR      HIREDATE       SAL     COMM      DEPTNO
             ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- -----------   -------- ---------- ----------
              7566        JONES    MANAGER       7839 02-APR-81         2975                20
              7788        SCOTT    ANALYST       7566 19-APR-87         3000                20
              7839        KING     PRESIDENT            17-NOV-81       5000                10
              7902        FORD     ANALYST       7566 03-DEC-81         3000                20


      SQL>   select * from emp where sal > all (select sal from emp where sal between 2500
             and 4000);


              EMPNO       ENAME       JOB      MGR      HIREDATE         SAL     COMM DEPTNO
              ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------- ------ ---------- ----------
              7839        KING     PRESIDENT             17-NOV-81 5000                       10


MULTIPLE SUBQUERIES



There is no limit on the number of subqueries included in a where clause. It allows
nesting of a query within a subquery.


Ex:
   SQL>      select * from emp where sal = (select max(sal) from emp where sal < (select



© Copy rights are reserved.
121

          max(sal) from emp));


           EMPNO         ENAME       JOB       MGR     HIREDATE     SAL    COMM      DEPTNO
           ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------ ------- ---------- ----------
           7788       SCOTT      ANALYST 7566          19-APR-87    3000                 20
           7902       FORD      ANALYST         7566   03-DEC-81     3000                20


CORRELATED SUBQUERIES



A subquery is evaluated once for the entire parent statement where as a correlated
subquery is evaluated once for every row processed by the parent statement.
Ex:
   SQL>   select distinct deptno from emp e where 5 <= (select count(ename) from emp
          where e.deptno = deptno);


                  DEPTNO
                  ----------
                    20
                    30


EXISTS


Exists function is a test for existence. This is a logical test for the return of rows from a
query.


Ex:
   Suppose we want to display the department numbers which has more than 4
   employees.


   SQL>   select deptno,count(*) from emp group by deptno having count(*) > 4;


                         DEPTNO       COUNT(*)
                         ---------    ----------
                           20              5
                           30              6




© Copy rights are reserved.
122

   From the above query can you want to display the names of employees?
   SQL>   select deptno,ename, count(*) from emp group by deptno,ename having count(*)
          > 4;


   no rows selected


   The above query returns nothing because combination of deptno and ename never
   return more than one count.


   The solution is to use exists which follows.


   SQL>   select deptno,ename from emp e1 where exists (select * from emp e2
          where e1.deptno=e2.deptno group by e2.deptno having count(e2.ename) > 4)
          order by deptno,ename;


                        DEPTNO      ENAME
                         ---------- ----------
                              20    ADAMS
                              20    FORD
                              20    JONES
                              20    SCOTT
                              20    SMITH
                              30    ALLEN
                              30    BLAKE
                              30    JAMES
                              30    MARTIN
                              30    TURNER
                              30    WARD


NOT EXISTS


SQL>   select deptno,ename from emp e1 where not exists (select * from emp e2
       where e1.deptno=e2.deptno group by e2.deptno having count(e2.ename) > 4) order
       by deptno,ename;


                 DEPTNO ENAME


© Copy rights are reserved.
123

                 --------- ----------
                   10         CLARK
                   10         KING
                   10         MILLER




                                                 WALKUP TREES AND INLINE VIEW

WALKUP TREES


Using hierarchical queries, you can retrieve data based on a natural hierarchical
relationship between rows in a table. However, where a hierarchical relationship exists
between the rows of a table, a process called tree walking enables the hierarchy to be
constructed.


Ex:
  SQL>   select ename || '==>' || prior ename, level from emp start with ename = 'KING'
         connect by prior empno=mgr;


               ENAME||'==>'||PRIORENAM                LEVEL
               ------------------------------------   --------
                      KING==>                            1
                      JONES==>KING                       2
                      SCOTT==>JONES                      3
                      ADAMS==>SCOTT                      4
                      FORD==>JONES                       3
                      SMITH==>FORD                       4
                      BLAKE==>KING                        2
                      ALLEN==>BLAKE                       3
                      WARD==>BLAKE                       3



© Copy rights are reserved.
124

                     MARTIN==>BLAKE                     3
                     TURNER==>BLAKE                     3
                     JAMES==>BLAKE                      3
                     CLARK==>KING                       2
                     MILLER==>CLARK                     3


In the above
Start with clause specifies the root row of the table.
Level pseudo column gives the 1 for root , 2 for child and so on.
Connect by prior clause specifies the columns which has parent-child relationship.


INLINE VIEW OR TOP-N ANALYSIS


In the select statement instead of table name, replacing the select statement is known as
inline view.


Ex:
  SQL>   Select ename, sal, rownum rank from (select *from emp order by sal);


                     ENAME            SAL       RANK
                     ---------- ---------- ----------
                     SMITH            800         1
                     JAMES            950         2
                     ADAMS            1100        3
                     WARD            1250         4
                     MARTIN           1250        5
                     MILLER          1300         6
                     TURNER           1500        7
                     ALLEN           1600         8
                     CLARK           2450         9
                     BLAKE           2850        10
                     JONES           2975         11
                     SCOTT           3000         12
                     FORD            3000         13
                     KING           5000          14




© Copy rights are reserved.
125




                                                                                 LOCKS

Locks are the mechanisms used to prevent destructive interaction between users
accessing same resource simultaneously. Locks provides high degree of data concurrency.


TYPES
              Row level locks
              Table level locks


ROW LEVEL LOCKS


In the row level lock a row is locked exclusively so that other cannot modify the row until
the transaction holding the lock is committed or rolled back. This can be done by using
select..for update clause.


Ex:
  SQL>   select * from emp where sal > 3000 for update of comm.;


TABLE LEVEL LOCKS


A table level lock will protect table data thereby guaranteeing data integrity when data is
being accessed concurrently by multiple users. A table lock can be held in several modes.




© Copy rights are reserved.
126

              Share lock
              Share update lock
              Exclusive lock


SHARE LOCK



A share lock locks the table allowing other users to only query but not insert, update or
delete rows in a table. Multiple users can place share locks on the same resource at the
same time.


Ex:
   SQL>   lock table emp in share mode;
SHARE UPDATE LOCK


It locks rows that are to be updated in a table. It permits other users to concurrently
query, insert , update or even lock other rows in the same table. It prevents the other
users from updating the row that has been locked.


Ex:
   SQL>   lock table emp in share update mode;


EXCLUSIVE LOCK



Exclusive lock is the most restrictive of tables locks. When issued by any user, it allows
the other user to only query. It is similar to share lock but only one user can place
exclusive lock on a table at a time.


Ex:
   SQL>   lock table emp in share exclusive mode;


NOWAIT


If one user locked the table without nowait then another user trying to lock the same
table then he has to wait until the user who has initially locked the table issues a commit
or rollback statement. This delay could be avoided by appending a nowait clause in the
lock table command.



© Copy rights are reserved.
127



Ex:
  SQL>    lock table emp in exclusive mode nowait.


DEADLOCK


A deadlock occurs when tow users have a lock each on separate object, and they want to
acquire a lock on the each other’s object. When this happens, the first user has to wait for
the second user to release the lock, but the second user will not release it until the lock
on the first user’s object is freed. In such a case, oracle detects the deadlock
automatically and solves the problem by aborting one of the two transactions.



                                                                               INDEXES



Index is typically a listing of keywords accompanied by the location of information on a
subject. We can create indexes explicitly to speed up SQL statement execution on a table.
The index points directly to the location of the rows containing the value.


WHY INDEXES?


Indexes are most useful on larger tables, on columns that are likely to appear in where
clauses as simple equality.


TYPES


         Unique index
         Non-unique index
         Btree index
         Bitmap index
         Composite index
         Reverse key index
         Function-based index
         Descending index
         Domain index



© Copy rights are reserved.
128

         Object index
         Cluster index
         Text index
         Index organized table
         Partition index
              Local index
                    Local prefixed
                    Local non-prefixed
                        Global index
                              Global prefixed
                              Global non-prefixed


UNIQUE INDEX


Unique indexes guarantee that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the
columns that define the index. Unique index is automatically created when primary key or
unique constraint is created.


Ex:
   SQL>    create unique index stud_ind on student(sno);


NON-UNIQUE INDEX


Non-Unique indexes do not impose the above restriction on the column values.


Ex:
   SQL>    create index stud_ind on student(sno);


BTREE INDEX or ASCENDING INDEX


The default type of index used in an oracle database is the btree index. A btree index is
designed to provide both rapid access to individual rows and quick access to groups of
rows within a range. The btree index does this by performing a succession of value
comparisons. Each comparison eliminates many of the rows.




© Copy rights are reserved.
129

Ex:
   SQL>   create index stud_ind on student(sno);


BITMAP INDEX


This can be used for low cardinality columns: that is columns in which the number of
distinct values is snall when compared to the number of the rows in the table.


Ex:
   SQL>   create bitmap index stud_ind on student(sex);




COMPOSITE INDEX


A composite index also called a concatenated index is an index created on multiple
columns of a table. Columns in a composite index can appear in any order and need not be
adjacent columns of the table.


Ex:
   SQL>   create bitmap index stud_ind on student(sno, sname);


REVERSE KEY INDEX


A reverse key index when compared to standard index, reverses each byte of the column
being indexed while keeping the column order. When the column is indexed in reverse
mode then the column values will be stored in an index in different blocks as the starting
value differs. Such an arrangement can help avoid performance degradations in indexes
where modifications to the index are concentrated on a small set of blocks.


Ex:
   SQL>   create index stud_ind on student(sno, reverse);


We can rebuild a reverse key index into normal index using the noreverse keyword.


Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
130

   SQL>   alter index stud_ind rebuild noreverse;


FUNCTION BASED INDEX


This will use result of the function as key instead of using column as the value for the key.


Ex:
   SQL>   create index stud_ind on student(upper(sname));




DESCENDING INDEX


The order used by B-tree indexes has been ascending order. You can categorize data in B-
tree index in descending order as well. This feature can be useful in applications where
sorting operations are required.


Ex:
   SQL>   create index stud_ind on student(sno desc);


TEXT INDEX


Querying text is different from querying data because words have shades of meaning,
relationships to other words, and opposites. You may want to search for words that are
near each other, or words that are related to thers. These queries would be extremely
difficult if all you had available was the standard relational operators. By extending SQL to
include text indexes, oracle text permits you to ask very complex questions about the
text.


To use oracle text, you need to create a text index on the column in which the text is
stored. Text index is a collection of tables and indexes that store information about the
text stored in the column.


TYPES




© Copy rights are reserved.
131

There are several different types of indexes available in oracle 9i. The first, CONTEXT is
supported in oracle 8i as well as oracle 9i. As of oracle 9i, you can use the CTXCAT text
index fo further enhance your text index management and query capabilities.


              CONTEXT

              CTXCAT

              CTXRULE



The CTXCAT index type supports the transactional synchronization of data between the
base table and its text index. With CONTEXT indexes, you need to manually tell oracle to
update the values in the text index after data changes in base table. CTXCAT index types do
not generate score values during the text queries.


HOW TO CREATE TEXT INDEX?



You can create a text index via a special version of the create index comman. For context
index, specify the ctxsys.context index type and for ctxcat index, specify the ctxsys.ctxcat
index type.


Ex:
Suppose you have a table called BOOKS with the following columns
Title, Author, Info.


SQL>   create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.context;
SQL>   create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.ctxcat;


TEXT QUERIES



Once a text index is created on the info column of BOOKS table, text-searching capabilities
increase dynamically.


CONTAINS & CATSEARCH



CONTAINS   function takes two parameters – the column name and the search string.


Syntax:



© Copy rights are reserved.
132

        Contains(indexed_column, search_str);


If you create a CTXCAT index, use the CATSEARCH function in place of CONTAINS. CATSEARCH
takes three parameters – the column name, the search string and the index set.


Syntax:
        Contains(indexed_column, search_str, index_set);


HOW A TEXT QEURY WORKS?


When a function such as CONTAINS or CATSEARCH is used in query, the text portion of the
query is processed by oracle text. The remainder of the query is processed just like a
regular query within the database. The result of the text query processing and the regular
query processing are merged to return a single set of records to the user.
SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF A WORD



The following queries will search for a word called ‘prperty’ whose score is greater than
zero.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property’, null) > 0;


Suppose if you want to know the score of the ‘property’ in each book, if score values for
individual searches range from 0 to 10 for each occurrence of the string within the text
then use the score function.


SQL>   select title, score(10) from books where contains(info, ‘property’, 10) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF MULTIPLE WORDS


The following queries will search for two words.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property AND harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property AND harvests’, null) > 0;


Instead of using AND you could hae used an ampersand(&). Before using this method, set
define off so the & character will not be seen as part of a variable name.



© Copy rights are reserved.
133



SQL>   set define off
SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property & harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property harvests’, null) > 0;


The following queries will search for more than two words.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property AND harvests AND workers’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property harvests workers’, null) > 0;


The following queries will search for either of the two words.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property OR harvests’) > 0;


Instead of OR you can use a vertical line (|).


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property | harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property | harvests’, null) > 0;


In the following queries the ACCUM(accumulate) operator adds together the scores of the
individual searches and compares the accumulated score to the threshold value.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property ACCUM harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property ACCUM harvests’, null) > 0;


Instead of OR you can use a comma(,).


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property , harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property , harvests’, null) > 0;


In the following queries the MINUS operator subtracts the score of the second term’s
search from the score of the first term’s search.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property MINUS harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property NOT harvests’, null) > 0;




© Copy rights are reserved.
134

Instead of MINUS you can use – and instead of NOT you can use ~.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘property - harvests’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property ~ harvests’, null) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF A PHRASE


The following queries will search for the phrase. If the search phrase includes a reserved
word within oracle text, the you must use curly braces ({}) to enclose text.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘transactions {and} finances’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘transactions {and} finances’, null) > 0;


You can enclose the entire phrase within curly braces, in which case any reserved words
within the phrase will be treated as part of the search criteria.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘{transactions and finances}’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘{transactions and finances}’, null) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT ARE NEAR EACH OTHER


The following queries will search for the words that are in between the search terms.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘workers NEAR harvests’) > 0;


Instead of NEAR you can use ;.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘workers ; harvests’) > 0;


In CONTEXT index queries, you can specify the maximum number of words between the
search terms.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘NEAR((workers, harvests),10)’ > 0;


USING WILDCARDS DURING SEARCHES




© Copy rights are reserved.
135

You can use wildcards to expand the list of valid search terms used during your query.
Just as in regular text-string wildcard processing, two wildcards are available.


%       -     percent sign; multiple-character wildcard
_       -     underscore; single-character wildcard


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘worker%’) > 0;
SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘work___’) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT SHARE THE SAME STEM


Rather than using wildcards, you can use stem-expansion capabilities to expand the list
of text strings. Given the ‘stem’ of a word, oracle will expand the list of words to search
for to include all words having the same stem. Sample expansions are show here.
Play    -     plays playing played playful


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘$manage’) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR FUZZY MATCHES


A fuzzy match expands the specified search term to include words that are spelled
similarly but that do not necessarily have the same word stem. Fuzzy matches are most
helpful when the text contains misspellings. The misspellings can be either in the
searched text or in the search string specified by the user during the query.


The following queries will not return anything because its search does not contain the
word ‘hardest’.


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘hardest’) > 0;


It does, however, contains the word ‘harvest’. A fuzzy match will return the books
containing the word ‘harvest’ even though ‘harvest’ has a different word stem thant the
word used as the search term.


To use a fuzzy match, precede the search term with a question mark, with no space
between the question mark and the beginning of the search term.



© Copy rights are reserved.
136



SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘?hardest’) > 0;


SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT SOUND LIKE OTHER WORDS


SOUNDEX, expands search terms based on how the word sounds. The SOUNDEX
expansion method uses the same text-matching logic available via the SOUNDEX function
in SQL.


To use the SOUNDEX option, you must precede the search term with an exclamation
mark(!).


SQL>   select * from books where contains(info, ‘!grate’) > 0;


INDEX SYNCHRONIZATION



When using CONTEXT indexes, you need to manage the text index contents; the text
indexes are not updated when the base table is updated. When the table was updated, its
text index is out of sync with the base table. To sync of the index, execute the SYNC_INDEX
procedure of the CTX_DDL package.


SQL>   exec CTX_DDL.SYNC_INDEX(‘book_index’);


INDEX SETS



Historically, problems with queries of text indexes have occurred when other criteria are
used alongside text searches as part of the where clause. To improve the mixed query
capability, oracle features index sets. The indexes within the index set may be structured
relational columns or on text columns.


To create an index set, use the CTX_DDL package to create the index set and add indexes to
it. When you create a text index, you can then specify the index set it belongs to.


SQL>   exec CTX_DDL.CREATE_INDEX_SET(‘books_index_set’);


The add non-text indexes.



© Copy rights are reserved.
137



SQL>      exec CTX_DDL.ADD_INDEX(‘books_index_set’, ‘title_index’);


Now create a CTXCAT text index. Specify ctxsys.ctxcat as the index type, and list the index
set in the parameters clause.


SQL>      create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.ctxcat
          parameters(‘index set books_index_set’);


INDEX-ORGANIZED TABLE


An index-organized table keeps its data sorted according to the primary key column
values for the table. Index-organized tables store their data as if the entire table was
stored in an index.
An index-organized table allows you to store the entire table’s data in an index.
Ex:
   SQL>      create table student (sno number(2),sname varchar(10),smarks number(3)
            constraint pk primary key(sno) organization index;


PARTITION INDEX


Similar to partitioning tables, oracle allows you to partition indexes too. Like table
partitions, index partitions could be in different tablespaces.


LOCAL INDEXES



          Local keyword tells oracle to create a separte index for each partition.
          In the local prefixed index the partition key is specified on the left prefix. When the
           underlying table is partitioned baes on, say two columns then the index can be
           prefixed on the first column specified.
          Local prefixed indexes can be unique or non unique.
          Local indexes may be easier to manage than global indexes.


Ex:
   SQL>      create index stud_index on student(sno) local;




© Copy rights are reserved.
138

GLOBAL INDEXES



         A global index may contain values from multiple partitions.
         An index is global prefixed if it is partitioned on the left prefix of the index columns.
         The global clause allows you to create a non-partitioned index.
         Global indexes may perform uniqueness checks faster than local (partitioned)
          indexes.
         You cannot create global indexes for hash partitions or subpartitions.


Ex:
   SQL>    create index stud_index on student(sno) global;


Similar to table partitions, it is possible to move them from one device to another. But
unlike table partitions, movement of index partitions requires individual reconstruction of
the index or each partition (only in the case of global index).


Ex:
  SQL>     alter index stud_ind rebuild partition p2




       Index partitions cannot be dropped manually.
         They are dropped implicitly when the data they refer to is dropped from the
          partitioned table.


MONITORING USE OF INDEXES


Once you turned on the monitoring the use of indexes, then we can check whether the
table is hitting the index or not.


To monitor the use of index use the follwing syntax.


Syntax:
          alter index index_name monitoring usage;


then check for the details in V$OBJECT_USAGE view.




© Copy rights are reserved.
139



If you want to stop monitoring use the following.


Syntax:
       alter index index_name nomonitoring usage;


DATA MODEL


             ALL_INDEXES
             DBA_INDEXES
             USER_INDEXES
             ALL_IND-COLUMNS
             DBA-IND_COLUMNS
             USER_IND_COLUMNS
             ALL_PART_INDEXES
             DBA_PART_INDEXES
             USER_PART_INDEXES
             V$OBJECT_USAGE




© Copy rights are reserved.
140




                                                        SQL*PLUS COMMNANDS


These commands does not require statement terminator and applicable to the sessions ,
those will be automatically cleared when session was closed.


BREAK


This will be used to breakup the data depending on the grouping.


Syntax:
       Break or bre [on <column_name> on report]


COMPUTE


This will be used to perform group functions on the data.


Syntax:
       Compute or comp [group_function of column_name on breaking_column_name or
                              report]


TTITLE




© Copy rights are reserved.
141

This will give the top title for your report. You can on or off the ttitle.


Syntax:
         Ttitle or ttit [left | center | right] title_name skip n other_characters
         Ttitle or ttit [on or off]


BTITLE


This will give the bottom title for your report. You can on or off the btitle.


Syntax:
         Btitle or btit [left | center | right] title_name skip n other_characters
         Btitle or btit [on or off]
Ex:
         SQL>   bre on deptno skip 1 on report
         SQL>   comp sum of sal on deptno
         SQL>   comp sum of sal on report
         SQL>   ttitle center 'EMPLOYEE DETAILS' skip1 center '----------------'
         SQL>   btitle center '** THANKQ **'
         SQL>   select * from emp order by deptno;


Output:


                                        EMPLOYEE DETAILS
                                        -----------------------


      EMPNO      ENAME      JOB             MGR     HIREDATE       SAL       COMM    DEPTNO
      ---------- ---------- ---------     ------- -------------- -------- ---------- ----------
      7782        CLARK    MANAGER         7839     09-JUN-81      2450                  10
      7839        KING     PRESIDENT                17-NOV-81      5000
      7934        MILLER CLERK             7782    23-JAN-82       1300
                                                                  ----------        **********
                                                                   8750              sum


      7369        SMITH    CLERK            7902    17-DEC-80          800               20




© Copy rights are reserved.
142

      7876       ADAMS CLERK           7788   23-MAY-87      1100
      7902       FORD      ANALYST     7566   03-DEC-81      3000
      7788       SCOTT ANALYST         7566   19-APR-87      3000
      7566       JONES MANAGER         7839   02-APR-81       2975
                                                           ----------          **********
                                                            10875               sum


      7499      ALLEN      SALESMAN    7698   20-FEB-81      1600       300       30
      7698      BLAKE      MANAGER     7839   01-MAY-81      2850
      7654      MARTIN SALESMAN        7698   28-SEP-81      1250       1400
      7900      JAMES      CLERK       7698   03-DEC-81       950
      7844      TURNER SALESMAN        7698   08-SEP-81      1500        0
      7521      WARD       SALESMAN    7698   22-FEB-81     1250        500
                                                          ----------          **********
                                                             9400               sum
                                                          ----------
      sum                                                   29025


                                      ** THANKQ **


CLEAR


This will clear the existing buffers or break or computations or columns formatting.


Syntax:
        Clear or cle buffer | bre | comp | col;


Ex:
        SQL>   clear buffer
               Buffer cleared
        SQL>   clear bre
               Breaks cleared
        SQL>   clear comp
               Computes cleared
        SQL>   clear col




© Copy rights are reserved.
143

             Columns cleared


CHANGE


This will be used to replace any strings in SQL statements.


Syntax:
          Change or c/old_string/new_string


If the old_string repeats many times then new_string replaces the first string only.


Ex:
              SQL>   select * from det;
              select * from det
                          *
              ERROR at line 1:
              ORA-00942: table or view does not exist


              SQL>   c/det/dept
                1* select * from dept
              SQL>   /


                  DEPTNO DNAME                 LOC
                  ---------- ---------------- -----------
                     10       ACCOUNTING NEW YORK
                     20       RESEARCH        ALLAS
                     30       SALES           CHICAGO
                     40       OPERATIONS      BOSTON


COLUMN


This will be used to increase or decrease the width of the table columns.


Syntax:
       Column or col <column_name> format <num_format|text_format>




© Copy rights are reserved.
144

Ex:
       SQL>   col deptno format 999
       SQL>   col dname format a10


SAVE


This will be used to save your current SQL statement as SQL Script file.


Syntax:
          Save or sav <file_name>.[extension] replace or rep


If you want to save the filename with existing filename the you have to use replace
option.
By default it will take sql as the extension.


Ex:
       SQL>   save ss
              Created file ss.sql
       SQL>   save ss replace
              Wrote file ss.sql


EXECUTE


This will be used to execute stored subprograms or packaged subprograms.


Syntax:
       Execute or exec <subprogram_name>


Ex:
       SQL>   exec sample_proc


SPOOL


This will record the data when you spool on, upto when you say spool off. By default it
will give lst as extension.




© Copy rights are reserved.
145



Syntax:
       Spool on | off | out | <file_name>.[Extension]


Ex:
       SQL>   spool on
       SQL>   select * from dept;


               DEPTNO DNAME                LOC
               --------- --------------   ----------
                  10      ACCOUNTING NEW YORK
                  20      RESEARCH         DALLAS
                  30      SALES            CHICAGO
                  40      OPERATIONS       BOSTON


       SQL>   spool off
       SQL>   ed on.lst


               SQL>    select * from dept;


               DEPTNO DNAME                LOC
               --------- --------------   ----------
                  10      ACCOUNTING NEW YORK
                  20      RESEARCH         DALLAS
                  30      SALES            CHICAGO
                  40      OPERATIONS       BOSTON


               SQL>    spool off


LIST


This will give the current SQL statement.


Syntax:
       List or li [start_line_number] [end_line_number]




© Copy rights are reserved.
146

Ex:
       SQL>   select
            2 *
            3 from
            4 dept;
       SQL>     list
           1 select
           2 *
           3 from
           4* dept
       SQL>   list 1
           1* select
       SQL>   list 3
          3* from


       SQL>   list 1 3
          1 select
          2 *
          3* from


INPUT


This will insert the new line to the current SQL statement.


Syntax:
       Input or in <string>


Ex:
       SQL>   select *
       SQL>   list
          1* select *
       SQL>   input from dept
       SQL>   list
          1 select *
          2* from dept




© Copy rights are reserved.
147

APPEND


This will adds a new string to the existing string in the SQL statement without any space.


Syntax:
       Append or app <string>


Ex:
       SQL>   select *
       SQL>   list
          1* select *
       SQL>   append from dept
          1* select * from dept
       SQL>   list
          1* select * from dept


DELETE


This will delete the current SQL statement lines.


Syntax:
       Delete or del <start_line_number> [<end_line_number>]


Ex:
       SQL>   select
           2 *
           3 from
           4 dept
           5 where
           6 deptno
           7 >10;
       SQL>   list
          1 select
          2 *
          3 from




© Copy rights are reserved.
148

          4 dept
          5 where
          6 deptno
          7* >10
       SQL>   del 1
       SQL>   list
          1 *
          2 from
          3 dept
          4 where
          5 deptno
          6* >10
       SQL>   del 2
       SQL>   list
          1 *
          2 dept
          3 where
          4 deptno
          5* >10
       SQL>   del 2 4
       SQL>   list
          1 *
          2* >10
       SQL>   del
       SQL>   list
          1 *


VARIABLE


This will be used to declare a variable.


Syntax:
       Variable or var <variable_name> <variable_type>


Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
149

        SQL>   var dept_name varchar(15)
        SQL>   select dname into dept_name from dept where deptno = 10;


PRINT


This will be used to print the output of the variables that will be declared at SQL level.


Syntax:
        Print <variable_name>


Ex:
        SQL>   print dept_name


                DEPT_NAME
                --------------
                ACCOUNTING


START


This will be used to execute SQL scripts.


Syntax:
        start <filename_name>.sql


Ex:
        SQL>   start ss.sql
        SQL>   @ss.sql           -- this will execute sql script files only.


HOST


This will be used to interact with the OS level from SQL.


Syntax:
        Host [operation]


Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
150

       SQL>   host
       SQL>   host dir


SHOW


Using this, you can see several commands that use the set command and status.


Syntax:
       Show all | <set_command>


Ex:
       SQL>   show all
       appinfo is OFF and set to "SQL*Plus"
       arraysize 15
       autocommit OFF
       autoprint OFF
       autorecovery OFF
       autotrace OFF
       blockterminator "." (hex 2e)
       btitle OFF and is the first few characters of the next SELECT statement
       cmdsep OFF
       colsep " "
       compatibility version NATIVE
       concat "." (hex 2e)
       copycommit 0
       COPYTYPECHECK is ON
       define "&" (hex 26)
       describe DEPTH 1 LINENUM OFF INDENT ON
       echo OFF
       editfile "afiedt.buf"
       embedded OFF
       escape OFF
       FEEDBACK ON for 6 or more rows
       flagger OFF
       flush ON




© Copy rights are reserved.
151

       SQL>   sho verify
       verify OFF


RUN


This will runs the command in the buffer.


Syntax:
       Run | /


Ex:
       SQL>   run
       SQL>   /
STORE


This will save all the set command statuses in a file.


Syntax:
       Store set <filename>.[extension] [create] | [replace] | [append]


Ex:
       SQL>   store set my_settings.scmd
       Created file my_settings.scmd
       SQL>   store set my_settings.cmd replace
       Wrote file my_settings.cmd
       SQL>   store set my_settings.cmd append
       Appended file to my_settings.cmd


FOLD_AFTER


This will fold the columns one after the other.


Syntax:
       Column <column_name> fold_after [no_of_lines]


Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
152

       SQL>   col deptno fold_after 1
       SQL>   col dname fold_after 1
       SQL>   col loc fold_after 1
       SQL>   set heading off
       SQL>   select * from dept;


                    10
               ACCOUNTING
               NEW YORK


                    20
               RESEARCH
               DALLAS
                    30
               SALES
               CHICAGO


                    40
               OPERATIONS
               BOSTON


FOLD_BEFORE


This will fold the columns one before the other.


Syntax:
       Column <column_name> fold_before [no_of_lines]


DEFINE


This will give the list of all the variables currently defined.


Syntax:
       Define [variable_name]


Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
153

       SQL>   define
       DEFINE _DATE              = "16-MAY-07" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER = "oracle" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _USER              = "SCOTT" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _PRIVILEGE           = "" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _SQLPLUS_RELEASE = "1001000200" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _EDITOR             = "Notepad" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _O_VERSION            = "Oracle Database 10g Enterprise Edition Release
                                      10.1.0.2.0 – Production With the Partitioning, OLAP and
                                      Data Mining options" (CHAR)
       DEFINE _O_RELEASE           = "1001000200" (CHAR)



                                                                       SET COMMANDS

These commands does not require statement terminator and applicable to the sessions ,
those will be automatically cleared when session was closed.


LINESIZE


This will be used to set the linesize. Default linesize is 80.


Syntax:
       Set linesize <value>


Ex:
       SQL>   set linesize 100


PAGESIZE


This will be used to set the pagesize. Default pagesize is 14.


Syntax:
       Set pagesize <value>


Ex:


© Copy rights are reserved.
154

       SQL>   set pagesize 30


DESCRIBE


This will be used to see the object’s structure.


Syntax:
       Describe or desc <object_name>


Ex:
       SQL>   desc dept


       Name                                               Null?               Type
       ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------
       DEPTNO                                              NOT NULL NUMBER(2)
       DNAME                                                             VARCHAR2(14)
       LOC                                                               VARCHAR2(13)


PAUSE


When the displayed data contains hundreds or thousands of lines, when you select it then
it will automatically scrolls and displays the last page data. To prevent this you can use
this pause option. By using this it will display the data correspoinding to the pagesize
with a break which will continue by hitting the return key. By default this will be off.


Syntax:
       Set pause on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   set pause on


FEEDBACK




© Copy rights are reserved.
155

This will give the information regarding howmany rows you selected the object. By
default the feedback message will be displayed, only when the object contains more than
5 rows.


Syntax:
       Set feedback <value>


Ex:
       SQL>   set feedback 4
       SQL>   select * from dept;


        DEPTNO      DNAME           LOC
       ---------- -------------- -------------
              10   ACCOUNTING       NEW YORK
              20   RESEARCH         DALLAS
              30   SALES            CHICAGO
              40   OPERATIONS       BOSTON


       4 rows selected.


HEADING


If you want to display data without headings, then you can achieve with this. By default
heading is on.


Syntax:
       Set heading on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   set heading off
       SQL>   select * from dept;


              10   ACCOUNTING       NEW YORK
              20   RESEARCH         DALLAS
              30   SALES            CHICAGO




© Copy rights are reserved.
156

              40   OPERATIONS       BOSTON


SERVEROUTPUT


This will be used to display the output of the PL/SQL programs. By default this will be off.


Syntax:
       Set serveroutput on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   set serveroutput on




TIME


This will be used to display the time. By default this will be off.


Syntax:
       Set time on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   set time on
       19:56:33 SQL>


TIMING


This will give the time taken to execute the current SQL statement. By default this will be
off.


Syntax:
       Set timing on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   set timing on




© Copy rights are reserved.
157

       SQL>   select * from dept;


        DEPTNO      DNAME           LOC
       ---------- -------------- -------------
              10   ACCOUNTING       NEW YORK
              20   RESEARCH         DALLAS
              30   SALES            CHICAGO
              40   OPERATIONS       BOSTON


       Elapsed: 00:00:00.06


SQLPROMPT


This will be used to change the SQL prompt.
Syntax:
       Set sqlprompt <prompt>


Ex:
       SQL>   set sqlprompt 'ORACLE>'
       ORACLE>



SQLCASE


This will be used to change the case of the SQL statements. By default the case is mixed.


Syntax:
       Set sqlcase upper | mixed | lower


Ex:
       SQL>   set sqlcase upper


SQLTERMINATOR


This will be used to change the terminator of the SQL statements. By default the
terminator is ;.




© Copy rights are reserved.
158

Syntax:
       Set sqlterminator <termination_character>


Ex:
       SQL>   set sqlterminator :
       SQL>   select * from dept:


DEFINE


By default if the & character finds then it will treat as bind variable and ask for the input.
Suppose your want to treat it as a normal character while inserting data, then you can
prevent this by using the define option. By default this will be on




Syntax:
       Set define on | off


Ex:
       SQL>insert   into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD');
       Enter value for d:
       old    1: insert into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD')
       new     1: INSERT INTO DEPT VALUES(50,'R','HYD')


       SQL>   set define off
       SQL>insert   into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD');      -- here it won’t ask for value


NEWPAGE


This will shows how many blank lines will be left before the report. By default it will leave
one blank line.


Syntax:
       Set newpage <value>


Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
159

       SQL>   set newpage 10


The zero value for newpage does not produce zero blank lines instead it switches to a
special property which produces a top-of-form character (hex 13) just before the date on
each page. Most modern printers respond to this by moving immediately to the top of the
next page, where the priting of the report will begin.


HEADSEP


This allow you to indicate where you want to break a page title or a column heading that
runs longer than one line. The default heading separator is vertical bar (|).


Syntax:
       Set headsep <separation_char>
Ex:
       SQL>   select * from dept;


        DEPTNO      DNAME             LOC
       ---------- -------------- -------------
              10   ACCOUNTING         NEW YORK
              20   RESEARCH           DALLAS
              30   SALES              CHICAGO
              40   OPERATIONS         BOSTON


       SQL>   set headsetp !
       SQL>   col dname heading 'DEPARTMENT ! NAME'
       SQL>   /


                   DEPARTMENT
        DEPTNO        NAME              LOC
       ---------- -----------------    ----------
              10   ACCOUNTING         NEW YORK
              20 RESEARCH              DALLAS
              30 SALES                CHICAGO
              40 OPERATIONS           BOSTON




© Copy rights are reserved.
160



ECHO


When using a bind variable, the SQL statement is maintained by echo. By default this is
off.


Syntax:
       Set echo on | off


VERIFY


When using a bind variable, the old and new statements will be maintained by verify. By
default this is on.


Syntax:
       Set verify on | off


Ex:
       SQL>   select * from dept where deptno = &dno;
       Enter value for dno: 10
       old    1: select * from dept where deptno = &dno
       new     1: select * from dept where deptno = 10


          DEPTNO       DNAME           LOC
          ---------- ---------------- -----------
              10      ACCOUNTING NEW YORK


       SQL>   set verify off
       SQL>   select * from dept where deptno = &dno;
       Enter value for dno: 20


          DEPTNO DNAME              LOC
          ---------- ------------- -----------
              20      RESEARCH     DALLAS




© Copy rights are reserved.
161

PNO


This will give displays the page numbers. By default the value would be zero.


Ex:
       SQL>   col hiredate new_value xtoday noprint format a1 trunc
       SQL>   ttitle left xtoday right 'page' sql.pno
       SQL>   select * from emp where deptno = 10;


       09-JUN-81                                                                 page   1


        EMPNO      ENAME       JOB           MGR       SAL COMM          DEPTNO
       ---------- ---------- --------------- --------- ----- ---------- ----------
           7782 CLARK         MANAGER         7839     2450                10
           7839 KING          PRESIDENT                5000                10
           7934 MILLER        CLERK          7782     1300                 10


In the above noprint tells SQLPLUS not to display this column when it prints the results of
the SQL statement. Dates that have been reformatted by TO_CHAR get a default width of
about 100 characters. By changing the format to a1 trunc, you minimize this effect.
NEW_VALUE inserts contents of the column retrieved by the SQL statement into a variable
called xtoday.




© Copy rights are reserved.
162




                                                                        SPECIAL FILES


LOGIN.sql


If you would like SQLPLUS to define your own environmental settings, put all the required
commands in a file named login.sql. This is a special filename that SQLPLUS always looks
for whenever it starts up. If it finds login.sql, it executes any commands in it as if you had
entered then by hand. You can put any command in login.sql that you can use in SQLPLUS,
including SQLPLUS commands and SQL statements. All ot them executed before SQLPLUS
gives you the SQL> prompt.


GLOGIN.sql


This is used in the same ways as LOGIN.sql but to establish default SQLPLUS settings for all
users of a database.




© Copy rights are reserved.
163




                                                            IMPORTANT QUERIES


 1) To find the nth row of a table


     SQL>    Select *from emp where rowid = (select max(rowid) from emp where rownum
             <= 4);
                                              Or
     SQL>    Select *from emp where rownum <= 4 minus select *from emp where rownum
             <= 3;


 2) To find duplicate rows


     SQL>    Select *from emp where rowid in (select max(rowid) from emp group by
             empno, ename, mgr, job, hiredate, comm, deptno, sal);
                                              Or
      SQL>   Select empno,ename,sal,job,hiredate,comm , count(*) from emp group by
             empno,ename,sal,job,hiredate,comm having count(*) >=1;


 3) To delete duplicate rows


      SQL>   Delete emp where rowid in (select max(rowid) from emp group by


© Copy rights are reserved.
164

             empno,ename,mgr,job,hiredate,sal,comm,deptno);


 4) To find the count of duplicate rows


      SQL>   Select ename, count(*) from emp group by ename having count(*) >= 1;


 5) How to display alternative rows in a table?


     SQL>    select *from emp where (rowid,0) in (select rowid,mod(rownum,2) from emp);


 6) Getting employee details of each department who is drawing maximum sal?


     SQL>    select *from emp where (deptno,sal) in
             ( select deptno,max(sal) from emp group by deptno);
 7) How to get number of employees in each department , in which department is
     having more than 2500 employees?


     SQL>    Select deptno,count(*) from emp group by deptno having count(*) >2500;


 8) To reset the time to the beginning of the day


       SQL>   Select to_char(trunc(sysdate),’dd-mon-yyyy hh:mi:ss am’) from dual;


 9) To find nth maximum sal


      SQL>    Select *from emp where sal in (select max(sal) from (select *from emp order
              by sal) where rownum <= 5);




© Copy rights are reserved.
165




                                                                       INTRODUCTION

CHARACTERSTICS


    Highly structured, readable and accessible language.
      Standard and Protable language.
      Embedded language.
      Improved execution authority.


10g FEATURES


      Optimized compiler
   .
       To change the optimizer settings for the entire database, set the database
       parameter PLSQL_OPTIMIZE_LEVEL. Valid settings are as follows
       0       -     No optimization
       1       -     Moderate optimization
       2       -     Aggressive optimization


       These settings are also modifiable for the current session.
       SQL>   alter session set plsql_optimze_level=2;


© Copy rights are reserved.
166



       Oracle retains optimizer settings on a module-by-module basis. When you
       recompile a particular module with nondefault settings, the settings will stick
       allowing you to recompile later on using REUSE SETTINGS.


       SQL>   Alter procedure proc compile plsql_optimize_level=1;
       SQL>   Alter procedure proc compile reuse settings;


      Compile-time warnings.


       Starting with oracle database 10g release 1 you can enable additional compile-time
       warnings to help make your programs more robust. The compiler can detect
       potential runtime problems with your code, such as identifying lines of code that
       will never be run. This process, also known as lint checking.
       To enable these warnings fo the entire database, set the database parameter
       PLSQL_WARNINGS.    These settings are also modifiable for the current session.


       SQL>   alter session set plsql_warnings = ‘enable:all’;
       The above can be achieved using the built-in package DBMS_WARNING.


      Conditional compilation.


       Conditional compilation allows the compiler to allow to compile selected parts of a
       program based on conditions you provide with the $IF directive.


    Support for non-sequential collections in FORALL.
      Improved datatype support.


      Backtrace an exception to its line number.


       When handling an error, how can you find the line number on which the error was
       originally raised?


       In earlier release, the only way to do this was allow you exception to go unhandled
       and then view the full error trace stack.



© Copy rights are reserved.
167



       Now you can call DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_BACKTRACE function to obtain that stack
       and manipulate it programmatically within your program.


      Set operators for nested tables.


      Support for regular expressions.


       Oracle database 10g supports the use of regular expressions inside PL/SQL code via
       four new built-in functions.


                REGEXP_LIKE
                REGEXP_INSTR
                REGEXP_SUBSTR
                REGEXP_REPLACE

      Programmer-defined quoting mechanism.


       Starting with oracle database 10g release 1, you can define your own quoting
       mechanism for string literals in both SQL and PL/SQL.


       Use the characters q’(q followed by a single quote) to note the programmer-
       defined deliemeter for you string literal.


       Ex:
                 DECLARE

                    v varchar(10) := 'computer';
                 BEGIN

                    dbms_output.put_line(q'*v = *' || v);
                    dbms_output.put_line(q'$v = $' || v);
                 END;



       Output:
                 v = computer
                 v = computer


      Many new built-in packages.




© Copy rights are reserved.
168

       DBMS_SCHEDULER
       Represents a major update to DBMS_JOB. DBMS_SCHEDULER provides much improved
       functionality for scheduling and executing jobs defined via stored procedures.


       DBMS_CRYPTO
       Offers the ability to encrypt and decrypt common oracle datatype, including RAWs,
       BLOBs,   and CLOBs. It also provides globalization support for encrypting data across
       different charactersets.


       DBMS_MONITOR
       Provides an API to control additional tracing and statistics gathering of sessions.




       DBMS_WARNING
       Provides an API into the PL/SQL compiler warnings module, allowing you to read and
       change settings that control which warnings are suppressed, displayed, or treated
       as errors.


STANDARD PACKAGE


Oracle has defined in this special package. Oracle defines quite a few identifiers in this
package, including built-in exceptions, functions and subtypes.
You can reference the built-in form by prefixing it with STANDARD.


The basic unit in any PL/SQL program is block. All PL/SQL programs are composed of blocks
which can occur sequentially or nested.


BLOCK STRUCTURE


       Declare
       -- declarative section
       Begin
       -- executable section
       Exception




© Copy rights are reserved.
169

       -- exception section
       End;


In the above declarative and exceptiona sections are optional.


BLOCK TYPES


              Anonymous blocks
              Named blocks
                   Labeled blocks
                   Subprograms
                   Triggers




ANONYMOUS BLOCKS



Anonymous blocks implies basic block structure.


Ex:
       BEGIN

          Dbms_output.put_line(‘My first program’):
       END;


LABELED BLOCKS



Labeled blocks are anonymous blocks with a label which gives a name to the block.


Ex:
       <<my_bloock>>
       BEGIN

           Dbms_output.put_line(‘My first program’):
       END;



SUBPROGRAMS




© Copy rights are reserved.
170

Subprograms are procedures and functions. They can be stored in the database as stand-
alone objects, as part of package or as methods of an object type.


TRIGGERS



Triggers consists of a PL/SQL block that is associated with an event that occur in the
database.


NESTED BLOCKS


A block can be nested within the executable or exception section of an outer block.


IDENTIFIERS


Identifiers are used to name PL/SQL objects, such as variables, cursors, types and
subprograms. Identifiers consists of a letter, optionally followed by any sequence of
characters, including letters, numbers, dollar signs, underscores, and pound signs only.
The maximum length for an identifier is 30 characters.


QUOTED IDENTIFIERS


If you want to make an identifier case sensitive, include characters such as spaces or use
a reserved word, you can enclose the identifier in double quotation marks.


Ex:
               DECLARE

                    "a" number := 5;
                    "A" number := 6;
               BEGIN

                    dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a);
                    dbms_output.put_line('A = ' || A);
               END;

Output:
                a=6
                A=6




© Copy rights are reserved.
171

COMMENTS


Comments improve readability and make your program more understandable. They are
ignored by the PL/SQL compiler. There are two types of comments available.


             Single line comments
             Multiline comments


SINGLE LINE COMMENTS



A single-line comment can start any point on a line with two dashes and continues until
the end of the line.


Ex:
              BEGIN

                  Dbms_output.put_line(‘hello’);          -- sample program
              END;
MULTILINE COMMENTS



Multiline comments start with the /* delimiter and ends with */ delimiter.


Ex:
              BEGIN

                  Dbms_output.put_line(‘hello’);          /* sample program */
              END;



VARIABLE DECLERATIONS


Variables can be declared in declarative section of the block;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                  a number;
                  b number := 5;
                  c number default 6;


CONSTANT DECLERATIONS


© Copy rights are reserved.
172



To declare a constant, you include the CONSTANT keyword, and you must supply a default
value.


Ex:
                DECLARE

                   b constant number := 5;
                   c constant number default 6;


NOT NULL CLAUSE


You can also specify that the variable must be not null.


Ex:
                DECLARE

                   b constant number not null:= 5;
                   c number not null default 6;
ANCHORED DECLERATIONS


PL/SQL   offers two kinds of achoring.
               Scalar anchoring
               Record anchoring


SCALAR ANCHORING


Use the %TYPE attribute to define your variable based on table’s column of some other
PL/SQL   scalar variable.


Ex:
                DECLARE

                   dno dept.deptno%type;
                   Subtype t_number is number;
                   a t_number;
                   Subtype t_sno is student.sno%type;
                   V_sno t_sno;


RECORD ANCHORING




© Copy rights are reserved.
173



Use the %ROWTYPE attribute to define your record structure based on a table.


Ex:
                        `DECLARE
                       V_dept dept%rowtype;


BENEFITS OF ANCHORED DECLARATIONS


         Synchronization with database columns.
         Normalization of local variables.


PROGRAMMER-DEFINED TYPES


With the SUBTYPE statement, PL/SQL allows you to define your own subtypes or aliases of
predefined datatypes, sometimes referred to as abstract datatypes.
There are two kinds of subtypes.
                       Constrained
                       Unconstrained


CONSTRAINED SUBTYPE



A subtype that restricts or constrains the values normally allowd by the datatype itself.


Ex:
          Subtype positive is binary_integer range 1..2147483647;


In the above declaration a variable that is declared as positive can store only ingeger
greater than zero even though binary_integer ranges from -2147483647..+2147483647.


UNCONSTRAINED SUBTYPE


A subtype that does not restrict the values of the original datatype in variables declared
with the subtype.


Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
174

         Subtype float is number;


DATATYPE CONVERSIONS


PL/SQL   can handle conversions between different families among the datatypes.
Conversion can be done in two ways.


               Explicit conversion
               Implicit conversion


EXPLICIT CONVERSION



This can be done using the built-in functions available.


IMPLICIT CONVERSION



PL/SQL will automatically convert between datatype families when possible.
Ex:
                DECLARE

                   a varchar(10);
                BEGIN

                   select deptno into a from dept where dname='ACCOUNTING';
                END;



In the above variable a is char type and deptno is number type even though, oracle will
automatically converts the numeric data into char type assigns to the variable.
PL/SQL   can automatically convert between


               Characters and numbers
               Characters and dates


VARIABLE SCOPE AND VISIBILITY


The scope of a variable is the portion of the program in which the variable can be
accessed. For PL/SQL variables, this is from the variable declaration until the end of the




© Copy rights are reserved.
175

block. When a variable goes out of scope, the PL/SQL engine will free the memory used to
store the variable.


The visibility of a variable is the portion of the program where the variable can be
accessed without having to qualify the reference. The visibility is always within the scope.
If it is out of scope, it is not visible.


Ex1:
              DECLARE

                     a number;         -- scope of a
              BEGIN
              --------
                 DECLARE

                         b number;     -- scope of b
                 BEGIN

                 -----
                 END;

              ------
              END;

Ex2:
              DECLARE

                   a number;
                   b number;
              BEGIN

                   -- a , b available here
                   DECLARE

                         b char(10);
                   BEGIN

                         -- a and char type b is available here
                   END;

                   -----
              END;



Ex3:
              <<my_block>>
              DECLARE

                   a number;
                   b number;



© Copy rights are reserved.
176

                 BEGIN

                    -- a , b available here
                    DECLARE

                           b char(10);
                    BEGIN

                           -- a and char type b is available here
                           -- number type b is available using <<my_block>>.b
                    END;

                        ------
                 END;



PL/SQL CONTROL STRUCTURES


PL/SQL   has a variety of control structures that allow you to control the behaviour of the
block as it runs. These structures include conditional statements and loops.


                If-then-else
                Case
                     Case with no else
                     Labeled case
                     Searched case
                Simple loop
                While loop
                For loop
                Goto and Labels


IF-THEN-ELSE


Syntax:
         If <condition1> then
           Sequence of statements;
         Elsif <condition1> then
                Sequence of statements;
         ……
         Else
            Sequence of statements;



© Copy rights are reserved.
177

       End if;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     dno number(2);
              BEGIN

                     select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING';
                     if dno = 10 then
                       dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK');
                     elsif dno = 20 then
                            dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS');
                     elsif dno = 30 then
                            dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO');
                     else
                            dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON');
                     end if;
              END;




Output:
              Location is NEW YORK


CASE


Syntax:
       Case test-variable
              When value1 then sequence of statements;
              When value2 then sequence of statements;
              ……
              When valuen then sequence of statements;
              Else sequence of statements;
       End case;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                   dno number(2);



© Copy rights are reserved.
178

              BEGIN

                     select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING';
                     case dno
                         when 10 then
                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK');
                         when 20 then
                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS');
                         when 30 then
                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO');
                         else
                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON');
                     end case;
              END;



Output:
              Location is NEW YORK




CASE WITHOUT ELSE


Syntax:
       Case test-variable
              When value1 then sequence of statements;
              When value2 then sequence of statements;
              ……
              When valuen then sequence of statements;
       End case;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     dno number(2);
              BEGIN

                     select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING';
                     case dno
                         when 10 then



© Copy rights are reserved.
179

                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK');
                         when 20 then
                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS');
                         when 30 then
                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO');
                         when 40 then
                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON');
                         end case;
              END;



Output:
              Location is NEW YORK


LABELED CASE


Syntax:
       <<label>>
       Case test-variable
              When value1 then sequence of statements;
              When value2 then sequence of statements;
              ……
              When valuen then sequence of statements;
       End case;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     dno number(2);
              BEGIN

                     select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING';
                     <<my_case>>
                     case dno
                         when 10 then
                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK');
                         when 20 then
                                dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS');
                         when 30 then



© Copy rights are reserved.
180

                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO');
                         when 40 then
                                 dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON');
                     end case my_case;
              END;



Output:
              Location is NEW YORK


SEARCHED CASE


Syntax:
       Case
              When <condition1> then sequence of statements;
              When <condition2> then sequence of statements;
              ……
              When <conditionn> then sequence of statements;
       End case;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     dno number(2);
              BEGIN

                     select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING';
                     case dno
                          when dno = 10 then
                                  dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK');
                          when dno = 20 then
                                  dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS');
                          when dno = 30 then
                                  dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO');
                          when dno = 40 then
                                  dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON');
                     end case;
              END;




© Copy rights are reserved.
181

Output:
              Location is NEW YORK


SIMPLE LOOP


Syntax:
       Loop
       Sequence of statements;
       Exit when <condition>;
       End loop;


In the syntax exit when <condition> is equivalent to
       If <condition> then
              Exit;
       End if;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                   i number := 1;
              BEGIN

                   loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i);
                      i := i + 1;
                      exit when i > 5;
                   end loop;
              END;



Output:
              i=1
              i=2
              i=3
              i=4
              i=5


WHILE LOOP




© Copy rights are reserved.
182

Syntax:
       While <condition> loop
       Sequence of statements;
       End loop;


Ex:
              DECLARE

                   i number := 1;
              BEGIN

                   While i <= 5 loop
                         dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i);
                         i := i + 1;
                   end loop;
              END;



Output:
              i=1
              i=2
              i=3
              i=4
              i=5


FOR LOOP


Syntax:
       For <loop_counter_variable> in low_bound..high_bound loop
       Sequence of statements;
       End loop;


Ex1:
              BEGIN

                   For i in 1..5 loop
                        dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i);
                   end loop;
              END;

Output:




© Copy rights are reserved.
183

              i=1
              i=2
              i=3
              i=4
              i=5


Ex2:
              BEGIN

                  For i in reverse 1..5 loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i);
                  end loop;
              END;

Output:
              i=5
              i=4
              i=3
              i=2
              i=1


NULL STATEMENT


Usually when you write a statement in a program, you want it to do something. There are
cases, however, when you want to tell PL/SQL to do absolutely nothing, and that is where
the NULL comes.


The NULL statement deos nothing except pass control to the next executable statement.
You can use NULL statement in the following situations.


 Improving program readability.
    Sometimes, it is helpful to avoid any ambiguity inherent in an IF statement that
    doesn’t cover all possible cases. For example, when you write an IF statement, you do
    not have to include an ELSE clause.


   Nullifying a raised exception.




© Copy rights are reserved.
184

      When you don’t want to write any special code to handle an exception, you can use the
      NULL statement to make sure that a raised exception halts execution of the current
      PL/SQL   block but does not propagate any exceptions to enclosing blocks.


     Using null after a label.
      In some cases, you can pair NULL with GOTO to avoid having to execute additional
      statements. For example, I use a GOTO statement to quickly move to the end of my
      program if the state of my data indicates that no further processing is required.
      Because I do not have to do anything at the termination of the program, I place a NULL
      statement after the label because at least one executable statement is required there.
      Even though NULL deos nothing, it is still an executable statement.


GOTO AND LABELS


Syntax:
         Goto label;


Where label is a label defined in the PL/SQL block. Labels are enclosed in double angle
brackets. When a goto statement is evaluated, control immediately passes to the
statement identified by the label.
Ex:
                 BEGIN

                    For i in 1..5 loop
                         dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i);
                         if i = 4 then
                            goto exit_loop;
                         end if;
                    end loop;
                    <<exit_loop>>
                    Null;
                 END;



Output:
                 i=1
                 i=2
                 i=3



© Copy rights are reserved.
185

                i=4


RESTRICTIONS ON GOTO



        It is illegal to branch into an inner block, loop.
        At least one executable statement must follow.

    It is illegal to branch into an if statement.
        It is illegal to branch from one if statement to another if statement.
        It is illegal to branch from exception block to the current block.


PRAGMAS


Pragmas are compiler directives. They serve as instructions to the PL/SQL compiler. The
compiler will act on the pragma during the compilation of the block.


Syntax:
         PRGAMA   instruction_to_compiler.


PL/SQL   offers several pragmas:


               AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION
               EXCEPTION_INIT
               RESTRICT_REFERENCES

               SERIALLY_REUSABLE




© Copy rights are reserved.
186




                                                                SUBPROGRAMS

PROCEDURES


A procedure is a module that performs one or more actions.


Syntax:
       Procedure [schema.]name [(parameter1 [,parameter2 …])]
                   [authid definer | current_user] is
              -- [declarations]
      Begin
              -- executable statements
      [Exception
              -- exception handlers]



© Copy rights are reserved.
187

      End [name];


In the above authid clause defines whether the procedure will execute under the
authority of the definer of the procedure or under the authority of the current user.


FUNCTIONS


A function is a module that returns a value.


Syntax:
       Function [schema.]name [(parameter1 [,parameter2 …])]
                  Return return_datatype
                  [authid definer | current_user]
                  [deterministic]
                  [parallel_enable] is
              -- [declarations]
      Begin
              -- executable statements
      [Exception
              -- exception handlers]
      End [name];
In the above authid clause defines whether the procedure will execute under the
authority of the definer of the procedure or under the authority of the current user.


Deterministic clause defines, an optimization hint that lets the system use a saved copy of
the function’s return result, if available. The quety optimizer can choose whether to use
the saved copy or re-call the function.


Parallel_enable clause defines, an optimization hint that enables the function to be
executed in parallel when called from within SELECT statement.


PARAMETER MODES


             In (Default)
             Out



© Copy rights are reserved.
188

               In out


IN



In parameter will act as pl/sql constant.


OUT



       Out parameter will act as unintialized variable.
       You cannot provide a default value to an out parameter.
       Any assignments made to out parameter are rolled back when an exception is
         raised in the program.

       An actual parameter corresponding to an out formal parameter must be a variable.


IN OUT



       In out parameter will act as initialized variable.
       An actual parameter corresponding to an in out formal parameter must be a
         variable.




DEFAULT PARAMETERS


Default Parameters will not allow in the beginning and middle.
Out and In Out parameters can not have default values.


Ex:
      procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number default 6, c in number default 7) –
      valid
      procedure p(a in number, b in number default 6, c in number default 7) – valild
      procedure p(a in number, b in number, c in number default 7) – valild
      procedure p(a in number, b in number default 6, c in number) – invalild
      procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number default 6, c in number) – invalild
      procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number, c in number) – invalild



© Copy rights are reserved.
189



NOTATIONS


Notations are of two types.


                 Positional notation
                 Name notation


We can combine positional and name notation but positional notation can not be followed
by the name notation.


Ex:
      Suppose we have a procedure proc(a number,b number,c number) and we have one
      anonymous block which contains v1,v2, and v3;


   SQL>      exec proc (v1,v2,v3)                   -- Positional notation
   SQL>      exec proc (a=>v1,b=>v2,c=>v3)          -- Named notation


FORMAL AND ACTUAL PARAMETERS


       Parametes which are in calling subprogram are actual parameters.
       Parametes which are in called subprogram are formal parameters.
         If any subprogram was called, once the call was completed then the values of
          formal
          parameters are copied to the actual parameters.


      Ex1:
                  CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE SAMPLE(a   in number,b out number,c in out
                                                       number) is
                  BEGIN

                     dbms_output.put_line('After call');
                     dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a ||' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c);
                     b := 10;
                     c := 20;
                     dbms_output.put_line('After assignment');



© Copy rights are reserved.
190

                  dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a ||' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c);
              END SAMPLE;


              DECLARE

                  v1 number := 4;
                  v2 number := 5;
                  v3 number := 6;
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('Before call');
                  dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3);
                  sample(v1,v2,v3);
                  dbms_output.put_line('After completion of call');
                  dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3);
              END;



   Output:
              Before call
              v1 = 4 v2 = 5 v3 = 6
              After call
              a=4b= c=6
              After assignment
              a = 4 b = 10 c = 20
              After completion of call
              v1 = 4 v2 = 10 v3 = 20
   Ex2:
              CREATE OR REPLACE FUN(a   in number,b out number,c in out number) return
                                     number IS
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('After call');
                  dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c);
                  dbms_output.put_line('Before assignement Result = ' || (a*nvl(b,1)*c));
                  b := 5;
                  c := 7;
                  dbms_output.put_line('After assignment');
                  dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c);
                  return (a*b*c);
               END FUN;



© Copy rights are reserved.
191


              DECLARE

                  v1 number := 1;
                  v2 number := 2;
                  v3 number := 3;
                  v number;
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('Before call');
                  dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3);
                  v := fun(v1,v2,v3);
                  dbms_output.put_line('After call completed');
                  dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3);
                  dbms_output.put_line('Result = ' || v);
              END;



   Output:
              Before call
              v1 = 1 v2 = 2 v3 = 3
              After call
              a=1b= c=3
              Before assignement Result = 3
              After assignment
              a=1b=5c=7
              After call completed
              v1 = 1 v2 = 5 v3 = 7
              Result = 35


RESTRICTIONS ON FORMAL PARAMETERS



      By declaring with specified size in actual parameters.
      By declaring formal parameters with %type specifier.


USING NOCOPY


    Nocopy is a hint, not a command. This means that the compiler might silently
       decide that it can’t fulfill your request for a nocopy parameter.




© Copy rights are reserved.
192


    The copying from formal to actual can be restricted by issuing nocopy qualifier.
    To pass the out and in out parameters by reference use nocopy qualifier.


   Ex:
         CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE PROC(a   in out nocopy number) IS
          BEGIN
           ----
         END PROC;



CALL AND EXEC


Call is a SQL statement, which can be used to execute subprograms like exec.


Syntax:
         Call subprogram_name([argument_list]) [into host_variable];


        The parantheses are always required, even if the subprogram takes no arguments.

    We can not use call with out and in out parameters.
    Call is a SQL statement, it is not valid inside a PL/SQL block;
    The INTO clause is used for the output variables of functions only.
    We can not use ‘exec’ with out or in out parameters.
    Exec is not valid inside a PL/SQL block;



Ex1:
                  CREATE OR REPLACE PROC IS
                  BEGIN

                     dbms_output.put_line('hello world');
                  END PROC;



Output:
                  SQL>   call proc();
                         hello world


Ex2:



© Copy rights are reserved.
193

              CREATE OR REPLACE PROC(a     in number,b in number) IS
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b);
              END PROC;



Output:
              SQL>   call proc(5,6);
                     a=5b=6


Ex3:
              CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION FUN RETURN VARCHAR IS
              BEGIN

                  return 'hello world';
              END FUN;



Output:
              SQL>   variable v varchar(20)
              SQL>   call fun() into :v;
              SQL>   print v
                     hello world


CALL BY REFERENCE AND CALL BY VALUE


    In parameters by default call by reference where as out and in out call by value.
      When parameter passed by reference, a pointer to the actual parameter is passed
       to the corresponding formal parameter.

    When parameter passed by value it copies the value of the actual parameter to the
       formal parameter.
      Call by reference is faster than the call by value because it avoids the copying.


SUBPROGRAMS OVERLOADING


    Possible with different number of parameters.
    Possible with different types of data.
    Possible with same type with objects.



© Copy rights are reserved.
194


    Can not be possible with different types of modes.
      We can overload local subprograms also.


Ex:
       SQL>   create or replace type t1 as object(a number);/
       SQL>   create or replace type t1 as object(a number);/


               DECLARE

                  i t1 := t1(5);
                  j t2 := t2(5);
                  PROCEDURE P(m t1) IS
                  BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || m.a);
                  END P;
                  PROCEDURE P(n t2) IS
                  BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('b = ' || n.b);
                  END P;
                  PROCEDURE PRODUCT(a number,b number) IS
                  BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('Product of a,b = ' || a * b);
                  END PRODUCT;
                  PROCEDURE PRODUCT(a number,b number,c number) IS
                  BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('Product of a,b = ' || a * b * c);
                  END PRODUCT;
               BEGIN

                  p(i);
                  p(j);
                  product(4,5);
                  product(4,5,6);
               END;



Output:
               a=5
               b=5
               Product of a,b = 20
               Product of a,b = 120




© Copy rights are reserved.
195



BENEFITS OF OVERLOADING



      Supporting many data combinations
      Fitting the program to the user.


RESTRICTIONS ON OVERLOADING



      Overloaded programs with parameter lists that differ only by name must be called
       using named notation.
      The parameter list of overloaded programs must differ by more than parameter
       mode.

    All of the overloaded programs must be defined within the same          PL/SQL   scope or
       block.
      Overloaded functions must differ by more than their return type.


IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT SUBPROGRAMS


    When a stored subprogram is created, it is stored in the data dictionary.
    The subprogram is stored in compile form which is known as p-code in addition to
       the source text.

    The p-code has all of the references in the subprogram evaluated, and the source
       code is translated into a form that is easily readable by PL/SQL engine.
      When the subprogram is called, the p-code is read from the disk, if necessary, and
       executed.

    Once it reads from the disk, the p-code is stored in the shared pool portion of the
       system global area (SGA), where it can be accessed by multiple users as needed.

    Like all of the contents of the shared pool, p-code is aged out of the shared pool
       according to a least recently used (LRU) algorithm.

    Subprograms can be local.
    Local subprograms must be declared in the declarative section of       PL/SQL   block and
       called from the executable section.
      Subprograms can not have the declarative section separately.
      Stored subprograms can have local subprograms;




© Copy rights are reserved.
196

      Local subprograms also can have local subprograms.

    If the subprogram contains a variable with the same name as the column name of
       the table then use the dot method to differentiate (subprogram_name.sal).
      Subprograms can be invalidated.


PROCEDURES V FUNCTIONS


      Procedures may return through out and in out parameters where as function must
       return.
      Procedures can not have return clause where as functions must.
      We can use call statement directly for executing procedure where as we need to
       declare a variable in case of functions.
      Functions can use in select statements where as procedures can not.
      Functions can call from reports environment where as procedures can not.
      We can use exec for executing procedures where as functions can not.
      Function can be used in dbms_output where as procedure can not.
      Procedure call is a standalone executable statement where as function call is a part
       of an executable statement.


STORED V LOCAL SUBPROGRAMS


      The stored subprogram is stored in compiled p-code in the database, when the
       procedure is called it does not have to be compiled.
       The local subprogram is compiled as part of its containing block. If the containing
       block is anonymous and is run multiple times, the subprogram has to be compiled
       each time.


      Stored subprograms can be called from any block submitted by a user who has
       execute privileges on the subprogram.
       Local subprograms can be called only from the block containing the subprogram.
      By keeping the stored subprogram code separate from the calling block, the calling
       block is shorter and easier to understand.
       The local subprogram and the calling block are one and the same, which can lead to
       part confusion. If a change to the calling block is made, the subprogram will be
       recompiled as of the recompilation of the containing block.



© Copy rights are reserved.
197

      The     compiled       p-code   can   be   pinned   in   the   shared   pool   using   the
       DBMS_SHARED_POOL Package. This can improve performance.
       Local subprograms cannot be pinned in the shared pool by themselves.

    Stand alone stored subprograms can not be overloaded, but packaged subprograms
       can be overloaded within the same package.
      Local subprograms can be overloaded within the same block.


   Ex1:
               CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS
               BEGIN

                 dbms_output.put_line('Stored subprogram');
               END;



   Output:
               SQL>   exec p
               Stored subprogram


   Ex2:
               DECLARE
                  PROCEDURE P IS
                  BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('Local subprogram');
                  END;
               BEGIN

                  p;
               END;



   Output:
               Local subprogram
COMPILING SUBPROGRAMS


      SQL>   Alter procedure P1 compile;

      SQL>   Alter function F1 compile;


SUBPROGRAMS DEPENDECIES




© Copy rights are reserved.
198

      A stored subprogram is marked as invalid in the data dictionary if it has compile
       errors.
      A stored subprogram can also become invalid if a DDL operation is performed on
       one of its dependent objects.

    If a subprogram is invalidated, the          PL/SQL   engine will automatically attempt to
       recompile in the next time it is called.

    If we have two procedures like P1 and P2 in which P1 depends on P2. If we compile
       P2 then P1 is invalidated.


SUBPROGRAMS DEPENDENCIES IN REMOTE DATABASES


    We will call remote subprogram using connect string like P1@ORACLE;
      If we have two procedures like P1 and P2 in which P1 depends on P2 but P2 was in
       remote database. If we compile P2 it will not invalidate P1 immediately because
       the data dictionary does not track remote dependencies.

    Instead the validity of remote objects is checked at runtime. When P1 is called, the
       remote data dictionary is queried to determine the status of P2.
      P1 and P2 are compared to see it P1 needs to be recompiled, there are two
       different methods of comparision
           Timestamp Model
           Signature Model


TIMESTAMP MODEL


      This is the default model used by oracle.
      With this model, the timestamps of the last modifications of the two objects are
       compared.

    The last_ddl_time field of user_objects contains the timestamp.
      If the base object has a newer timestamp than the dependent object, the
       dependent object will be recompiled.


ISSUES WITH THIS MODEL



      If the objects are in different time zones, the comparison is invalid.




© Copy rights are reserved.
199


    When P1 is in a client side    PL/SQL   engine such as oracle forms, in this case it may
       not possible to recompile P1, because the source for it may not be included with
       the forms.


SIGNATURE MODEL


      When a procedure is created, a signature is stored in the data dictionary in addition
       to the p-code.
      The signature encodes the types and order of the parametes.
      When P1 is compiled the first time, the signature of P2 is included. Thus, P1 only
       needs to recompiled when the signature of P2 changes.

    In order to use the signature model, the parameter       REMOTE_DEPENDENCIES_MODE    must
       be set to SIGNATURE. This is a parameter in the database initialization file.


THREE WAYS OF SETTING THIS MODE



    Add the line     REMOTE_DEPENDENCIES_MODE=SIGNATURE    to the database initialization file.
       The next time the database is started, the mode will be set to SIGNATURE for all
       sessions.
      Alter system set remote_dependencies_mode = signature;
       This will affect the entire database (all sessions) from the time the statement is
       issued. You must have the ALTER SYSTEM privilege to issue this command.
      Alter session set remote_dependencies_mode = signature;
       This will only affect your session


ISSUES WITH THIS MODEL



    Signatures don’t get modified if the default values of formal parameters are
       changed.


      Suppose P2 has a default value for one of its parameters, and P1 is using this
       default value. If the default in the specification for P2 is changed, P1 will not be
       recompiled by default. The old value for the default parameter will still be used until
       P1 is manually recompiled.




© Copy rights are reserved.
200


    If P1 is calling a packaged procedure P2, and a new overloaded version of P2 is
       added to the remote package, the signature is not changed. P1 will still use the old
       version(not the new overloaded one) until P1 is recompiled manually.


FORWARD DECLERATION


Before going to use the procedure in any other subprogram or other block , you must
declare the prototype of the procedure in declarative section.


Ex1:
              DECLARE
                  PROCEDURE P1 IS
                  BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p1');
                      p2;
                  END P1;
                  PROCEDURE P2 IS
                  BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p2');
                      p3;
                  END P2;
                  PROCEDURE P3 IS
                  BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p3');
                  END P3;
              BEGIN

                  p1;
              END;



Output:
              p2;
              *
              ERROR at line 5:
              ORA-06550: line 5, column 1:
              PLS-00313: 'P2' not declared in this scope
              ORA-06550: line 5, column 1:
              PL/SQL: Statement ignored
              ORA-06550: line 10, column 1:


© Copy rights are reserved.
201

              PLS-00313: 'P3' not declared in this scope
              ORA-06550: line 10, column 1:
              PL/SQL: Statement ignored


Ex2:
              DECLARE

                 PROCEDURE P2;     -- forward declaration
                 PROCEDURE P3;
                 PROCEDURE P1 IS
                 BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p1');
                      p2;
                 END P1;
                 PROCEDURE P2 IS
                 BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p2');
                      p3;
                 END P2;
                 PROCEDURE P3 IS
                 BEGIN

                      dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p3');
                 END P3;
              BEGIN

                  p1;
              END;



Output:
              From procedure p1
              From procedure p2
              From procedure p3




PRIVILEGES AND STORED SUBPROGRAMS


EXECUTE PREVILEGE




© Copy rights are reserved.
202


        For stored subprograms and packages the relevant privilege is EXECUTE.
        If user A had the procedure called emp_proc then user A grants execute privilege
            on procedure to user B with the following command.
            SQL>   Grant execute on emp_proc to user B.
          Then user B can run the procedure by issuing
            SQL>   Exec user A.emp_proc


userA created the following procedure


                CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS

                    cursor is select *from student1;
                BEGIN

                    for v in c loop
                         insert into student2 values(v.no,v.name,v.marks);
                    end loop;
                END P;



userA granted execute privilege to userB using
SQL>   grant execute on p to userB


Then userB executed the procedure
SQL>   Exec userA.p


If suppose userB also having student2 table then which table will populate whether
userA’s or userB’s.


The answer is userA’s student2 table only because by default the procedure will execute
under the privlige set of its owner.
The above procedure is known as definer’s procedure.


HOW TO POPULATE USER B’s TABLE



        Oracle introduces Invoker’s and Definer’s rights.
          By default it will use the definer’s rights.

        An invoker’s rights routine can be created by using AUTHID clause to populate the
           userB’s table.


© Copy rights are reserved.
203

           It is valid for stand-alone subprograms, package specifications, and object type
            specifications only.


userA created the following procedure


                   CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P
                   AUTHID CURRENT_USER IS

                       cursor is select *from student1;
                   BEGIN

                       for v in c loop
                            insert into student2 values(v.no,v.name,v.marks);
                       end loop;
                   END P;



Then grant execute privilege on p to userB.
Executing the procedure by userB, which populates userB’s table.


The above procedure is called invoker’s procedure.
Instead of current_user of authid clause, if you use definer then it will be called definer’
procedure.


STORED SUBPROGRAMS AND ROLES



we have two users saketh and sudha in which saketh has student table and sudha does
not.
Sudha is going to create a procedure based on student table owned by saketh. Before
doing this saketh must grant the permissions on this table to sudha.


           SQL>   conn saketh/saketh
           SQL>   grant all on student to sudha;
           then sudha can create procedure
           SQL>   conn sudha/sudha


           CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS

              cursor c is select *from saketh.student;
           BEGIN

              for v in c loop



© Copy rights are reserved.
204

                dbms_output.put_line(‘No = ‘ || v.no);
           end loop;
       END P;



here procedure will be created.


If the same privilege was granted through a role it wont create the procedure.
Examine the following code


       SQL>   conn saketh/saketh
       SQL>   create role saketh_role;
       SQL>   grant all on student to saketh_role;
       SQL>   grant saketh_role to sudha;
       then conn sudha/sudha


       CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS

           cursor c is select *from saketh.student;
       BEGIN

           for v in c loop
                dbms_output.put_line(‘No = ‘ || v.no);
           end loop;
       END P;



The above code will raise error instead of creating procedure .
This is because of early binding which PL/SQL uses by default in which references are
evaluated in compile time but when you are using a role this will affect immediately.


ISSUES WITH INVOKER’S RIGHTS



    In an invoker’s rights routine, external references in             SQL   statements will be
       resolved using the caller’s privilege set.

    But references in        PL/SQL   statements are still resolved under the owner’s privilege
       set.


TRIGGERS, VIEWS AND INVOKER’S RIGHTS




© Copy rights are reserved.
205

      A database trigger will always be executed with definer’s rights and will execute
       under the privilege set of the schema that owns the triggering table.

    This is also true for    PL/SQL   function that is called from a view. In this case, the
       function will execute under the privilege set of the view’s owner.




                                                                               PACKAGES



© Copy rights are reserved.
206

   A package is a container for related objects. It has specification and body. Each of
   them is stored separately in data dictionary.


   PACKAGE SYNTAX


   Create or replace package <package_name> is
       -- package specification includes subprograms signatures, cursors and global or
          public variables.
   End <package_name>;


   Create or replace package body <package_name> is
       -- package body includes body for all the subprograms declared in the spec, private
         Variables and cursors.
    Begin
       -- initialization section
    Exception
       -- Exception handling seciton
    End <package_name>;


   IMPORTANT POINGS ABOUT PACKAGES


      The first time a packaged subprogram is called or any reference to a packaged
       variable or type is made, the package is instantiated.
      Each session will have its own copy of packaged variables, ensuring that two
       sessions executing subprograms in the same package use different memory
       locations.
      In many cases initialization needs to be run the first time the package is
       instantiated within a session. This can be done by adding initialization section to
       the package body after all the objects.
      Packages are stored in the data dictionary and can not be local.
      Packaged subprograms has an advantage over stand alone subprogram.

    When ever any reference to package, the whole package p-code was stored in
       shared pool of SGA.
      Package may have local subprograms.
      You can include authid clause inside the package spec not in the body.



© Copy rights are reserved.
207

      The execution section of a package is know as initialization section.
      You can have an exception section at the bottom of a package body.
      Packages subprograms are not invalidated.


COMPILING PACKAGES


      SQL>   Alter package PKG compile;

      SQL>   Alter package PKG compile specification;

      SQL>   Alter package PKG compile body;


PACKAGE DEPENDENCIES


      The package body depends on the some objects and the package header.
      The package header does not depend on the package body, which is an advantage
       of packages.
      We can change the package body with out changing the header.


PACKAGE RUNTIME STATE


Package runtime state is differ for the following packages.
                     Serially reusable packages
                     Non serially reusable packages


SERIALLY REUSABLE PACKAGES



To force the oracle to use serially reusable version then include PRAGMA SERIALLY_REUSABLE
in both package spec and body, Examine the following package.


          CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS

               pragma serially_reusable;
               procedure emp_proc;
          END PKG;




          CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

               pragma serially_reusable;


© Copy rights are reserved.
208

              cursor c is select ename from emp;
           PROCEDURE EMP_PROC IS

              v_ename emp.ename%type;
              v_flag boolean := true;
              v_numrows number := 0;
           BEGIN

              if not c%isopen then
                open c;
              end if;
              while v_flag loop
                      fetch c into v_ename;
                      v_numrows := v_numrows + 1;
                      if v_numrows = 5 then
                        v_flag := false;
                      end if;
                      dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_ename);
              end loop;
           END EMP_PROC;
           END PKG;


   SQL>   exec pkg.emp_proc
              Ename = SMITH
              Ename = ALLEN
              Ename = WARD
              Ename = JONES
              Ename = MARTIN




   SQL>   exec pkg.emp_proc
              Ename = SMITH
              Ename = ALLEN
              Ename = WARD
              Ename = JONES
              Ename = MARTIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
209

      The above package displays the same output for each execution even though the
       cursor is not closed.
      Because the serially reusable version resets the state of the cursor each time it was
       called.


NON SERIALL Y REUSABLE PACKAGES



This is the default version used by the oracle, examine the following package.


              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS

                  procedure emp_proc;
              END PKG;



              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                  cursor c is select ename from emp;
              PROCEDURE EMP_PROC IS

                  v_ename emp.ename%type;
                  v_flag boolean := true;
                  v_numrows number := 0;
              BEGIN

                  if not c%isopen then
                      open c;
                 end if;
                 while v_flag loop
                         fetch c into v_ename;
                         v_numrows := v_numrows + 1;
                         if v_numrows = 5 then
                           v_flag := false;
                         end if;
                         dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_ename);
                 end loop;
              END EMP_PROC;
              END PKG;



   SQL>   exec pkg.emp_proc
              Ename = SMITH
              Ename = ALLEN



© Copy rights are reserved.
210

              Ename = WARD
              Ename = JONES
              Ename = MARTIN


   SQL>   exec pkg.emp_proc


              Ename = BLAKE
              Ename = CLARK
              Ename = SCOTT
              Ename = KING
              Ename = TURNER


      The above package displays the different output for each execution even though
       the cursor is not closed.
      Because the non-serially reusable version remains the state of the cursor over
       database calls.


DEPENDENCIES OF PACKAGE RUNTIME STATE



Dependencies can exists between package state and anonymous blocks.
Examine the following program


   Create this package in first session
           CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS

              v number := 5;
              procedure p;
           END PKG;



           CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS
           PROCEDURE P IS
           BEGIN

           dbms_output.put_line('v = ' || v);
           v := 10;
           dbms_output.put_line('v = ' || v);
           END P;
           END PKG;




© Copy rights are reserved.
211

   Connect to second session, run the following code.


          BEGIN

              pkg.p;
          END;


   The above code wil work.


   Go back to first session and recreate the package using create.
   Then connect to second session and run the following code again.


          BEGIN

              pkg.p;
          END;


This above code will not work because of the following.


      The anonymous block depends on pkg. This is compile time dependency.
      There is also a runtime dependency on the packaged variables, since each session
       has its own copy of packaged variables.
      Thus when pkg is recompiled the runtime dependency                is followed, which
       invalidates the block and raises the oracle error.
      Runtime dependencies exist only on package state. This includes variables and
       cursors declared in a package.
      If the package had no global variables, the second execution of the anonymous
       block would have succeeded.


PURITY LEVELS


In general, calls to subprograms are procedural, they cannot be called from SQL
statements. However, if a stand-alone or packaged function meets certain restrictions, it
can be called during execution of a SQL statement.


User-defined functions are called the same way as built-in functions but it must meet
different restrictions. These restrictions are defined in terms of purity levels.


There are four types of purity levels.


© Copy rights are reserved.
212

          WNDS         --      Writes No Database State
          RNDS         --      Reads No Database State
          WNPS         --      Writes No Package State
          RNPS         --      Reads No Package State


In addition to the preceding restrictions, a user-defined function must also meet the
following requirements to be called from a SQL statement.


         The function has to be stored in the database, either stand-alone or as part of a
          package.
         The function can take only in parametes.

       The formal parameters must use only database types, not PL/SQL types such as
          boolean or record.
         The return type of the function must also be a database type.
         The function must not end the current transaction with commit or rollback, or
          rollback to a savepoint prior to the function execution.
         It also must not issue any alter session or alter system commands.


RESTRICT_REFERENCES


For packaged functions, however, the RESTRICT_REFERENCES pragma is required to specify
the purity level of a given function.


Syntax:
          PRAGMA RESTRICT_REFERENCES(subprogram_name            or package_name, WNDS [,WNPS]
                                            [,RNDS] [,RNPS]);

Ex:
                 CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS

                       function fun1 return varchar;
                       pragma restrict_references(fun1,wnds);
                       function fun2 return varchar;
                       pragma restrict_references(fun2,wnds);
                 END PKG;



                 CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                       FUNCTION FUN1   return varchar IS




© Copy rights are reserved.
213

                     BEGIN

                          update dept set deptno = 11;
                          return 'hello';
                     END FUN1;

                      FUNCTION FUN2   return varchar IS
                      BEGIN

                          update dept set dname ='aa';
                          return 'hello';
                    END FUN2;
              END PKG;



The above package body will not created, it will give the following erros.


      PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN1' violates its associated pragma
      PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN2' violates its associated pragma


              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                     FUNCTION FUN1    return varchar IS
                     BEGIN

                          return 'hello';
                     END FUN1;

                      FUNCTION FUN2   return varchar IS
                      BEGIN

                          return 'hello';
                    END FUN2;
              END PKG;


Now the package body will be created.


DEFAULT


If there is no RESTRICT_REFERENCES pragma associated with a given packaged function, it
will not have any purity level asserted. However, you can change the default purity level
for a package. The DEFAULT keyword is used instead of the subprogram name in the
pragma.


Ex:
              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS




© Copy rights are reserved.
214

                     pragma restrict_references(default,wnds);
                     function fun1 return varchar;
                     function fun2 return varchar;
              END PKG;



              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                     FUNCTION FUN1    return varchar IS
                     BEGIN

                          update dept set deptno = 11;
                          return 'hello';
                     END FUN1;

                      FUNCTION FUN2   return varchar IS
                      BEGIN

                          update dept set dname ='aa';
                          return 'hello';
                    END FUN2;
              END PKG;



The above package body will not created, it will give the following erros because the
pragma will apply to all the functions.


    PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN1' violates its associated pragma
    PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN2' violates its associated pragma


              CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                     FUNCTION FUN1    return varchar IS
                     BEGIN

                          return 'hello';
                     END FUN1;

                      FUNCTION FUN2   return varchar IS
                      BEGIN

                          return 'hello';
                    END FUN2;
              END PKG;


Now the package body will be created.




© Copy rights are reserved.
215


TRUST



If the TRUST keyword is present, the restrictions listed in the pragma are not enforced.
Rather, they are trusted to be true.


Ex:
                CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS

                          function fun1 return varchar;
                          pragma restrict_references(fun1,wnds,trust);
                          function fun2 return varchar;
                          pragma restrict_references(fun2,wnds,trust);
                END PKG;



                CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS

                          FUNCTION FUN1   return varchar IS
                          BEGIN

                             update dept set deptno = 11;
                              return 'hello';
                          END FUN1;

                          FUNCTION FUN2   return varchar IS
                          BEGIN

                              update dept set dname ='aa';
                              return 'hello';
                         END FUN2;
                END PKG;



The above package will be created successfully.


IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT RESTRICT_REFERENCES



         This pragma can appear anywhere in the package specification, after the function
          declaration.
         It can apply to only one function definition.
         For overload functions, the pragma applies to the nearest definition prior to the
          Pragma.
         This pragma is required only for packages functions not for stand-alone functions.




© Copy rights are reserved.
216


    The Pragma can be declared only inside the package specification.
      The pragma is checked at compile time, not runtime.

    It is possible to specify without any purity levels when trust or combination of
       default and trust keywords are present.


PINNING IN THE SHARED POOL


The shared pool is the portion of the SGS that contains, among other things, the p-code of
compiled subprograms as they are run. The first time a stored a store subprogram is
called, the p-code is loaded from disk into the shared pool. Once the object is no longer
referenced, it is free to be aged out. Objects are aged out of the shared pool using an
LRU(Least   Recently Used) algorithm.


The DBMS_SHARED_POOL package allows you to pin objects in the shared pool. When an
object is pinned, it will never be aged out until you request it, no matter how full the pool
gets or how often the object is accessed. This can improve performance, as it takes time
to reload a package from disk.


DBMS_SHARED_POOL        has four procedures


               KEEP
               UNKEEP
               SIZES
               ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD



KEEP



The DBMS_SHARED_POOL.KEEP procedure is used to pin objects in the pool.


Syntax:
       PROCEDURE KEEP(object_name       varchar2,flag char default ‘P’);


Here the flag represents different types of flag values for different types of objects.


       P        --      Package, function or procedure
       Q        --      Sequence



© Copy rights are reserved.
217

         R     --     Trigger
         C     --     SQL Cursor
         T     --     Object type
         JS    --     Java source
         JC    --     Java class
         JR    --     Java resource
         JD    --     Java shared data


UNKEEP



UNKEEP   is the only way to remove a kept object from the shared pool, without restarting
the database. Kept objects are never aged out automatically.


Syntax:
         PROCEDURE UNKEEP(object_name    varchar2, flag char default ‘P’);


SIZES



SIZES   will echo the contents of the shared pool to the screen.


Syntax:
         PROCEDURE SIZES(minsize   number);
Objects with greater than the minsize will be returned. SIZES uses DBMS_OUTPUT to return
the data.


ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD



When the database determines that there is not enough memory in the shared pool to
satisfy a given request, it will begin aging objects out until there is enough memory. It
enough objects are aged out, this can have a performance impact on other database
sessions. The ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD can be used to remedy this.


Syntax:
         PROCEDURE ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD(threshold_size     number);




© Copy rights are reserved.
218

Once this procedure is called, oracle will not start aging objects from the pool unless at
least threshold_size bytes is needed.
DATA MODEL FOR SUBPROGRAMS AND PACKAGES


             USER_OBJECTS
             USER_SOURCE
             USER_ERRORS
             DBA_OBJECTS
             DBA_SOURCE
             DBA_ERRORS
             ALL_OBJECTS
             ALL_SOURCE
             ALL_ERRORS




© Copy rights are reserved.
219




                                                                           CURSORS


Cursor is a pointer to memory location which is called as context area which contains the
information necessary for processing, including the number of rows processed by the
statement, a pointer to the parsed representation of the statement, and the active set
which is the set of rows returned by the query.


Cursor contains two parts


          Header
          Body


Header includes cursor name, any parameters and the type of data being loaded.
Body includes the select statement.


Ex:
      Cursor c(dno in number) return dept%rowtype is select *from dept;
      In the above
         Header – cursor c(dno in number) return dept%rowtype
         Body – select *from dept


CURSOR TYPES


                     Implicit (SQL)

                   Explicit
                          Parameterized cursors
                          REF cursors


CURSOR STAGES


                     Open
                     Fetch


© Copy rights are reserved.
220

                      Close




CURSOR ATTRIBUTES


                      %found
                      %notfound
                      %rowcount
                      %isopen
                      %bulk_rowcount
                      %bulk_exceptions


CURSOR DECLERATION


Syntax:
   Cursor <cursor_name> is select statement;


Ex:
   Cursor c is select *from dept;


CURSOR LOOPS


                      Simple loop
                      While loop
                      For loop


SIMPLE LOOP



Syntax:
       Loop
            Fetch <cursor_name> into <record_variable>;
            Exit when <cursor_name> % notfound;
              <statements>;
       End loop;




© Copy rights are reserved.
221

Ex:
       DECLARE

          cursor c is select * from student;
          v_stud student%rowtype;
       BEGIN

          open c;
          loop
              fetch c into v_stud;
              exit when c%notfound;
              dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name);
          end loop;
          close c;
       END;



Output:
       Name = saketh
       Name = srinu
       Name = satish
       Name = sudha


WHILE LOOP



Syntax:
       While <cursor_name> % found loop
              Fetch <cursor_name> nto <record_variable>;
              <statements>;
       End loop;


Ex:
       DECLARE

          cursor c is select * from student;
          v_stud student%rowtype;
       BEGIN

          open c;
          fetch c into v_stud;
          while c%found loop
               fetch c into v_stud;



© Copy rights are reserved.
222

               dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name);
           end loop;
           close c;
       END;

Output:


       Name = saketh
       Name = srinu
       Name = satish
       Name = sudha


FOR LOOP



Syntax:
       for <record_variable> in <cursor_name> loop
              <statements>;
       End loop;


Ex:
       DECLARE

           cursor c is select * from student;
       BEGIN

           for v_stud in c loop
               dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name);
           end loop;
       END;


Output:


       Name = saketh
       Name = srinu
       Name = satish
       Name = sudha


PARAMETARIZED CURSORS




© Copy rights are reserved.
223

         This was used when you are going to use the cursor in more than one place with
          different values for the same where clause.

       Cursor parameters must be in mode.
         Cursor parameters may have default values.
         The scope of cursor parameter is within the select statement.


Ex:
   DECLARE

          cursor c(dno in number) is select * from dept where deptno = dno;
          v_dept dept%rowtype;
   BEGIN

          open c(20);
          loop
            fetch c into v_dept;
            exit when c%notfound;
           dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || v_dept.dname || ' Loc = ' || v_dept.loc);
          end loop;
          close c;
  END;


Output:


   Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS


PACKAGED CURSORS WITH HEADER IN SPEC AND BODY IN PACKAGE BODY


         cursors declared in packages will not close automatically.
         In packaged cursors you can modify the select statement without making any
          changes to the cursor header in the package specification.

       Packaged cursors with must be defined in the package body itself, and then use it
          as global for the package.
         You can not define the packaged cursor in any subprograms.
         Cursor declaration in package with out body needs the return clause.


Ex1:
                 CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS




© Copy rights are reserved.
224

                  cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept;
                  procedure proc is
              END PKG;



              CREATE OR REPLACE PAKCAGE BODY PKG IS

                  cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept;
              PROCEDURE PROC IS
              BEGIN

                  for v in c loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v.deptno || ' Dname = ' ||
                                                      v.dname || ' Loc = ' || v.loc);
                  end loop;
              END PROC;
              END PKG;


Output:
              SQL>   exec pkg.proc
                     Deptno = 10 Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK
                     Deptno = 20 Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS
                     Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO
                     Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON


Ex2:
              CREATE OR REPLACE PAKCAGE BODY PKG IS

                  cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept where deptno > 20;
              PROCEDURE PROC IS
              BEGIN

                  for v in c loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v.deptno || ' Dname = ' ||
                                         v.dname || ' Loc = ' || v.loc);
                  end loop;
              END PROC;
              END PKG;



Output:


              SQL>   exec pkg.proc
                     Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO



© Copy rights are reserved.
225

                        Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON




REF CURSORS AND CURSOR VARIABLES


       This is unconstrained cursor which will return different types depends upon the
          user input.
         Ref cursors can not be closed implicitly.

       Ref cursor with return type is called strong cursor.
       Ref cursor with out return type is called weak cursor.
         You can declare ref cursor type in package spec as well as body.
         You can declare ref cursor types in local subprograms or anonymous blocks.
         Cursor variables can be assigned from one to another.

       You can declare a cursor variable in one scope and assign another cursor variable
          with different scope, then you can use the cursor variable even though the
          assigned cursor variable goes out of scope.
         Cursor variables can be passed as a parameters to the subprograms.
         Cursor variables modes are in or out or in out.
         Cursor variables can not be declared in package spec and package body (excluding
          subprograms).
         You can not user remote procedure calls to pass cursor variables from one server to
          another.
         Cursor variables can not use for update clause.
         You can not assign nulls to cursor variables.
         You can not compare cursor variables for equality, inequality and nullity.


Ex:
          CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE REF_CURSOR(TABLE_NAME IN VARCHAR) IS

             type t is ref cursor;
            c t;
             v_dept dept%rowtype;
             type r is record(ename emp.ename%type,job emp.job%type,sal emp.sal%type);
             v_emp r;
             v_stud student.name%type;


© Copy rights are reserved.
226

      BEGIN

          if table_name = 'DEPT' then
            open c for select * from dept;
          elsif table_name = 'EMP' then
            open c for select ename,job,sal from emp;
          elsif table_name = 'STUDENT' then
            open c for select name from student;
          end if;
          loop
            if table_name = 'DEPT' then
              fetch c into v_dept;
              exit when c%notfound;
              dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v_dept.deptno || ' Dname = ' ||
                                         v_dept.dname    || ' Loc = ' || v_dept.loc);
            elsif table_name = 'EMP' then
               fetch c into v_emp;
               exit when c%notfound;
              dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_emp.ename || ' Job = ' || v_emp.job
                                        || ' Sal = ' || v_emp.sal);
            elsif table_name = 'STUDENT' then
                 fetch c into v_stud;
                 exit when c%notfound;
                 dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud);
            end if;
          end loop;
          close c;
     END;



Output:
            SQL>   exec ref_cursor('DEPT')


              Deptno = 10 Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK
              Deptno = 20 Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS
              Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO
              Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON




© Copy rights are reserved.
227

          SQL>   exec ref_cursor('EMP')


               Ename = SMITH Job = CLERK Sal = 800
               Ename = ALLEN Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1600
               Ename = WARD Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1250
               Ename = JONES Job = MANAGER Sal = 2975
               Ename = MARTIN Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1250
               Ename = BLAKE Job = MANAGER Sal = 2850
               Ename = CLARK Job = MANAGER Sal = 2450
               Ename = SCOTT Job = ANALYST Sal = 3000
               Ename = KING Job = PRESIDENT Sal = 5000
               Ename = TURNER Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1500
               Ename = ADAMS Job = CLERK Sal = 1100
               Ename = JAMES Job = CLERK Sal = 950
               Ename = FORD Job = ANALYST Sal = 3000
               Ename = MILLER Job = CLERK Sal = 1300


       SQL>   exec ref_cursor('STUDENT')


               Name = saketh
               Name = srinu
               Name = satish
               Name = sudha


CURSOR EXPRESSIONS


      You can use cursor expressions in explicit cursors.
      You can use cursor expressions in dynamic SQL.
      You can use cursor expressions in REF cursor declarations and variables.
      You can not use cursor expressions in implicit cursors.
      Oracle opens the nested cursor defined by a cursor expression implicitly as soon as
       it fetches the data containing the cursor expression from the parent or outer
       cursor.
      Nested cursor closes if you close explicitly.




© Copy rights are reserved.
228

         Nested cursor closes whenever the outer or parent cursor is executed again or
          closed or canceled.
         Nested cursor closes whenever an exception is raised while fetching data from a
          parent cursor.
         Cursor expressions can not be used when declaring a view.
         Cursor expressions can be used as an argument to table function.
         You can not perform bind and execute operations on cursor expressions when
          using the cursor expressions in dynamic SQL.


USING NESTED CURSORS OR CURSOR EXPRESSIONS



Ex:
      DECLARE

          cursor c is select ename,cursor(select dname from dept d where e.empno =
          d.deptno) from emp e;
          type t is ref cursor;
          c1 t;
          c2 t;
          v1 emp.ename%type;
          v2 dept.dname%type;
      BEGIN

          open c;
          loop
              fetch c1 into v1;
              exit when c1%notfound;
              fetch c2 into v2;
              exit when c2%notfound;
              dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v1 || ' Dname = ' || v2);
          end loop;
          end loop;
          close c;
      END;



CURSOR CLAUSES


                         Return



© Copy rights are reserved.
229

                     For update
                     Where current of
                     Bulk collect




RETURN



     Cursor c return dept%rowtype is select *from dept;
                      Or
     Cursor c1 is select *from dept;
     Cursor c return c1%rowtype is select *from dept;
                      Or
     Type t is record(deptno dept.deptno%type, dname dept.dname%type);
     Cursor c return t is select deptno, dname from dept;


FOR UPDATE AND WHERE CURRENT OF



Normally, a select operation will not take any locks on the rows being accessed. This will
allow other sessions connected to the database to change the data being selected. The
result set is still consistent. At open time, when the active set is determined, oracle takes
a snapshot of the table. Any changes that have been committed prior to this point are
reflected in the active set. Any changes made after this point, even if they are committed,
are not reflected unless the cursor is reopened, which will evaluate the active set again.


However, if the FOR UPDATE caluse is pesent, exclusive row locks are taken on the rows in
the active set before the open returns. These locks prevent other sessions from changing
the rows in the active set until the transaction is committed or rolled back. If another
session already has locks on the rows in the active set, then SELECT … FOR UPDATE operation
will wait for these locks to be released by the other session. There is no time-out for this
waiting period. The SELECT…FOR UPDATE will hang until the other session releases the lock.
To handle this situation, the NOWAIT clause is available.


Syntax:
     Select …from … for update of column_name [wait n];




© Copy rights are reserved.
230



          If the cursor is declared with the FOR UPDATE clause, the WHERE CURRENT OF clause can
          be used in an update or delete statement.


Syntax:
          Where current of cursor;


Ex:
                 DECLARE

                        cursor c is select * from dept for update of dname;
                 BEGIN

                        for v in c loop
                            update dept set dname = 'aa' where current of c;
                            commit;
                        end loop;
                 END;



BULK COLLECT



          This is used for array fetches
          With this you can retrieve multiple rows of data with a single roundtrip.
          This reduces the number of context switches between the pl/sql and sql engines.
          Reduces the overhead of retrieving data.
          You can use bulk collect in both dynamic and static sql.
          You can use bulk collect in select, fetch into and returning into clauses.
          SQL engine automatically initializes and extends the collections you reference in
           the bulk collect clause.
          Bulk collect operation empties the collection referenced in the into clause before
           executing the query.
          You can use the limit clause of bulk collect to restrict the no of rows retrieved.
          You can fetch into multible collections with one column each.

       Using the returning clause we can return data to the another collection.


BULK COLLECT IN FETCH



Ex:



© Copy rights are reserved.
231

              DECLARE

                  Type t is table of dept%rowtype;
                  nt t;
                  Cursor c is select *from dept;
              BEGIN

                  Open c;
                  Fetch c bulk collect into nt;
                  Close c;
                  For i in nt.first..nt.last loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' ||
                                                    nt(i).loc);
                  end loop;
              END;



Output:
              Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK
              Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS
              Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO
              Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON


BULK COLLECT IN SELECT



Ex:
              DECLARE

                  Type t is table of dept%rowtype;
                  Nt t;
              BEGIN

                  Select * bulk collect into nt from dept;
                  for i in nt.first..nt.last loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' ||
                                                        nt(i).loc);
                  end loop;
              END;



Output:
              Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK
              Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS



© Copy rights are reserved.
232

              Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO
              Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON


LIMIT IN BULK COLLECT



You can use this to limit the number of rows to be fetched.




Ex:
              DECLARE

                  Type t is table of dept%rowtype;
                  nt t;
                  Cursor c is select *from dept;
              BEGIN

                  Open c;
                  Fetch c bulk collect into nt limit 2;
                  Close c;
                  For i in nt.first..nt.last loop
                                dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' ||
       nt(i).loc);
                  end loop;
              END;



Output:
              Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK
              Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS


MULTIPLE FETCHES IN INTO CLAUSE



Ex1:
                  DECLARE

                        Type t is table of dept.dname%type;
                        nt t;
                        Type t1 is table of dept.loc%type;
                        nt1 t;
                        Cursor c is select dname,loc from dept;
                 BEGIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
233

                      Open c;
                      Fetch c bulk collect into nt,nt1;
                      Close c;
                      For i in nt.first..nt.last loop
                              dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i));
                      end loop;
                      For i in nt1.first..nt1.last loop
                              dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || nt1(i));
                      end loop;
                 END;



Output:
              Dname = ACCOUNTING
              Dname = RESEARCH
              Dname = SALES
              Dname = OPERATIONS
              Loc = NEW YORK
              Loc = DALLAS
              Loc = CHICAGO
              Loc = BOSTON


Ex2:
              DECLARE

                  type t is table of dept.dname%type;
                  type t1 is table of dept.loc%type;
                  nt t;
                  nt1 t1;
              BEGIN

                  Select dname,loc bulk collect into nt,nt1 from dept;
                  for i in nt.first..nt.last loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i));
                  end loop;
                  for i in nt1.first..nt1.last loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || nt1(i));
                  end loop;
              END;




© Copy rights are reserved.
234



Output:
              Dname = ACCOUNTING
              Dname = RESEARCH
              Dname = SALES
              Dname = OPERATIONS
              Loc = NEW YORK
              Loc = DALLAS
              Loc = CHICAGO
              Loc = BOSTON


RETURNING CLAUSE IN BULK COLLECT


You can use this to return the processed data to the ouput variables or typed variables.


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     type t is table of number(2);
                     nt t := t(1,2,3,4);
                     type t1 is table of varchar(2);
                     nt1 t1;
                     type t2 is table of student%rowtype;
                     nt2 t2;
              BEGIN

                     select name bulk collect into nt1 from student;
                     forall v in nt1.first..nt1.last
                               update student set no = nt(v) where name = nt1(v) returning
                                     no,name,marks bulk collect into nt2;
                     for v in nt2.first..nt2.last loop
                          dbms_output.put_line('Marks = ' || nt2(v));
                     end loop;
              END;



Output:
              Marks = 100
              Marks = 200




© Copy rights are reserved.
235

              Marks = 300
              Marks = 400


POINTS TO REMEMBER


    Cursor name can be up to 30 characters in length.
    Cursors declared in anonymous blocks or subprograms closes automatically when
       that block terminates execution.
      %bulk_rowcount and %bulk_exceptions can be used only with forall construct.
      Cursor declarations may have expressions with column aliases.
      These expressions are called virtual columns or calculated columns.




© Copy rights are reserved.
236




                                                                     SQL IN PL/SQL


The only statements allowed directly in pl/sql are DML and TCL.


BINDING


Binding a variable is the process of identifying the storage location associated with an
identifier in the program.


Types of binding


              Early binding
              Late binding


    Binding during the compiled phase is early binding.
    Binding during the runtime phase is late binding.
    In early binding compile phase will take longer because of binding work but the
     execution is faster.
    In late binding it will shorten the compile phase but lengthens the execution time.

    PL/SQL   by default uses early binding.

    Binding also involves checking the database for permissions to access the object
     Referenced.


 DYNAMIC SQL




© Copy rights are reserved.
237


        If you use      DDL   in pl/sql it validates the permissions and existence if requires
            during compile time which makes invalid.

        We can avoid this by using Dynamic SQL.
           Dynamic SQL allows you to create a SQL statement dynamically at runtime.


       Two techniques are available for Dynamic SQL.


                  Native Dynamic SQL
                  DBMS_SQL package


 USING NATIVE DYNAMIC SQL


 USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE



 Ex:
           BEGIN

              Execute immediate ‘create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))’;
                                                 or
              Execute immediate (‘create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))’);
           END;



 USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE WITH PL/SQL VARIABLES



 Ex:
           DECLARE

              v varchar(100);
           BEGIN

              v := 'create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))';
              execute immediate v;
           END;



 USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE WITH BIND VARIABLES AND USING CLAUSE



 Ex:
           DECLARE

              v varchar(100);
           BEGIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
238

           v := 'insert into student values(:v1,:v2,:v3)';
           execute immediate v using 6,'f',600;
       END;



 EXECUTING QUERIES WITH OPEN FOR AND USING CLAUSE



 Ex:
       CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P(smarks   in number) IS
           s varchar(100) := 'select *from student where marks > :m';
           type t is ref cursor;
           c t;
           v student%rowtype;
       BEGIN

           open c for s using smarks;
           loop
               fetch c into v;
               exit when c%notfound;
               dbms_output.put_line('Student Marks = ' || v.marks);
           end loop;
           close c;
       END;



Output:
       SQL>   exec p(100)


              Student Marks = 200
              Student Marks = 300
              Student Marks = 400


QUERIES WITH EXECUTE IMMEDIATE



Ex:
          DECLARE

              d_name dept.dname%type;
              lc dept.loc%type;
              v varchar(100);
          BEGIN



© Copy rights are reserved.
239

              v := 'select dname from dept where deptno = 10';
              execute immediate v into d_name;
              dbms_output.put_line('Dname = '|| d_name);
              v := 'select loc from dept where dname = :dn';
              execute immediate v into lc using d_name;
              dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || lc);
          END;



Output:
       Dname = ACCOUNTING
       Loc = NEW YORK
 VARIABLE NAMES



 Ex:
       DECLARE

           Marks number(3) := 100;
       BEGIN

           Delete student where marks = marks;        -- this will delete all the rows in the
                                                      -- student table
       END;



 This can be avoided by using the labeled blocks.


       <<my_block>>
       DECLARE

           Marks number(3) := 100;
       BEGIN

           Delete student where marks = my_block.marks;         -- delete rows which has
                                                                -- a marks of 100
       END;



 GETTING DATA INTO PL/SQL VARIABLES



 Ex:
       DECLARE

           V1 number;
           V2 varchar(2);
       BEGIN



© Copy rights are reserved.
240

          Select no,name into v1,v2 from student where marks = 100;
       END;



 DML AND RECORDS



 Ex:
       CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P(srow    in student%rowtype) IS
       BEGIN

       insert into student values srow;
       END P;



       DECLARE

          s student%rowtype;
       BEGIN

          s.no := 11;
          s.name := 'aa';
          s.marks := 100;
          p(s);
       END;



 RECORD BASED INSERTS



 Ex:
       DECLARE

          srow student%rowtype;
       BEGIN

          srow.no := 7;
          srow.name := 'cc';
          srow.marks := 500;
          insert into student values srow;
       END;



 RECORD BASED UPDATES


 Ex:
       DECLARE

           srow student%rowtype;
       BEGIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
241

           srow.no := 6;
           srow.name := 'cc';
           srow.marks := 500;
           update student set row=srow where no = srow.no;
        END;



 USING RECORDS WITH RETURNING CLAUSE



 Ex:
        DECLARE

           srow student%rowtype;
           sreturn student%rowtype;
        BEGIN

           srow.no := 8;
           srow.name := 'dd';
           srow.marks := 500;
           insert into student values srow returning no,name,marks into sreturn;
           dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.no);
           dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.name);
           dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.marks);
        END;



 Output:
                No = 8
                No = dd
                No = 500


 USING DBMS_SQL PACKAGE


 DBMS_SQL is used to execute dynamic SQL from with in PL/SQL. Unlike native dynamic
 SQL, it is not built directly into the language, and thus is less efficient. The DBMS_SQL
 package allows you to directly control the processing of a statement within a cursor,
 with operations such as opening and closing a cursor, parsing a statement, binding
 input variable, and defining output variables.


 Ex1:




© Copy rights are reserved.
242

        DECLARE

            cursor_id number;
            flag number;
            v_stmt varchar(50);
        BEGIN

            cursor_id := dbms_sql.open_cursor;
            v_stmt := 'create table stud(sno number(2),sname varchar(10))';
            dbms_sql.parse(cursor_id,v_stmt,dbms_sql.native);
            flag := dbms_sql.execute(cursor_id);
            dbms_sql.close_cursor(cursor_id);
            dbms_output.put_line('Table created');
        END;



 Output:


        Table created


        SQL> desc stud
         Name                                               Null?    Type
         ----------------------------------------------------------------- -------- --------
         SNO                                                        NUMBER(2)
         SNAME                                                      VARCHAR2(10)


 Ex2:


 CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE DBMS_SQL_PROC(v1           student.no%type,
                                                 v2 student.marks%type) is
        cursor_id number;
        flag number;
        v_update varchar(50);
 BEGIN

        cursor_id := dbms_sql.open_cursor;
        v_update := 'update student set marks = :smarks where no = :sno';
        dbms_sql.parse(cursor_id,v_update,dbms_sql.native);
        dbms_sql.bind_variable(cursor_id,':sno',v1);
        dbms_sql.bind_variable(cursor_id,':smarks',v2);



© Copy rights are reserved.
243

        flag := dbms_sql.execute(cursor_id);
        dbms_sql.close_cursor(cursor_id);
 END DBMS_SQL_PROC;



 Output:


 SQL>   select * from student;       -- before execution


        NO       NA    MARKS
        ---- ------ -- ----------
        1    a        100
        2    b        200
        3    c        300


 SQL>   exec dbms_sql_proc(2,222)


 SQL>   select * from student;       -- after execution


        NO       NA    MARKS
        ---- ------ -- ----------
        1    a        100
        2    b        222
        3    c        300


 FORALL STATEMENT


 This can be used to get the data from the database at once by reducting the number of
 context switches which is a transfer of control between PL/SQL and SQL engine.


 Syntax:
        Forall index_var in
                 [ Lower_bound..upper_bound |
                  Indices of indexing_collection |
                  Values of indexing_collection ]
        SQL statement;




© Copy rights are reserved.
244

 FORALL WITH NON-SEQUENTIAL ARRAYS



 Ex:
       DECLARE

          type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer;
          ibt t;
       BEGIN

          ibt(1) := 1;
          ibt(10) := 2;
          forall i in ibt.first..ibt.last
                    update student set marks = 900 where no = ibt(i);
       END;



 The above program will give error like ‘element at index [2] does not exists.
 You can rectify it in one of the two following ways.


 USGAGE OF INDICES OF TO AVOID THE ABOVE BEHAVIOUR


 This will be used when you have a collection whose defined rows specify which rows in
 the binding array you would like to processed.


 Ex:
       DECLARE

           type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer;
           ibt t;
           type t1 is table of boolean index by binary_integer;
           ibt1 t1;
       BEGIN

           ibt(1) := 1;
           ibt(10) := 2;
           ibt(100) := 3;
           ibt1(1) := true;
           ibt1(10) := true;
           ibt1(100) := true;
           forall i in indices of ibt1
                     update student set marks = 900 where no = ibt(i);
       END;




© Copy rights are reserved.
245

 Ouput:


       SQL>   select * from student -- before execution


              NO    NA    MARKS
            ---------- ------------
              1     a     100
              2     b     200
              3     c     300
       SQL>   select * from student -- after execution


              NO    NA    MARKS
            ---------- ------------
              1     a     900
              2     b     900
              3     c     900


 USGAGE OF VALUES OF TO AVOID THE ABOVE BEHAVIOUR


 This will be used when you have a collection of integers whose content identifies the
 position in the binding array that you want to be processed by the FORALL statement.


 Ex:
        DECLARE

           type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer;
           ibt t;
           type t1 is table of pls_integer index by binary_integer;
           ibt1 t1;
       BEGIN

           ibt(1) := 1;
           ibt(10) := 2;
           ibt(100) := 3;
           ibt1(11) := 1;
           ibt1(15) := 10;
           ibt1(18) := 100;
           forall i in values of ibt1
                    update student set marks = 567 where no = ibt(i);


© Copy rights are reserved.
246

         END;


 Ouput:


         SQL>   select * from student -- before execution


                NO    NA    MARKS
                ---------- ------------
                 1   a       100
                 2   b       200
                 3   c       300


         SQL>   select * from student -- after execution


                NO    NA    MARKS
                ---------- ------------
                 1   a       900
                 2   b       900
                 3   c       900


POINTS ABOUT BULK BINDS


      Passing the entire           PL/SQL   table to the SQL engine in one step is known as bulk
          bind.
         Bulk binds are done using the forall statement.
         If there is an error processing one of the rows in bulk DML operation, only that
          row is rolled back.


POINTS ABOUT RETURING CLAUSE


    This will be used only with DML statements to return data into PL/SQL variables.
    This will be useful in situations like , when performing insert or update or delete if
         you want to know the data of the table which has been effected by the DML.

    With out going for another              SELECT   using RETURNING clause we will get the data which
         will avoid a call to RDBMS kernel.




© Copy rights are reserved.
247




                                                                        COLLECTIONS

Collections are also composite types, in that they allow you to treat several variables as a
unit. A collection combines variables of the same type.


TYPES
               Varrays
               Nested tables

            Index - by tables (Associate arrays)


VARRAYS


A varray is datatype very similar to an array. A varray has a fixed limit on its size,
specified as part of the declaration. Elements are inserted into varray starting at index 1,
up to maximum lenth declared in the varray type. The maximum size of the varray is 2
giga bytes.


Syntax:
        Type <type_name> is varray | varying array (<limit>) of <element_type>;


Ex1:
        DECLARE

           type t is varray(10) of varchar(2);
           va t := t('a','b','c','d');
           flag boolean;
        BEGIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
248

           dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || va.limit);
           dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || va.count);
           dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || va.first);
           dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || va.last);
           dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || va.next(2));
           dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || va.prior(3));
           dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
           for i in va.first..va.last loop
               dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i));
           end loop;
           flag := va.exists(3);
           if flag = true then
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists with an element ' || va(3));
           else
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 does not exists');
           end if;
           va.extend;
           dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || va.count);
           flag := va.exists(5);
           if flag = true then
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 exists with an element ' || va(5));
           else
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 does not exists');
           end if;
           flag := va.exists(6);
           if flag = true then
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 exists with an element ' || va(6));
           else
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 does not exists');
           end if;
           va.extend(2);
           dbms_output.put_line('After extend of two indexes, Count = ' || va.count);
           dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
           for i in va.first..va.last loop
               dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i));




© Copy rights are reserved.
249

           end loop;
           va(5) := 'e';
           va(6) := 'f';
           va(7) := 'g';
           dbms_output.put_line('AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS,
                                               VARRAY ELEMENTS');

           for i in va.first..va.last loop
               dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i));
           end loop;
           va.extend(3,2);
           dbms_output.put_line('After extend of three indexes, Count = ' || va.count);
           dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
           for i in va.first..va.last loop
               dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i));
           end loop;
           va.trim;
           dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || va.count);
           va.trim(3);
           dbms_output.put_line('After trim of three indexs, Count = ' || va.count);
           dbms_output.put_line('AFTER TRIM, VARRAY ELEMENTS');
           for i in va.first..va.last loop
               dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i));
           end loop;
           va.delete;
           dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire varray, Count = ' || va.count);
       END;



Output:
              Limit = 10
              Count = 4
              First Index = 1
              Last Index = 4
              Next Index = 3
              Previous Index = 2
              VARRAY ELEMENTS
              va[1] = a


© Copy rights are reserved.
250

              va[2] = b
              va[3] = c
              va[4] = d
              Index 3 exists with an element c
              After extend of one index, Count = 5
              Index 5 exists with an element
              Index 6 does not exists
              After extend of two indexes, Count = 7
              VARRAY ELEMENTS
              va[1] = a
              va[2] = b
              va[3] = c
              va[4] = d
              va[5] =
              va[6] =
              va[7] =
              AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, VARRAY ELEMENTS
              va[1] = a
              va[2] = b
              va[3] = c
              va[4] = d
              va[5] = e
              va[6] = f
              va[7] = g
              After extend of three indexes, Count = 10
              VARRAY ELEMENTS
              va[1] = a
              va[2] = b
              va[3] = c
              va[4] = d
              va[5] = e
              va[6] = f
              va[7] = g
              va[8] = b
              va[9] = b




© Copy rights are reserved.
251

                va[10] = b
                After trim of one index, Count = 9
                After trim of three indexs, Count = 6
                AFTER TRIM, VARRAY ELEMENTS
                va[1] = a
                va[2] = b
                va[3] = c
                va[4] = d
                va[5] = e
                va[6] = f
                After delete of entire varray, Count = 0


Ex2:
       DECLARE

           type t is varray(4) of student%rowtype;
           va t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

           for i in 1..va.count loop
                 select * into va(i) from student where sno = i;
                 dbms_output.put_line('Sno = ' || va(i).sno || ' Sname = ' || va(i).sname);
           end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Sno = 1 Sname = saketh
                Sno = 2 Sname = srinu
                Sno = 3 Sname = divya
                Sno = 4 Sname = manogni


Ex3:
       DECLARE

              type t is varray(4) of student.smarks%type;
              va t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

              for i in 1..va.count loop
                  select smarks into va(i) from student where sno = i;




© Copy rights are reserved.
252

                  dbms_output.put_line('Smarks = ' || va(i));
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Smarks = 100
                Smarks = 200
                Smarks = 300
                Smarks = 400


Ex4:
       DECLARE

              type r is record(c1 student.sname%type,c2 student.smarks%type);
              type t is varray(4) of r;
              va t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

              for i in 1..va.count loop
                  select sname,smarks into va(i) from student where sno = i;
                  dbms_output.put_line('Sname = ' || va(i).c1 || ' Smarks = ' || va(i).c2);
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Sname = saketh Smarks = 100
                Sname = srinu Smarks = 200
                Sname = divya Smarks = 300
                Sname = manogni Smarks = 400


Ex5:
       DECLARE

              type t is varray(1) of addr;
              va t := t(null);
              cursor c is select * from employ;
              i number := 1;
       BEGIN

              for v in c loop
                  select address into va(i) from employ where ename = v.ename;


© Copy rights are reserved.
253

                  dbms_output.put_line('Hno = ' || va(i).hno || ' City = ' || va(i).city);
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Hno = 11 City = hyd
                Hno = 22 City = bang
                Hno = 33 City = kochi




Ex6:
       DECLARE

              type t is varray(5) of varchar(2);
              va1 t;
              va2 t := t();
       BEGIN

              if va1 is null then
                dbms_output.put_line('va1 is null');
              else
                dbms_output.put_line('va1 is not null');
              end if;
              if va2 is null then
                dbms_output.put_line('va2 is null');
              else
                dbms_output.put_line('va2 is not null');
              end if;
       END;



Output:
                va1 is null
                va2 is not null




NESTED TABLES




© Copy rights are reserved.
254

A nested table is thought of a database table which has no limit on its size. Elements are
inserted into nested table starting at index 1. The maximum size of the varray is 2 giga
bytes.


Syntax:
         Type <type_name> is table of <table_type>;


Ex1:
         DECLARE

             type t is table of varchar(2);
             nt t := t('a','b','c','d');
             flag boolean;
         BEGIN

             if nt.limit is null then
                 dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Nested Tables');
             else
                 dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || nt.limit);
             end if;
             dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count);
             dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || nt.first);
             dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || nt.last);
             dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || nt.next(2));
             dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || nt.prior(3));
             dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
             for i in 1..nt.count loop
                   dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
             end loop;
             flag := nt.exists(3);
             if flag = true then
                 dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists with an element ' || nt(3));
             else
                   dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 does not exists');
             end if;
             nt.extend;
             dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || nt.count);
             flag := nt.exists(5);



© Copy rights are reserved.
255

            if flag = true then
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 exists with an element ' || nt(5));
            else
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 does not exists');
            end if;
            flag := nt.exists(6);
            if flag = true then
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 exists with an element ' || nt(6));
            else
              dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 does not exists');
            end if;
            nt.extend(2);
            dbms_output.put_line('After extend of two indexes, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
               dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
            end loop;
            nt(5) := 'e';
            nt(6) := 'f';
            nt(7) := 'g';
            dbms_output.put_line('AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, NESTED
                                         TABLE ELEMENTS');

            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                   dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
            end loop;
            nt.extend(5,2);
            dbms_output.put_line('After extend of five indexes, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
            end loop;
            nt.trim;
            dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || nt.count);
            nt.trim(3);
            dbms_output.put_line('After trim of three indexs, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('AFTER TRIM, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');


© Copy rights are reserved.
256

              for i in 1..nt.count loop
                   dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
              end loop;
              nt.delete(1);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || nt.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
              for i in 2..nt.count+1 loop
                  dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
              end loop;
              nt.delete(4);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of fourth index, Count = ' || nt.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
              for i in 2..3 loop
                  dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
              end loop;
              for i in 5..nt.count+2 loop
                  dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i));
              end loop;
              nt.delete;
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire nested table, Count = ' ||
                                          nt.count);
       END;



Output:
                No limit to Nested Tables
                Count = 4
                First Index = 1
                Last Index = 4
                Next Index = 3
                Previous Index = 2
                NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
                nt[1] = a
                nt[2] = b
                nt[3] = c
                nt[4] = d
                Index 3 exists with an element c


© Copy rights are reserved.
257

              After extend of one index, Count = 5
              Index 5 exists with an element
              Index 6 does not exists
              After extend of two indexes, Count = 7
              NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
              nt[1] = a
              nt[2] = b
              nt[3] = c
              nt[4] = d
              nt[5] =
              nt[6] =
              nt[7] =
              AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, NESTED TABLE
              ELEMENTS
              nt[1] = a
              nt[2] = b
              nt[3] = c
              nt[4] = d
              nt[5] = e
              nt[6] = f
              nt[7] = g
              After extend of five indexes, Count = 12
              NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
              nt[1] = a
              nt[2] = b
              nt[3] = c
              nt[4] = d
              nt[5] = e
              nt[6] = f
              nt[7] = g
              nt[8] = b
              nt[9] = b
              nt[10] = b
              nt[11] = b
              nt[12] = b




© Copy rights are reserved.
258

               After trim of one index, Count = 11
               After trim of three indexs, Count = 8
               AFTER TRIM, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[1] = a
               nt[2] = b
               nt[3] = c
               nt[4] = d
               nt[5] = e
               nt[6] = f
               nt[7] = g
               nt[8] = b
               After delete of first index, Count = 7
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[2] = b
               nt[3] = c
               nt[4] = d
               nt[5] = e
               nt[6] = f
               nt[7] = g
               nt[8] = b
               After delete of fourth index, Count = 6
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[2] = b
               nt[3] = c
               nt[5] = e
               nt[6] = f
               nt[7] = g
               nt[8] = b
               After delete of entire nested table, Count = 0


Ex2:
       DECLARE

           type t is table of student%rowtype;
           nt t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

           for i in 1..nt.count loop



© Copy rights are reserved.
259

                 select * into nt(i) from student where sno = i;
                 dbms_output.put_line('Sno = ' || nt(i).sno || ' Sname = ' || nt(i).sname);
           end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Sno = 1 Sname = saketh
                Sno = 2 Sname = srinu
                Sno = 3 Sname = divya
                Sno = 4 Sname = manogni


Ex3:
       DECLARE

              type t is table of student.smarks%type;
              nt t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

              for i in 1..nt.count loop
                  select smarks into nt(i) from student where sno = i;
                  dbms_output.put_line('Smarks = ' || nt(i));
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Smarks = 100
                Smarks = 200
                Smarks = 300
                Smarks = 400


Ex4:
       DECLARE

              type r is record(c1 student.sname%type,c2 student.smarks%type);
              type t is table of r;
              nt t := t(null,null,null,null);
       BEGIN

              for i in 1..nt.count loop
                  select sname,smarks into nt(i) from student where sno = i;
                  dbms_output.put_line('Sname = ' || nt(i).c1 || ' Smarks = ' || nt(i).c2);


© Copy rights are reserved.
260

              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Sname = saketh Smarks = 100
                Sname = srinu Smarks = 200
                Sname = divya Smarks = 300
                Sname = manogni Smarks = 400




Ex5:
       DECLARE

              type t is table of addr;
              nt t := t(null);
              cursor c is select * from employ;
              i number := 1;
       BEGIN

              for v in c loop
                  select address into nt(i) from employ where ename = v.ename;
                  dbms_output.put_line('Hno = ' || nt(i).hno || ' City = ' || nt(i).city);
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
                Hno = 11 City = hyd
                Hno = 22 City = bang
                Hno = 33 City = kochi


Ex6:
       DECLARE

              type t is varray(5) of varchar(2);
              nt1 t;
              nt2 t := t();
       BEGIN

              if nt1 is null then
                dbms_output.put_line('nt1 is null');


© Copy rights are reserved.
261

              else
                dbms_output.put_line('nt1 is not null');
              end if;
              if nt2 is null then
                dbms_output.put_line('nt2 is null');
              else
                dbms_output.put_line('nt2 is not null');
              end if;
       END;




Output:
                nt1 is null
                nt2 is not null


SET OPERATIONS IN NESTED TABLES



You can perform set operations in the nested tables. You can also perform equality
comparisions between nested tables.


Possible operations are


               UNION
               UNION DISTINCT
               INTERSECT

               EXCEPT (   act like MINUS)


Ex:
       DECLARE

          type t is table of varchar(2);
          nt1 t := t('a','b','c');
          nt2 t := t('c','b','a');
          nt3 t := t('b','c','a','c');
          nt4 t := t('a','b','d');
          nt5 t;
       BEGIN

          nt5 := set(nt1);



© Copy rights are reserved.
262

          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := set(nt3);
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := nt1 multiset union nt4;
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := nt1 multiset union nt3;
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := nt1 multiset union distinct nt3;
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := nt1 multiset except nt4;
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
          nt5 := nt4 multiset except nt1;
          dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
          for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop
              dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i));
          end loop;
       END;




© Copy rights are reserved.
263

Output:


       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = a
       nt5[ 2 ] = b
       nt5[ 3 ] = c
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = b
       nt5[ 2 ] = c
       nt5[ 3 ] = a
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = a
       nt5[ 2 ] = b
       nt5[ 3 ] = c
       nt5[ 4 ] = a
       nt5[ 5 ] = b
       nt5[ 6 ] = d
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = a
       nt5[ 2 ] = b
       nt5[ 3 ] = c
       nt5[ 4 ] = b
       nt5[ 5 ] = c
       nt5[ 6 ] = a
       nt5[ 7 ] = c
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = a
       nt5[ 2 ] = b
       nt5[ 3 ] = c
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = c
       NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
       nt5[ 1 ] = d


INDEX-BY TABLES




© Copy rights are reserved.
264



An index-by table has no limit on its size. Elements are inserted into index-by table whose
index may start non-sequentially including negative integers.


Syntax:
       Type <type_name> is table of <table_type> index by binary_integer;


Ex:
       DECLARE

            type t is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer;
            ibt t;
            flag boolean;
       BEGIN

            ibt(1) := 'a';
            ibt(-20) := 'b';
            ibt(30) := 'c';
            ibt(100) := 'd';
            if ibt.limit is null then
               dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Index by Tables');
            else
               dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || ibt.limit);
            end if;
            dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || ibt.first);
            dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || ibt.last);
            dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || ibt.next(2));
            dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || ibt.prior(3));
            dbms_output.put_line('INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS');
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt[-20] = ' || ibt(-20));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt[1] = ' || ibt(1));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt[30] = ' || ibt(30));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt[100] = ' || ibt(100));
            flag := ibt.exists(30);
            if flag = true then
               dbms_output.put_line('Index 30 exists with an element ' || ibt(30));
            else



© Copy rights are reserved.
265

                dbms_output.put_line('Index 30 does not exists');
              end if;
              flag := ibt.exists(50);
              if flag = true then
                dbms_output.put_line('Index 50 exists with an element ' || ibt(30));
              else
                dbms_output.put_line('Index 50 does not exists');
              end if;
              ibt.delete(1);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || ibt.count);
              ibt.delete(30);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of index thirty, Count = ' || ibt.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS');
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt[-20] = ' || ibt(-20));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt[100] = ' || ibt(100));
              ibt.delete;
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire index-by table, Count = ' ||
                                           ibt.count);
       END;



Output:


                No limit to Index by Tables
                Count = 4
                First Index = -20
                Last Index = 100
                Next Index = 30
                Previous Index = 1
                INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS
                ibt[-20] = b
                ibt[1] = a
                ibt[30] = c
                ibt[100] = d
                Index 30 exists with an element c
                Index 50 does not exists
                After delete of first index, Count = 3


© Copy rights are reserved.
266

              After delete of index thirty, Count = 2
              INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS
              ibt[-20] = b
              ibt[100] = d
              After delete of entire index-by table, Count = 0


DIFFERENCES AMONG COLLECTIONS


    Varrays has limit, nested tables and index-by tables has no limit.
    Varrays and nested tables must be initialized before assignment of elements, in
       index-by tables we can directly assign elements.
      Varrays and nested tables stored in database, but index-by tables can not.

    Nested tables and index-by tables are PL/SQL tables, but varrays can not.
      Keys must be positive in case of nested tables and varrays, in case of index-by
       tables keys can be positive or negative.

    Referencing nonexistent elements raises        SUBSCRIPT_BEYOND_COUNT   in both nested
       tables and varrays, but in case of index-by tables NO_DATA_FOUND raises.
      Keys are sequential in both nested tables and varrays, non-sequential in index-by
       tables.

    Individual indexes can be deleted in both nested tables and index-by tables, but in
       varrays can not.

    Individual indexes can be trimmed in both nested tables and varrays, but in index-
       by tables can not.
      Individual indexes can be extended in both nested tables and varrays, but in index-
       by tables can not.


MULTILEVEL COLLECTIONS


Collections of more than one dimension which is a collection of collections, known as
multilevel collections.


Syntax:
       Type <type_name1> is table of <table_type> index by binary_integer;
       Type <type_name2> is varray(<limit>) | table | of <type_name1> | index by




© Copy rights are reserved.
267

                                    binary_integer;


Ex1:
       DECLARE

            type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer;
            type t2 is varray(5) of t1;
            va t2 := t2();
            c number := 97;
            flag boolean;
       BEGIN

            va.extend(4);
            dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || va.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || va.limit);
            for i in 1..va.count loop
                  for j in 1..va.count loop
                      va(i)(j) := chr(c);
                      c := c + 1;
                  end loop;
            end loop;
            dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..va.count loop
                  for j in 1..va.count loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j));
                  end loop;
            end loop;
            dbms_output.put_line('First index = ' || va.first);
            dbms_output.put_line('Last index = ' || va.last);
            dbms_output.put_line('Next index = ' || va.next(2));
            dbms_output.put_line('Previous index = ' || va.prior(3));
            flag := va.exists(2);
            if flag = true then
                 dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists');
            else
                 dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists');
            end if;
            va.extend;



© Copy rights are reserved.
268

              va(1)(5) := 'q';
              va(2)(5) := 'r';
              va(3)(5) := 's';
              va(4)(5) := 't';
              va(5)(1) := 'u';
              va(5)(2) := 'v';
              va(5)(3) := 'w';
              va(5)(4) := 'x';
              va(5)(5) := 'y';
              dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || va.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
              for i in 1..va.count loop
                 for j in 1..va.count loop
                     dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j));
                 end loop;
              end loop;
              va.trim;
              dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || va.count);
              va.trim(2);
              dbms_output.put_line('After trim of two indexes, Count = ' || va.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS');
              for i in 1..va.count loop
                 for j in 1..va.count loop
                     dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j));
                 end loop;
              end loop;
              va.delete;
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire varray, Count = ' || va.count);
       END;



Output:


               Count = 4
               Limit = 5
               VARRAY ELEMENTS
               va[1][1] = a


© Copy rights are reserved.
269

              va[1][2] = b
              va[1][3] = c
              va[1][4] = d
              va[2][1] = e
              va[2][2] = f
              va[2][3] = g
              va[2][4] = h
              va[3][1] = i
              va[3][2] = j
              va[3][3] = k
              va[3][4] = l
              va[4][1] = m
              va[4][2] = n
              va[4][3] = o
              va[4][4] = p
              First index = 1
              Last index = 4
              Next index = 3
              Previous index = 2
              Index 2 exists
              After extend of one index, Count = 5
              VARRAY ELEMENTS
              va[1][1] = a
              va[1][2] = b
              va[1][3] = c
              va[1][4] = d
              va[1][5] = q
              va[2][1] = e
              va[2][2] = f
              va[2][3] = g
              va[2][4] = h
              va[2][5] = r
              va[3][1] = i
              va[3][2] = j
              va[3][3] = k




© Copy rights are reserved.
270

               va[3][4] = l
               va[3][5] = s
               va[4][1] = m
               va[4][2] = n
               va[4][3] = o
               va[4][4] = p
               va[4][5] = t
               va[5][1] = u
               va[5][2] = v
               va[5][3] = w
               va[5][4] = x
               va[5][5] = y
               After trim of one index, Count = 4
               After trim of two indexes, Count = 2
               VARRAY ELEMENTS
               va[1][1] = a
               va[1][2] = b
               va[2][1] = e
               va[2][2] = f
               After delete of entire varray, Count = 0


Ex2:
       DECLARE

            type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer;
            type t2 is table of t1;
            nt t2 := t2();
            c number := 65;
            v number := 1;
            flag boolean;
       BEGIN

            nt.extend(4);
            dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count);
            if nt.limit is null then
                 dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Nested Tables');
            else
                 dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || nt.limit);



© Copy rights are reserved.
271

            end if;
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                      nt(i)(j) := chr(c);
                      c := c + 1;
                      if c = 91 then
                        c := 97;
                      end if;
                 end loop;
            end loop;
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                      dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j));
                 end loop;
            end loop;
            dbms_output.put_line('First index = ' || nt.first);
            dbms_output.put_line('Last index = ' || nt.last);
            dbms_output.put_line('Next index = ' || nt.next(2));
            dbms_output.put_line('Previous index = ' || nt.prior(3));
            flag := nt.exists(2);
            if flag = true then
               dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists');
            else
               dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists');
            end if;
            nt.extend(2);
            nt(1)(5) := 'Q';
            nt(1)(6) := 'R';
            nt(2)(5) := 'S';
            nt(2)(6) := 'T';
            nt(3)(5) := 'U';
            nt(3)(6) := 'V';
            nt(4)(5) := 'W';
            nt(4)(6) := 'X';




© Copy rights are reserved.
272

            nt(5)(1) := 'Y';
            nt(5)(2) := 'Z';
            nt(5)(3) := 'a';
            nt(5)(4) := 'b';
            nt(5)(5) := 'c';
            nt(5)(6) := 'd';
            nt(6)(1) := 'e';
            nt(6)(2) := 'f';
            nt(6)(3) := 'g';
            nt(6)(4) := 'h';
            nt(6)(5) := 'i';
            nt(6)(6) := 'j';
            dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                     dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j));
                 end loop;
            end loop;
            nt.trim;
            dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one indexe, Count = ' || nt.count);
            nt.trim(2);
            dbms_output.put_line('After trim of two indexes, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                    dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j));
                 end loop;
            end loop;
            nt.delete(2);
            dbms_output.put_line('After delete of second index, Count = ' || nt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
            loop
                 exit when v = 4;
                 for j in 1..nt.count+1 loop




© Copy rights are reserved.
273

                     dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || v || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(v)(j));
                 end loop;
                 v := v + 1;
                 if v= 2 then
                   v := 3;
                 end if;
              end loop;
              nt.delete;
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire nested table, Count = ' ||
                                           nt.count);
       END;




Output:
               Count = 4
               No limit to Nested Tables
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[1][1] = A
               nt[1][2] = B
               nt[1][3] = C
               nt[1][4] = D
               nt[2][1] = E
               nt[2][2] = F
               nt[2][3] = G
               nt[2][4] = H
               nt[3][1] = I
               nt[3][2] = J
               nt[3][3] = K
               nt[3][4] = L
               nt[4][1] = M
               nt[4][2] = N
               nt[4][3] = O
               nt[4][4] = P
               First index = 1
               Last index = 4


© Copy rights are reserved.
274

              Next index = 3
              Previous index = 2
              Index 2 exists
              After extend of one index, Count = 6
              NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
              nt[1][1] = A
              nt[1][2] = B
              nt[1][3] = C
              nt[1][4] = D
              nt[1][5] = Q
              nt[1][6] = R
              nt[2][1] = E
              nt[2][2] = F
              nt[2][3] = G
              nt[2][4] = H
              nt[2][5] = S
              nt[2][6] = T
              nt[3][1] = I
              nt[3][2] = J
              nt[3][3] = K
              nt[3][4] = L
              nt[3][5] = U
              nt[3][6] = V
              nt[4][1] = M
              nt[4][2] = N
              nt[4][3] = O
              nt[4][4] = P
              nt[4][5] = W
              nt[4][6] = X
              nt[5][1] = Y
              nt[5][2] = Z
              nt[5][3] = a
              nt[5][4] = b
              nt[5][5] = c
              nt[5][6] = d




© Copy rights are reserved.
275

               nt[6][1] = e
               nt[6][2] = f
               nt[6][3] = g
               nt[6][4] = h
               nt[6][5] = i
               nt[6][6] = j
               After trim of one indexe, Count = 5
               After trim of two indexes, Count = 3
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[1][1] = A
               nt[1][2] = B
               nt[1][3] = C
               nt[2][1] = E
               nt[2][2] = F
               nt[2][3] = G
               nt[3][1] = I
               nt[3][2] = J
               nt[3][3] = K
               After delete of second index, Count = 2
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[1][1] = A
               nt[1][2] = B
               nt[1][3] = C
               nt[3][1] = I
               nt[3][2] = J
               nt[3][3] = K
               After delete of entire nested table, Count = 0


Ex3:
       DECLARE

            type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer;
            type t2 is table of t1 index by binary_integer;
            ibt t2;
            flag boolean;
       BEGIN

            dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count);



© Copy rights are reserved.
276

            if ibt.limit is null then
              dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Index-by Tables');
            else
              dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || ibt.limit);
            end if;
            ibt(1)(1) := 'a';
            ibt(4)(5) := 'b';
            ibt(5)(1) := 'c';
            ibt(6)(2) := 'd';
            ibt(8)(3) := 'e';
            ibt(3)(4) := 'f';
            dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS');
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([1][1] = ' || ibt(1)(1));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([4][5] = ' || ibt(4)(5));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3));
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4));
            dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || ibt.first);
            dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || ibt.last);
            dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || ibt.next(3));
            dbms_output.put_line('Prior Index = ' || ibt.prior(8));
            ibt(1)(2) := 'g';
            ibt(1)(3) := 'h';
            ibt(1)(4) := 'i';
            ibt(1)(5) := 'k';
            ibt(1)(6) := 'l';
            ibt(1)(7) := 'm';
            ibt(1)(8) := 'n';
            dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count);
            dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS');
            for i in 1..8 loop
                dbms_output.put_line('ibt[1][' || i || '] = ' || ibt(1)(i));
            end loop;
            dbms_output.put_line('ibt([4][5] = ' || ibt(4)(5));




© Copy rights are reserved.
277

              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4));
              flag := ibt.exists(3);
              if flag = true then
                dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists');
              else
                dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists');
              end if;
              ibt.delete(1);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || ibt.count);
              ibt.delete(4);
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of fourth index, Count = ' || ibt.count);
              dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS');
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3));
              dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4));
              ibt.delete;
              dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire index-by table, Count = ' ||
                                           ibt.count);
       END;



Output:
                Count = 0
                No limit to Index-by Tables
                INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS
                ibt([1][1] = a
                ibt([4][5] = b
                ibt([5][1] = c
                ibt([6][2] = d
                ibt([8][3] = e
                ibt([3][4] = f
                First Index = 1
                Last Index = 8


© Copy rights are reserved.
278

               Next Index = 4
               Prior Index = 6
               Count = 6
               INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS
               ibt[1][1] = a
               ibt[1][2] = g
               ibt[1][3] = h
               ibt[1][4] = i
               ibt[1][5] = k
               ibt[1][6] = l
               ibt[1][7] = m
               ibt[1][8] = n
               ibt([4][5] = b
               ibt([5][1] = c
               ibt([6][2] = d
               ibt([8][3] = e
               ibt([3][4] = f
               Index 3 exists
               After delete of first index, Count = 5
               After delete of fourth index, Count = 4
               INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS
               ibt([5][1] = c
               ibt([6][2] = d
               ibt([8][3] = e
               ibt([3][4] = f
               After delete of entire index-by table, Count = 0


Ex4:
       DECLARE

            type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer;
            type t2 is table of t1 index by binary_integer;
            type t3 is table of t2;
            nt t3 := t3();
            c number := 65;
       BEGIN

            nt.extend(2);



© Copy rights are reserved.
279

              dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count);
              for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                      for k in 1..nt.count loop
                          nt(i)(j)(k) := chr(c);
                          c := c + 1;
                      end loop;
                 end loop;
              end loop;
              dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS');
              for i in 1..nt.count loop
                 for j in 1..nt.count loop
                      for k in 1..nt.count loop
                          dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '][' || k || '] = ' ||
                                                         nt(i)(j)(k));
                      end loop;
                 end loop;
              end loop;
       END;



Output:
               Count = 2
               NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS
               nt[1][1][1] = A
               nt[1][1][2] = B
               nt[1][2][1] = C
               nt[1][2][2] = D
               nt[2][1][1] = E
               nt[2][1][2] = F
               nt[2][2][1] = G
               nt[2][2][2] = H


OBJECTS USED IN THE EXAMPLES




               SQL>   select * from student;



© Copy rights are reserved.
280



                   SNO       SNAME           SMARKS
               ---------- -------------- ----------
                      1      saketh          100
                      2      srinu           200
                      3      divya           300
                      4      manogni        400


              SQL>        create     or   replace   type     addr   as   object(hno   number(2),city
              varchar(10));/




              SQL>   select * from employ;


              ENAME          JOB          ADDRESS(HNO, CITY)
              ---------- ---------- -----------------------------
              Ranjit        clerk          ADDR(11, 'hyd')
              Satish        manager       ADDR(22, 'bang')
              Srinu        engineer        ADDR(33, 'kochi')




© Copy rights are reserved.
281




                                                              ERROR HANDLING

PL/SQL implements error handling with exceptions and exception handlers. Exceptions
can be associated with oracle errors or with your own user-defined errors. By using
exceptions and exception handlers, you can make your PL/SQL programs robust and able
to deal with both unexpected and expected errors during execution.


ERROR TYPES
               Compile-time errors
               Runtime errors


Errors that occur during the compilation phase are detected by the PL/SQL engine and
reported back to the user, we have to correct them.


Runtime errors are detected by the PL/SQL runtime engine which can programmatically
raise and caught by exception handlers.
Exceptions are designed for run-time error handling, rather than compile-time error
handling.


HANDLING EXCEPTIONS




© Copy rights are reserved.
282

When exception is raised, control passes to the exception section of the block. The
exception section consists of handlers for some or all of the exceptions. An exception
handler contains the code that is executed when the error associated with the exception
occurs, and the exception is raised.


Syntax:
       EXCEPTION

                When exception_name then
                        Sequence_of_statements;
                When exception_name then
                        Sequence_of_statements;
                When others then
                        Sequence_of_statements;
       END;

EXCEPTION TYPES


               Predefined exceptions

            User-defined exceptions


PREDEFINED EXCEPTIONS


Oracle has predefined several exceptions that corresponds to the most common oracle
errors. Like the predefined types, the identifiers of these exceptions are defined in the
STANDARD   package. Because of this, they are already available to the program, it is not
necessary to declare them in the declarative secion.


Ex1:
       DECLARE

               a number;
               b varchar(2);
               v_marks number;
               cursor c is select * from student;
               type t is varray(3) of varchar(2);
               va t := t('a','b');
               va1 t;
       BEGIN




© Copy rights are reserved.
283

            -- NO_DATA_FOUND
            BEGIN

                select smarks into v_marks from student where sno = 50;
             EXCEPTION

                when no_data_found then
                         dbms_output.put_line('Invalid student number');
             END;
             -- CURSOR_ALREADY_OPEN
             BEGIN

                 open c;
                 open c;
             EXCEPTION

                 when cursor_already_open then
                         dbms_output.put_line('Cursor is already opened');
             END;


             -- INVALID_CURSOR
             BEGIN

                 close c;
                 open c;
                 close c;
                 close c;
             EXCEPTION

                 when invalid_cursor then
                         dbms_output.put_line('Cursor is already closed');
             END;
             -- TOO_MANY_ROWS
             BEGIN

                 select smarks into v_marks from student where sno > 1;
             EXCEPTION

                 when too_many_rows then
                         dbms_output.put_line('Too many values are coming to marks
                                                  variable');
              END;
              -- ZERO_DIVIDE
              BEGIN

                    a := 5/0;
              EXCEPTION

                    when zero_divide then




© Copy rights are reserved.
284

                          dbms_output.put_line('Divided by zero - invalid operation');
              END;
              -- VALUE_ERROR
              BEGIN

                   b := 'saketh';
              EXCEPTION

                   when value_error then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length');
              END;
              -- INVALID_NUMBER
              BEGIN

                   insert into student values('a','srinu',100);
              EXCEPTION

                   when invalid_number then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Invalid number');
              END;


              -- SUBSCRIPT_OUTSIDE_LIMIT
              BEGIN

                   va(4) := 'c';
              EXCEPTION

                   when subscript_outside_limit then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Index is greater than the limit');
              END;
              -- SUBSCRIPT_BEYOND_COUNT
              BEGIN

                   va(3) := 'c';
              EXCEPTION

                   when subscript_beyond_count then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Index is greater than the count');
              END;
              -- COLLECTION_IS_NULL
              BEGIN

                   va1(1) := 'a';
              EXCEPTION

                   when collection_is_null then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Collection is empty');
              END;

              --
      END;



© Copy rights are reserved.
285



Output:
              Invalid student number
              Cursor is already opened
              Cursor is already closed
              Too many values are coming to marks variable
              Divided by zero - invalid operation
              Invalid string length
              Invalid number
              Index is greater than the limit
              Index is greater than the count
              Collection is empty




Ex2:
              DECLARE

                     c number;
              BEGIN

                      c := 5/0;
              EXCEPTION

                      when zero_divide then
                              dbms_output.put_line('Invalid Operation');
                      when others then
                              dbms_output.put_line('From OTHERS handler: Invalid
                                                       Operation');
              END;



Output:
              Invalid Operation


USER-DEFINED EXCEPTIONS


A user-defined exception is an error that is defined by the programmer. User-defined
exceptions are declared in the declarative secion of a PL/SQL block. Just like variables,
exeptions have a type EXCEPTION and scope.



© Copy rights are reserved.
286



RAISING EXCEPTIONS



User-defined exceptions are raised explicitly via the RAISE statement.


Ex:
                DECLARE

                       e exception;
                BEGIN

                       raise e;
                EXCEPTION

                       when e then
                              dbms_output.put_line('e is raised');
                END;

Output:
                e is raised
BULIT-IN ERROR FUNCTIONS


SQLCODE AND SQLERRM



         SQLCODE   returns the current error code, and SQLERRM returns the current error
          message text;

       For user-defined exception         SQLCODE   returns 1 and SQLERRM returns “user-deifned
          exception”.
         SQLERRM wiil take only negative value except 100. If any positive value other than
          100 returns non-oracle exception.


Ex1:
                DECLARE

                        e exception;
                        v_dname varchar(10);
                BEGIN
                        -- USER-DEFINED EXCEPTION
                        BEGIN

                            raise e;
                        EXCEPTION

                            when e then
                                    dbms_output.put_line(SQLCODE || ' ' || SQLERRM);


© Copy rights are reserved.
287

                      END;


                      -- PREDEFINED EXCEPTION
                     BEGIN

                         select dname into v_dname from dept where deptno = 50;
                     EXCEPTION

                         when no_data_found then
                                 dbms_output.put_line(SQLCODE || ' ' || SQLERRM);
                     END;
              END;



Output:
              1 User-Defined Exception
              100 ORA-01403: no data found




Ex2:
              BEGIN

                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(100));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(0));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(1));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-100));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-500));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(200));
                     dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-900));
              END;

Output:
              ORA-01403: no data found
              ORA-0000: normal, successful completion
              User-Defined Exception
              ORA-00100: no data found
              ORA-00500: Message 500 not found; product=RDBMS; facility=ORA
              -200: non-ORACLE exception
              ORA-00900: invalid SQL statement


DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_STACK




© Copy rights are reserved.
288


       The built-in function, like     SQLERRM,   returns the message associated with the current
          error.

       It differs from SQLERRM in two ways:
         Its length is not restricted; it will return the full error message string.
         You can not pass an error code number to this function; it cannot be used to return
          the message for a random error code.


Ex:
                   DECLARE

                       v number := 'ab';
                   BEGIN

                       null;
                   EXCEPTION

                       when others then
                               dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_error_stack);
                   END;

Output:
                   declare
                   *
                   ERROR at line 1:
                   ORA-06502: PL/SQL: numeric or value error: character to number conversion
                   error
                   ORA-06512: at line 2


DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_CALL_STACK



This function returns a formatted string showing the execution call stack inside your
PL/SQL    application. Its usefulness is not restricted to error management; you will also find
its handy for tracing the exectution of your code. You may not use this function in
exception block.


Ex:
                   BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_call_stack);
                   END;




© Copy rights are reserved.
289

Output:
              ----- PL/SQL Call Stack -----
                Object_handle     line_number object_name
                   69760478            2          anonymous block


DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_BACKTRACE



It displays the execution stack at the point where an exception was raised. Thus , you can
call this function with an exception section at the top level of your stack and still find out
where the error was raised deep within the call stack.


Ex:
              CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P1 IS
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 1');
                  raise value_error;
              END P1;
              CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P2 IS
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 2');
                  p1;
              END P2;



              CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P3 IS
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 3');
                  p2;
              EXCEPTION

                  when others then
                         dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_error_backtrace);
              END P3;



Output:
              SQL>   exec p3


              from procedure 3
              from procedure 2
              from procedure 1


© Copy rights are reserved.
290

              ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P1", line 4
              ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P2", line 4
              ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P3", line 4


EXCEPTION_INIT PRAGMA


Using this you can associate a named exception with a particular oracle error. This gives
you the ability to trap this error specifically, rather than via an OTHERS handler.


Syntax:
       PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(exception_name,       oracle_error_number);
Ex:
              DECLARE

                     e exception;
                     pragma exception_init(e,-1476);
                     c number;
              BEGIN

                     c := 5/0;
              EXCEPTION

                     when e then
                              dbms_output.put_line('Invalid Operation');
              END;



Output:
              Invalid Operation


RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR


You can use this built-in function to create your own error messages, which can be more
descriptive than named exceptions.


Syntax:
       RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(error_number,       error_message,, [keep_errors_flag]);




© Copy rights are reserved.
291

The Boolean parameter keep_errors_flag is optional. If it is TRUE, the new error is added
to the list of errors already raised. If it is FALSE, which is default, the new error will
replace the current list of errors.


Ex:
              DECLARE

                     c number;
              BEGIN

                     c := 5/0;


              EXCEPTION

                     when zero_divide then
                              raise_application_error(-20222,'Invalid Operation');
              END;



Output:
              DECLARE

              *
              ERROR   at line 1:
              ORA-20222: Invalid Operation
              ORA-06512: at line 7


EXCEPTION PROPAGATION


Exceptions can occur in the declarative, the executable, or the exception section of a
PL/SQL block.


EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE EXECUATABLE SECTION



Exceptions raised in execuatable section can be handled in current block or outer block.


Ex1:
              DECLARE

                  e exception;
              BEGIN
                  BEGIN

                      raise e;
                  END;



© Copy rights are reserved.
292

                  EXCEPTION

                      when e then
                              dbms_output.put_line('e is raised');
              END;



Output:
              e is raised


Ex2:
              DECLARE

                  e exception;
              BEGIN
                  BEGIN

                      raise e;
                   END;
              END;



Output:
              ERROR   at line 1:
              ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception
              ORA-06512: at line 5


EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE DECLARATIVE SECTION



Exceptions raised in the declarative secion must be handled in the outer block.


Ex1:
              DECLARE

                  c number(3) := 'abcd';
              BEGIN

                  dbms_output.put_line('Hello');
              EXCEPTION

                  when others then
                          dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length');
              END;



Output:
              ERROR   at line 1:



© Copy rights are reserved.
293

              ORA-06502: PL/SQL: numeric or value error: character to number conversion
              error
              ORA-06512: at line 2


Ex2:
              BEGIN
                 DECLARE

                       c number(3) := 'abcd';
                 BEGIN

                       dbms_output.put_line('Hello');
                 EXCEPTION

                       when others then
                              dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length');
                 END;
              EXCEPTION

                  when others then
                          dbms_output.put_line('From outer block: Invalid string length');
              END;



Output:
              From outer block: Invalid string length


EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE EXCEPTION SECTION



Exceptions raised in the declarative secion must be handled in the outer block.


Ex1:
              DECLARE

                     e1 exception;
                     e2 exception;
              BEGIN

                     raise e1;
              EXCEPTION

                     when e1 then
                           dbms_output.put_line('e1 is raised');
                           raise e2;
                     when e2 then
                           dbms_output.put_line('e2 is raised');



© Copy rights are reserved.
294

              END;



Output:
              e1 is raised
              DECLARE
              *
              ERROR at line 1:
              ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception
              ORA-06512: at line 9
              ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception


Ex2:
              DECLARE

                  e1 exception;
                  e2 exception;
              BEGIN
                  BEGIN

                       raise e1;
                  EXCEPTION

                       when e1 then
                              dbms_output.put_line('e1 is raised');
                              raise e2;
                       when e2 then
                              dbms_output.put_line('e2 is raised');
                   END;
              EXCEPTION

                     when e2 then
                          dbms_output.put_line('From outer block: e2 is raised');
              END;



Output:
              e1 is raised
              From outer block: e2 is raised


Ex3:
              DECLARE

                     e exception;



© Copy rights are reserved.
295

              BEGIN

                     raise e;
              EXCEPTION

                     when e then
                            dbms_output.put_line('e is raised');
                            raise e;
              END;



Output:
              e is raised
              DECLARE
              *
              ERROR at line 1:
              ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception
              ORA-06512: at line 8
              ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception




RESTRICTIONS


You can not pass exception as an argument to a subprogram.




© Copy rights are reserved.
296




                                                                DATABASE TRIGGERS


Triggers are similar to procedures or functions in that they are named PL/SQL blocks with
declarative, executable, and exception handling sections. A trigger is executed implicitly
whenever the triggering event happens. The act of executing a trigger is known as firing
the trigger.


RESTRICTIONS ON TRIGGERES


      Like packages, triggers must be stored as stand-alone objects in the database and
       cannot be local to a block or package.
      A trigger does not accept arguments.


USE OF TRIGGERS


      Maintaining    complex   integrity   constraints   not   possible   through   declarative
       constraints enable at table creation.




© Copy rights are reserved.
297

       Auditing information in a table by recording the changes made and who made
        them.
       Automatically signaling other programs that action needs to take place when
        chages are made to a table.
       Perform validation on changes being made to tables.
       Automate maintenance of the database.


TYPES OF TRIGGERS


                        DML Triggers
                        Instead of Triggers
                        DDL Triggers
                        System Triggers
                        Suspend Triggers




CATEGORIES


Timing          --       Before or After
Level           --       Row or Statement


Row level trigger fires once for each row affected by the triggering statement. Row level
trigger is identified by the FOR EACH ROW clause.


Statement level trigger fires once either before or after the statement.


DML TRIGGER SYNTAX


        Create or replace trigger <trigger_name>
        {Before | after} {insert or update or delete} on <table_name>
        [For each row]
        [When (…)]
        [Declare]



© Copy rights are reserved.
298

                 -- declaration
        Begin
                 -- trigger body
        [Exception]
                 -- exception section
        End <trigger_name>;


DML TRIGGERS


A DML trigger is fired on an INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE operation on a database table. It can
be fired either before or after the statement executes, and can be fired once per affected
row, or once per statement.


The combination of these factors determines the types of the triggers. These are a total of
12 possible types (3 statements * 2 timing * 2 levels).


STATEMENT LEVEL


Statement level trigger fires only once.
Ex:


      SQL>   create table statement_level(count varchar(50));


        CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER STATEMENT_LEVEL_TRIGGER

              after update on student
        BEGIN

              insert into statement_level values('Statement level fired');
        END STATEMENT_LEVEL_TRIGGER;



Output:


      SQL>   update student set smarks=500;


             3 rows updated.


      SQL>   select * from statement_level;




© Copy rights are reserved.
299

                 COUNT
                 ----------------------------
                 Statement level fired


ROW LEVEL


Row level trigger fires once for each row affected by the triggering statement.


Ex:


      SQL>   create table row_level(count varchar(50));


        CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER ROW_LEVEL_TRIGGER

              after update on student
        BEGIN

              insert into row_level values('Row level fired');
        END ROW_LEVEL_TRIGGER;




Output:


      SQL>   update student set smarks=500;


             3 rows updated.


      SQL>   select * from statement_level;


                 COUNT
                 ----------------------------
                 Row level fired
                 Row level fired
                 Row level fired


ORDER OF DML TRIGGER FIRING



             Before statement level
             Before row level



© Copy rights are reserved.
300

             After row level
             After statement level


Ex:
   Suppose we have a follwing table.


                 SQL>   select * from student;


                        NO NAME       MARKS
                        ----- ------- ----------
                         1    a       100
                         2    b       200
                         3    c       300
                         4    d       400


      SQL>   create table firing_order(order varchar(50));


                 CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER BEFORE_STATEMENT

                    before insert on student
                 BEGIN

                    insert into firing_order values('Before Statement Level');
                 END BEFORE_STATEMENT;


                 CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER BEFORE_ROW

                    before insert on student
                    for each row
                 BEGIN

                    insert into firing_order values('Before Row Level');
                 END BEFORE_ROW;



                 CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_STATEMENT

                    after insert on student
                 BEGIN

                    insert into firing_order values('After Statement Level');
                 END AFTER_STATEMENT;



                 CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_ROW

                    after insert on student


© Copy rights are reserved.
301

                 for each row
              BEGIN

                 insert into firing_order values('After Row Level');
              END AFTER_ROW;



Output:
              SQL>   select * from firing_order;


              no rows selected


              SQL>   insert into student values(5,'e',500);


              1 row created.


              SQL>   select * from firing_order;




              ORDER
              --------------------------------------------------
              Before Statement Level
              Before Row Level
              After Row Level
              After Statement Level


              SQL>   select * from student;


                     NO NAME       MARKS
                     ---- -------- ----------
                      1       a     100
                      2       b     200
                      3       c     300
                      4       d     400
                      5       e     500


CORRELATION IDENTIFIERS IN ROW-LEVEL TRIGGERS




© Copy rights are reserved.
302



Inside the trigger, you can access the data in the row that is currently being processed.
This is accomplished through two correlation identifiers - :old and :new.


A correlation identifier is a special kind of PL/SQL bind variable. The colon in front of each
indicates that they are bind variables, in the sense of host variables used in embedded
PL/SQL,    and indicates that they are not regular PL/SQL variables. The PL/SQL compiler will
treat them as records of type


         Triggering_table%ROWTYPE.


Although syntactically they are treated as records, in reality they are not. :old and :new
are also known as pseudorecords, for this reason.


TRIGGERING STATEMENT                       :OLD                             :NEW
--------------------------------------    ----------------------------   -----------------------------------------------

INSERT                                     all fields are NULL.          values that will be inserted
                                                                          When the statement is completed.
UPDATE                                     original values for            new values that will be updated
                                           the row before the             when the statement is completed.
                                           update.
DELETE                                   original values before          all fields are NULL.
                                           the row is deleted.


Ex:
      SQL>   create table marks(no number(2) old_marks number(3),new_marks
                                         number(3));


                  CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER OLD_NEW

                       before insert or update or delete on student
                       for each row
                  BEGIN

                       insert into marks values(:old.no,:old.marks,:new.marks);
                  END OLD_NEW;


Output:
                  SQL>    select * from student;



© Copy rights are reserved.
303



                     NO NAME MARKS
                   ----- ------- ----------
                     1        a     100
                     2        b      200
                     3        c     300
                     4        d      400
                     5        e     500


              SQL>   select * from marks;


              no rows selected


              SQL>   insert into student values(6,'f',600);


              1 row created.


              SQL>   select * from student;


                     NO NAME       MARKS
                   ---- -------- ----------
                     1        a     100
                     2        b     200
                     3        c     300
                     4        d     400
                     5        e     500
                     6        f    600


              SQL>   select * from marks;


                     NO OLD_MARKS NEW_MARKS
                     ---- --------------- ---------------
                                               600


              SQL>   update student set marks=555 where no=5;




© Copy rights are reserved.
304

              1 row updated.


              SQL>   select * from student;


                     NO NAME MARKS
                  ----- ------- ----------
                     1        a        100
                     2        b        200
                     3        c        300
                     4        d        400
                     5        e        555
                     6        f        600




              SQL>   select * from marks;


                         NO         OLD_MARKS   NEW_MARKS
                         ------ ---------------- ---------------
                                                     600
                            5           500          555


              SQL>   delete student where no = 2;


              1 row deleted.


              SQL>   select * from student;


                     NO NAME           MARKS
                   ---- -------- ----------
                     1          a       100
                     3          c       300
                     4          d       400
                     5          e       555
                     6          f      600


© Copy rights are reserved.
305



               SQL>   select * from marks;


                      NO OLD_MARKS NEW_MARKS
                    ----- -------------- ----------------
                                              600
                       5        500           555
                       2        200


REFERENCING CLAUSE


If desired, you can use the REFERENCING clause to specify a different name for :old ane
:new. This clause is found after the triggering event, before the WHEN clause.


Syntax:
      REFERENCING   [old as old_name] [new as new_name]
Ex:
               CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER REFERENCE_TRIGGER

                    before insert or update or delete on student
                    referencing old as old_student new as new_student
                    for each row
               BEGIN

                    insert into marks
                           values(:old_student.no,:old_student.marks,:new_student.marks);
               END REFERENCE_TRIGGER;


WHEN CLAUSE


WHEN   clause is valid for row-level triggers only. If present, the trigger body will be
executed only for those rows that meet the condition specified by the WHEN clause.


Syntax:
       WHEN   trigger_condition;


Where trigger_condition is a Boolean expression. It will be evaluated for each row. The
:new and :old records can be referenced inside trigger_condition as well, but like
REFERENCING,   the colon is not used there. The colon is only valid in the trigger body.



© Copy rights are reserved.
306



Ex:
               CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER WHEN_TRIGGER

                  before insert or update or delete on student
                  referencing old as old_student new as new_student
                  for each row
                  when (new_student.marks > 500)
               BEGIN

                  insert into marks
                           values(:old_student.no,:old_student.marks,:new_student.marks);
               END WHEN_TRIGGER;


TRIGGER PREDICATES


There are three Boolean functions that you can use to determine what the operation is.
The predicates are


                          INSERTING
                          UPDATING
                          DELETING


Ex:


       SQL>   create table predicates(operation varchar(20));


               CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER PREDICATE_TRIGGER

                   before insert or update or delete on student
               BEGIN

                   if inserting then
                       insert into predicates values('Insert');
                   elsif updating then
                           insert into predicates values('Update');
                   elsif deleting then
                           insert into predicates values('Delete');
                   end if;
               END PREDICATE_TRIGGER;


Output:
               SQL>   delete student where no=1;


© Copy rights are reserved.
307



              1 row deleted.


              SQL>   select * from predicates;


                      MSG
                      ---------------
                      Delete


              SQL>   insert into student values(7,'g',700);


              1 row created.


              SQL>   select * from predicates;


                      MSG
                      ---------------
                      Delete
                      Insert


              SQL>   update student set marks = 777 where no=7;


              1 row updated.


              SQL>   select * from predicates;


                      MSG
                      ---------------
                      Delete
                      Insert
                      Update


INSTEAD-OF TRIGGERS




© Copy rights are reserved.
308

Instead-of triggers fire instead of a DML operation. Also, instead-of triggers can be defined
only on views. Instead-of triggers are used in two cases:


         To allow a view that would otherwise not be modifiable to be modified.
         To modify the columns of a nested table column in a view.


Ex:
      SQL>   create view emp_dept as select empno,ename,job,dname,loc,sal,e.deptno from
             emp e, dept d where e.deptno = d.deptno;


      CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER INSTEAD_OF_TRIGGER

           instead of insert on emp_dept
      BEGIN

           insert into dept1 values(50,'rd','bang');
           insert into
              emp1(empno,ename,job,sal,deptno)values(2222,'saketh','doctor',8000,50);
      END INSTEAD_OF_TRIGGER;

Output:


      SQL>    insert into emp_dept values(2222,'saketh','doctor',8000,'rd','bang',50);
      SQL>   select * from emp_dept;


          EMPNO       ENAME     JOB              SAL          DNAME          LOC            DEPTNO
          ---------- ---------- ------------   -----------   ------------- -------------   ----------
           7369      SMITH      CLERK            800         RESEARCH        DALLAS           20
           7499      ALLEN      SALESMAN        1600         SALES           CHICAGO           30
           7521      WARD       SALESMAN        1250         SALES           CHICAGO          30
           7566      JONES      MANAGER         2975         RESEARCH        DALLAS           20
           7654      MARTIN SALESMAN            1250         SALES           CHICAGO           30
           7698      BLAKE      MANAGER         2850         SALES           CHICAGO          30
           7782      CLARK      MANAGER         2450         ACCOUNTING NEW YORK              10
           7788      SCOTT      ANALYST         3000         RESEARCH        DALLAS            20
           7839      KING       PRESIDENT       5000         ACCOUNTING       NEW YORK         10
           7844      TURNER SALESMAN            1500         SALES            CHICAGO          30
           7876      ADAMS      CLERK           1100         RESEARCH         DALLAS          20
           7900      JAMES      CLERK            950         SALES            CHICAGO          30



© Copy rights are reserved.
309

       7902       FORD         ANALYST        3000       RESEARCH          DALLAS            20
       7934       MILLER       CLERK          1300       ACCOUNTING        NEW YORK          10
       2222       saketh       doctor        8000        rd                bang              50


   SQL>   select * from dept;


          DEPTNO             DNAME          LOC
          ----------    ----------------   -----------
             10         ACCOUNTING         NEW YORK
             20         RESEARCH           DALLAS
             30         SALES              CHICAGO
             40         OPERATIONS         BOSTON
             50         rd                 bang




   SQL>   select * from emp;


       EMPNO           ENAME       JOB            MGR     HIREDATE           SAL       COMM       DEPTNO
       ---------- ----------    --------------- -------- --------------    ---------   --------- ----------
       7369            SMITH     CLERK          7902          1 7-DEC-80      800                  20
       7499        ALLEN        SALESMAN        7698          20-FEB-81     1600        300       30
       7521        WARD         SALESMAN        7698          22-FEB-81     1250        500       30
       7566        JONES         MANAGER        7839          02-APR-81     2975                   20
       7654        MARTIN       SALESMAN        7698          28-SEP-81     1250       1400        30
       7698        BLAKE        MANAGER         7839          01-MAY-81     2850                  30
       7782        CLARK        MANAGER         7839          09-JUN-81     2450                   10
       7788        SCOTT        ANALYST         7566          19-APR-87     3000                  20
       7839        KING         PRESIDENT                     17-NOV-81     5000                  10
       7844        TURNER SALESMAN             7698           08-SEP-81     1500         0        30
       7876        ADAMS        CLERK          7788           23-MAY-87     1100                  20
       7900        JAMES        CLERK          7698           03-DEC-81      950                   30
       7902        FORD        ANALYST         7566       03-DEC-81         3000                  20
       7934        MILLER       CLERK          7782       23-JAN-82         1300                  10
       2222        saketh       doctor                                      8000                  50



© Copy rights are reserved.
310



DDL TRIGGERS


Oracle allows you to define triggers that will fire when Data Definition Language
statements are executed.


Syntax:


        Create or replace trigger <trigger_name>
        {Before | after} {DDL event} on {database | schema}
        [When (…)]
        [Declare]
                 -- declaration
        Begin
                 -- trigger body
        [Exception]
                 -- exception section
        End <trigger_name>;


Ex:


      SQL>   create table my_objects(obj_name varchar(10),obj_type varchar(10),obj_owner
             varchar(10),obj_time date);


        CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER CREATE_TRIGGER

              after create on database
        BEGIN

              insert into my_objects values(sys.dictionary_obj_name,sys.dictionary_obj_type,
                                           sys.dictionary_obj_owner, sysdate);
        END CREATE_TRIGGER;



Output:


      SQL>   select * from my_objects;


             no rows selected



© Copy rights are reserved.
311



      SQL>   create table stud1(no number(2));


      SQL>   select * from my_objects;


        OBJ_NAME       OBJ_TYPE     OBJ_OWNER OBJ_TIME
        ------------- -------------- --------------   ------------
        STUD1           TABLE             SYS         21-JUL-07


      SQL>   create sequence ss;


      SQL>   create view stud_view as select * from stud1;


      SQL>   select * from my_objects;




        OBJ_NAME       OBJ_TYPE       OBJ_OWNER         OBJ_TIME
        -------------- ------------- ---------------- -------------
        STUD1             TABLE           SYS          21-JUL-07
        SS                SEQUENCE        SYS          21-JUL-07
        STUD_VIEW         VIEW            SYS          21-JUL-07


WHEN CLAUSE



If WHEN present, the trigger body will be executed only for those that meet the condition
specified by the WHEN clause.


Ex:
        CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER CREATE_TRIGGER

              after create on database
              when (sys.dictionary_obj_type = ‘TABLE’)
        BEGIN

              insert into my_objects values(sys.dictionary_obj_name,sys.dictionary_obj_type,
                                                sys.dictionary_obj_owner, sysdate);
        END CREATE_TRIGGER;




© Copy rights are reserved.
312

SYSTEM TRIGGERS


System triggers will fire whenever database-wide event occurs. The following are the
database event triggers. To create system trigger you need ADMINISTER DATABASE TRIGGER
privilege.


                       STARTUP
                       SHUTDOWN
                       LOGON
                       LOGOFF
                       SERVERERROR



Syntax:


        Create or replace trigger <trigger_name>
        {Before | after} {Database event} on {database | schema}
        [When (…)]
        [Declare]
                 -- declaration section
        Begin
                 -- trigger body
        [Exception]
                 -- exception section
        End <trigger_name>;


Ex:


      SQL>   create table user_logs(u_name varchar(10),log_time timestamp);


        CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_LOGON

              after logon on database
        BEGIN

              insert into user_logs values(user,current_timestamp);
        END AFTER_LOGON;



Output:




© Copy rights are reserved.
313

      SQL>   select * from user_logs;


             no rows selected


      SQL>   conn saketh/saketh
      SQL>   select * from user_logs;


        U_NAME        LOG_TIME
        ---------- ------------------------------------------------
        SAKETH        22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM


      SQL>   conn system/oracle
      SQL>   select * from user_logs;




        U_NAME        LOG_TIME
        ---------- ------------------------------------------------
        SAKETH        22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM
        SYSTEM        22-JUL-07 12.07.34.218000 AM


      SQL>   conn scott/tiger
      SQL>   select * from user_logs;


        U_NAME        LOG_TIME
        ---------- -----------------------------------------------
        SAKETH        22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM
        SYSTEM        22-JUL-07 12.07.34.218000 AM
        SCOTT        22-JUL-07 12.08.43.093000 AM


SERVERERROR


The SERVERERROR event can be used to track errors that occur in the database. The error
code is available inside the trigger through the SERVER_ERROR attribute function.
Ex:




© Copy rights are reserved.
314

   SQL>   create table my_errors(error_msg varchar(200));


       CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER

             after servererror on database
       BEGIN

             insert into my_errors values(dbms_utility.format_error_stack);
       END SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER;


Output:


   SQL>   create table ss (no));
   create table ss (no))
                 *
   ERROR at line 1:
   ORA-00922: missing or invalid option


   SQL>   select * from my_errors;
   ERROR_MSG
   -------------------------------------------------------------
   ORA-00922: missing or invalid option


   SQL>   insert into student values(1,2,3);
   insert into student values(1,2,3)
            *
   ERROR at line 1:
   ORA-00942: table or view does not exist


   SQL>   select * from my_errors;


   ERROR_MSG
   -------------------------------------------------------------
   ORA-00922: missing or invalid option
   ORA-00942: table or view does not exist


SERVER_ERROR ATTRIBUTE FUNCTION




© Copy rights are reserved.
315

It takes a single number type of argument and returns the error at the position on the
error stack indicated by the argument. The position 1 is the top of the stack.


Ex:


       CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER

            after servererror on database
       BEGIN

            insert into my_errors values(server_error(1));
       END SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER;


SUSPEND TRIGGERS


This will fire whenever a statement is suspended. This might occur as the result of a
space issue such as exceeding an allocated tablepace quota. This functionality can be
used to address the problem and allow the operatin to continue.




Syntax:


       Create or replace trigger <trigger_name>
       after suspend on {database | schema}
       [When (…)]
       [Declare]
               -- declaration section
       Begin
               -- trigger body
       [Exception]
               -- exception section
      End <trigger_name>;


Ex:


  SQL>   create tablespace my_space datafile 'f:my_file.dbf' size 2m;
  SQL>   create table student(sno number(2),sname varchar(10)) tablespace my_space;


       CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SUSPEND_TRIGGER



© Copy rights are reserved.
316

           after suspend on database
       BEGIN

           dbms_output.put_line(‘ No room to insert in your tablespace');
       END SUSPEND_TRIGGER;


Output:


      Insert more rows in student table then , you will get


      No room to insert in your tablespace


AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION


Prior to Oracle8i, there was no way in which some SQL operations within a transaction
could be committed independent of the rest of the operations. Oracle allows this,
however, through autonomous transactions. An autonomous transaction is a transaction
that is started within the context of another transaction, known as parent transaction, but
is independent of it. The autonomous transaction can be committed or rolled back
regardless ot the state of the parent transaction.


Ex:


       CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION_TRIGGER

               after insert on student
       DECLARE

               pragma autonomous_transaction;
       BEGIN

               update student set marks = 555;
               commit;
       END AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION_TRIGGER;



Output:


       SQL>   select * from student;


              NO NA      MARKS
            ----- ----- -- ----------



© Copy rights are reserved.
317

              1    a       111
              2    b       222
              3    c       300


       SQL>    insert into student values(4,'d',444);


       SQL>   select * from student;


              NO NA        MARKS
              ---- ------ -- ----------
              1    a       555
              2    b       555
              3    c       555
              4    d       444




RESTRICTIONS ON AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION



      If an autonomous transaction attempts to access a resource held by the main
       transaction, a deadlock can occur in you program.

    You cannot mark all programs in a package as autonomous with a single              PRAGMA

       declaration. You must indicate autonomous transactions explicity in each program.

    To exit without errors from an autonomous transaction program that has executed
       at least one INSERT or UPDATE or DELETE, you must perform an explicit commit or
       rollback.

    The      COMMIT   and ROLLBACK statements end the active autonomous transaction, but
       they do not force the termination of the autonomous routine. You can have multiple
       COMMIT     and/or ROLLBACK statements inside your autonomous block.
      You can not rollback to a savepoint set in the main transaction.

    The      TRANSACTIONS    parameter in the oracle initialization file specifies the maximum
       number of transactions allowed concurrently in a session. The default value is 75
       for this, but you can increase the limit.


MUTATING TABLES




© Copy rights are reserved.
318

There are restrictions on the tables and columns that a trigger body may access. In order
to define these restrictions, it is necessary to understand mutating and constraining
tables.


A mutating table is table that is currentlty being modified by a DML statement and the
trigger event also DML statement. A mutating table error occurs when a row-level trigger
tries to examine or change a table that is already undergoing change.


A constraining table is a table that might need to be read from for a referential integrity
constraint.


Ex:


          CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER MUTATING_TRIGGER

                  before delete on student
                  for each row


          DECLARE

                  ct number;
          BEGIN

                  select count(*) into ct from student where no = :old.no;
          END MUTATING_TRIGGER;



Output:


          SQL>   delete student where no = 1;
          delete student where no = 1
              *
          ERROR at line 1:
          ORA-04091: table SCOTT.STUDENT is mutating, trigger/function may not see it
          ORA-06512: at "SCOTT.T", line 4
          ORA-04088: error during execution of trigger 'SCOTT.T'


HOW TO AVOID MUTATING TABLE ERROR ?



         By using autonomous transaction
         By using statement level trigger


© Copy rights are reserved.
319




© Copy rights are reserved.
Ad

More Related Content

Viewers also liked (12)

Something about oracle joins
Something about oracle joinsSomething about oracle joins
Something about oracle joins
mysqlops
 
Oracle sql joins
Oracle sql joinsOracle sql joins
Oracle sql joins
redro
 
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردنOracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
ayman hamdan
 
Sqlii
SqliiSqlii
Sqlii
Ebtsam Mohamed
 
SQL commands
SQL commandsSQL commands
SQL commands
Manish Kushwaha
 
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBAOracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Jeff Smith
 
oracle joins and sql joins
oracle joins and sql joinsoracle joins and sql joins
oracle joins and sql joins
shripal singh
 
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course OutlineOracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Dwight Cummings
 
19 Reasons... | Pakistan Bright Sides
19 Reasons... | Pakistan Bright Sides19 Reasons... | Pakistan Bright Sides
19 Reasons... | Pakistan Bright Sides
LGS, GBHS&IC, University Of South-Asia, TARA-Technologies
 
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalizationBsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Rai University
 
Oracle SQL Self Study
Oracle SQL Self StudyOracle SQL Self Study
Oracle SQL Self Study
MyOnlineITCourses
 
SQL Join Basic
SQL Join BasicSQL Join Basic
SQL Join Basic
Naimul Arif
 
Something about oracle joins
Something about oracle joinsSomething about oracle joins
Something about oracle joins
mysqlops
 
Oracle sql joins
Oracle sql joinsOracle sql joins
Oracle sql joins
redro
 
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردنOracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
Oracle developer Course in Jordan دورة اوراكل في الاردن
ayman hamdan
 
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBAOracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Oracle SQL Developer for the DBA
Jeff Smith
 
oracle joins and sql joins
oracle joins and sql joinsoracle joins and sql joins
oracle joins and sql joins
shripal singh
 
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course OutlineOracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Oracle Database 11g: Learn and Master PL/SQL | Course Outline
Dwight Cummings
 
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalizationBsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Bsc cs ii-dbms-u-iv-normalization
Rai University
 

Similar to Sql plsql (20)

Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
AmIt Prasad
 
Best sql plsql material
Best sql plsql materialBest sql plsql material
Best sql plsql material
pitchaiah yechuri
 
Introduction sql
Introduction sqlIntroduction sql
Introduction sql
sagarasuri
 
Oracle Material.pdf
Oracle Material.pdfOracle Material.pdf
Oracle Material.pdf
rajeshkathavarayan
 
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
Andrej Pashchenko
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
BhupendraShahi6
 
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec..."Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
BHAVYAGOLCHHARA21110
 
COIS 420 - Practice01
COIS 420 - Practice01COIS 420 - Practice01
COIS 420 - Practice01
Angel G Diaz
 
Sql select
Sql select Sql select
Sql select
Mudasir Syed
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SabrinaShanta2
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SaiMiryala1
 
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
teachersduniya.com
 
Relational DB Course
Relational DB  Course Relational DB  Course
Relational DB Course
Sunny U Okoro
 
Lecture02_IDB.pptx
Lecture02_IDB.pptxLecture02_IDB.pptx
Lecture02_IDB.pptx
MostafizurRahaman41
 
Basic sql statements
Basic sql statementsBasic sql statements
Basic sql statements
Julius Murumba
 
Database Security
Database SecurityDatabase Security
Database Security
Anar Godjaev
 
Sql
SqlSql
Sql
pratik201289
 
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
Umair Amjad
 
Les01
Les01Les01
Les01
arnold 7490
 
Les01
Les01Les01
Les01
Yousif Misbah
 
Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
Best sql plsql_material for B.TECH
AmIt Prasad
 
Introduction sql
Introduction sqlIntroduction sql
Introduction sql
sagarasuri
 
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
SQL Macros - Game Changing Feature for SQL Developers?
Andrej Pashchenko
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
BhupendraShahi6
 
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec..."Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
"Comprehensive Guide to Database Management Systems: Optimizing Data Architec...
BHAVYAGOLCHHARA21110
 
COIS 420 - Practice01
COIS 420 - Practice01COIS 420 - Practice01
COIS 420 - Practice01
Angel G Diaz
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SabrinaShanta2
 
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptxSQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SQL-Tutorial.P1241112567Pczwq.powerpoint.pptx
SaiMiryala1
 
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
DATA BASE || INTRODUCTION OF DATABASE \\ SQL 2018
teachersduniya.com
 
Relational DB Course
Relational DB  Course Relational DB  Course
Relational DB Course
Sunny U Okoro
 
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
SQL WORKSHOP::Lecture 1
Umair Amjad
 
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdfmachines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
AmirStern2
 
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Markus Eisele
 
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information TechnologyIT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
SHEHABALYAMANI
 
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient CareAn Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
Cyntexa
 
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent LasterAI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
All Things Open
 
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Raffi Khatchadourian
 
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
João Esperancinha
 
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamsonAI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
UXPA Boston
 
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdfBuilding the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Cheryl Hung
 
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
James Anderson
 
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Maarten Verwaest
 
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanizationDark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Jakub Šimek
 
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdfKit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Wonjun Hwang
 
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
Ivano Malavolta
 
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdfViam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
camilalamoratta
 
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teamsSlack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Nacho Cougil
 
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both days
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both daysConfig 2025 presentation recap covering both days
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both days
TrishAntoni1
 
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptxSmart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Seasia Infotech
 
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptxArtificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
03ANMOLCHAURASIYA
 
machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdfmachines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
machines-for-woodworking-shops-en-compressed.pdf
AmirStern2
 
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Enterprise Integration Is Dead! Long Live AI-Driven Integration with Apache C...
Markus Eisele
 
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information TechnologyIT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
IT484 Cyber Forensics_Information Technology
SHEHABALYAMANI
 
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient CareAn Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
An Overview of Salesforce Health Cloud & How is it Transforming Patient Care
Cyntexa
 
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent LasterAI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
AI 3-in-1: Agents, RAG, and Local Models - Brent Laster
All Things Open
 
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Challenges in Migrating Imperative Deep Learning Programs to Graph Execution:...
Raffi Khatchadourian
 
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
Could Virtual Threads cast away the usage of Kotlin Coroutines - DevoxxUK2025
João Esperancinha
 
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamsonAI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
AI-proof your career by Olivier Vroom and David WIlliamson
UXPA Boston
 
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdfBuilding the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Building the Customer Identity Community, Together.pdf
Cheryl Hung
 
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
GDG Cloud Southlake #42: Suresh Mathew: Autonomous Resource Optimization: How...
James Anderson
 
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Limecraft Webinar - 2025.3 release, featuring Content Delivery, Graphic Conte...
Maarten Verwaest
 
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanizationDark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Dark Dynamism: drones, dark factories and deurbanization
Jakub Šimek
 
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdfKit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Kit-Works Team Study_팀스터디_김한솔_nuqs_20250509.pdf
Wonjun Hwang
 
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
The No-Code Way to Build a Marketing Team with One AI Agent (Download the n8n...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
On-Device or Remote? On the Energy Efficiency of Fetching LLM-Generated Conte...
Ivano Malavolta
 
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdfViam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
Viam product demo_ Deploying and scaling AI with hardware.pdf
camilalamoratta
 
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teamsSlack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Slack like a pro: strategies for 10x engineering teams
Nacho Cougil
 
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both days
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both daysConfig 2025 presentation recap covering both days
Config 2025 presentation recap covering both days
TrishAntoni1
 
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptxSmart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Smart Investments Leveraging Agentic AI for Real Estate Success.pptx
Seasia Infotech
 
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptxArtificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
Artificial_Intelligence_in_Everyday_Life.pptx
03ANMOLCHAURASIYA
 
Ad

Sql plsql

  • 1. 1 INTRODUCTION SQL is divided into the following  Data Definition Language (DDL)  Data Manipulation Language (DML)  Data Retrieval Language (DRL)  Transaction Control Language (TCL)  Data Control Language (DCL) DDL -- create, alter, drop, truncate, rename DML -- insert, update, delete DRL -- select TCL -- commit, rollback, savepoint DCL -- grant, revoke CREATE TABLE SYNTAX Create table <table_name> (col1 datatype1, col2 datatype2 …coln datatypen); Ex: SQL> create table student (no number (2), name varchar (10), marks number (3)); INSERT This will be used to insert the records into table. We have two methods to insert.  By value method  By address method a) USING VALUE METHOD Syntax: insert into <table_name) values (value1, value2, value3 …. Valuen); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 2. 2 Ex: SQL> insert into student values (1, ’sudha’, 100); SQL> insert into student values (2, ’saketh’, 200); To insert a new record again you have to type entire insert command, if there are lot of records this will be difficult. This will be avoided by using address method. b) USING ADDRESS METHOD Syntax: insert into <table_name) values (&col1, &col2, &col3 …. &coln); This will prompt you for the values but for every insert you have to use forward slash. Ex: SQL> insert into student values (&no, '&name', &marks); Enter value for no: 1 Enter value for name: Jagan Enter value for marks: 300 old 1: insert into student values(&no, '&name', &marks) new 1: insert into student values(1, 'Jagan', 300) SQL> / Enter value for no: 2 Enter value for name: Naren Enter value for marks: 400 old 1: insert into student values(&no, '&name', &marks) new 1: insert into student values(2, 'Naren', 400) c) INSERTING DATA INTO SPECIFIED COLUMNS USING VALUE METHOD Syntax: insert into <table_name)(col1, col2, col3 … Coln) values (value1, value2, value3 …. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 3. 3 Valuen); Ex: SQL> insert into student (no, name) values (3, ’Ramesh’); SQL> insert into student (no, name) values (4, ’Madhu’); d) INSERTING DATA INTO SPECIFIED COLUMNS USING ADDRESS METHOD Syntax: insert into <table_name)(col1, col2, col3 … coln) values (&col1, &col2 ….&coln); This will prompt you for the values but for every insert you have to use forward slash. Ex: SQL> insert into student (no, name) values (&no, '&name'); Enter value for no: 5 Enter value for name: Visu old 1: insert into student (no, name) values(&no, '&name') new 1: insert into student (no, name) values(5, 'Visu') SQL> / Enter value for no: 6 Enter value for name: Rattu old 1: insert into student (no, name) values(&no, '&name') new 1: insert into student (no, name) values(6, 'Rattu') SELECTING DATA Syntax: Select * from <table_name>; -- here * indicates all columns or Select col1, col2, … coln from <table_name>; Ex: SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 4. 4 --- ------ -------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select no, name, marks from student; NO NAME MARKS --- ------ -------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select no, name from student; NO NAME --- ------- 1 Sudha 2 Saketh 1 Jagan 2 Naren 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 5. 5 CONDITIONAL SELECTIONS AND OPERATORS We have two clauses used in this  Where  Order by USING WHERE Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <condition>; the following are the different types of operators used in where clause.  Arithmetic operators  Comparison operators  Logical operators  Arithmetic operators -- highest precedence +, -, *, /  Comparison operators  =, !=, >, <, >=, <=, <>  between, not between  in, not in  null, not null  like  Logical operators  And  Or -- lowest precedence  not a) USING =, >, <, >=, <=, !=, <> © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 6. 6 Ex: SQL> select * from student where no = 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 2 Naren 400 SQL> select * from student where no < 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 Sudha 100 1 Jagan 300 SQL> select * from student where no > 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select * from student where no <= 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 SQL> select * from student where no >= 2; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 7. 7 NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select * from student where no != 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 Sudha 100 1 Jagan 300 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select * from student where no <> 2; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 Sudha 100 1 Jagan 300 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu b) USING AND This will gives the output when all the conditions become true. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 8. 8 Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <condition1> and <condition2> and .. <conditionn>; Ex: SQL> select * from student where no = 2 and marks >= 200; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- -------- 2 Saketh 200 2 Naren 400 c) USING OR This will gives the output when either of the conditions become true. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <condition1> and <condition2> or .. <conditionn>; Ex: SQL> select * from student where no = 2 or marks >= 200; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 d) USING BETWEEN This will gives the output based on the column and its lower bound, upperbound. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> between <lower bound> and <upper bound>; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 9. 9 Ex: SQL> select * from student where marks between 200 and 400; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 e) USING NOT BETWEEN This will gives the output based on the column which values are not in its lower bound, upperbound. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> not between <lower bound> and <upper bound>; Ex: SQL> select * from student where marks not between 200 and 400; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 f) USING IN This will gives the output based on the column and its list of values specified. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> in ( value1, value2, value3 … valuen); Ex: SQL> select * from student where no in (1, 2, 3); NO NAME MARKS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 10. 10 --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh g) USING NOT IN This will gives the output based on the column which values are not in the list of values specified. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> not in ( value1, value2, value3 … valuen); Ex: SQL> select * from student where no not in (1, 2, 3); NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu h) USING NULL This will gives the output based on the null values in the specified column. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> is null; Ex: SQL> select * from student where marks is null; NO NAME MARKS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 11. 11 --- ------- --------- 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu i) USING NOT NULL This will gives the output based on the not null values in the specified column. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> is not null; Ex: SQL> select * from student where marks is not null; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 j) USING LIKE This will be used to search through the rows of database column based on the pattern you specify. Syntax: select * from <table_name> where <col> like <pattern>; Ex: i) This will give the rows whose marks are 100. SQL> select * from student where marks like 100; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 12. 12 NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 ii) This will give the rows whose name start with ‘S’. SQL> select * from student where name like 'S%'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 2 Saketh 200 iii) This will give the rows whose name ends with ‘h’. SQL> select * from student where name like '%h'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 3 Ramesh iV) This will give the rows whose name’s second letter start with ‘a’. SQL> select * from student where name like '_a%'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- -------- 2 Saketh 200 1 Jagan 300 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 6 Rattu V) This will give the rows whose name’s third letter start with ‘d’. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 13. 13 SQL> select * from student where name like '__d%'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 4 Madhu Vi) This will give the rows whose name’s second letter start with ‘t’ from ending. SQL> select * from student where name like '%_t%'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 6 Rattu Vii) This will give the rows whose name’s third letter start with ‘e’ from ending. SQL> select * from student where name like '%e__%'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 2 Saketh 200 3 Ramesh Viii) This will give the rows whose name cotains 2 a’s. SQL> select * from student where name like '%a% a %'; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 Jagan 300 * You have to specify the patterns in like using underscore ( _ ). © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 14. 14 USING ORDER BY This will be used to ordering the columns data (ascending or descending). Syntax: Select * from <table_name> order by <col> desc; By default oracle will use ascending order. If you want output in descending order you have to use desc keyword after the column. Ex: SQL> select * from student order by no; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 Sudha 100 1 Jagan 300 2 Saketh 200 2 Naren 400 3 Ramesh 4 Madhu 5 Visu 6 Rattu SQL> select * from student order by no desc; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 6 Rattu 5 Visu 4 Madhu 3 Ramesh 2 Saketh 200 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 15. 15 2 Naren 400 1 Sudha 100 1 Jagan 300 USING DML USING UPDATE This can be used to modify the table data. Syntax: Update <table_name> set <col1> = value1, <col2> = value2 where <condition>; Ex: SQL> update student set marks = 500; If you are not specifying any condition this will update entire table. SQL> update student set marks = 500 where no = 2; SQL> update student set marks = 500, name = 'Venu' where no = 1; USING DELETE This can be used to delete the table data temporarily. Syntax: Delete <table_name> where <condition>; Ex: SQL> delete student; If you are not specifying any condition this will delete entire table. SQL> delete student where no = 2; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 16. 16 USING DDL USING ALTER This can be used to add or remove columns and to modify the precision of the datatype. a) ADDING COLUMN Syntax: alter table <table_name> add <col datatype>; Ex: SQL> alter table student add sdob date; b) REMOVING COLUMN Syntax: alter table <table_name> drop <col datatype>; Ex: SQL> alter table student drop column sdob; c) INCREASING OR DECREASING PRECISION OF A COLUMN Syntax: alter table <table_name> modify <col datatype>; Ex: SQL> alter table student modify marks number(5); * To decrease precision the column should be empty. d) MAKING COLUMN UNUSED © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 17. 17 Syntax: alter table <table_name> set unused column <col>; Ex: SQL> alter table student set unused column marks; Even though the column is unused still it will occupy memory. d) DROPPING UNUSED COLUMNS Syntax: alter table <table_name> drop unused columns; Ex: SQL> alter table student drop unused columns; * You can not drop individual unused columns of a table. e) RENAMING COLUMN Syntax: alter table <table_name> rename column <old_col_name> to <new_col_name>; Ex: SQL> alter table student rename column marks to smarks; USING TRUNCATE This can be used to delete the entire table data permanently. Syntax: truncate table <table_name>; Ex: SQL> truncate table student; USING DROP © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 18. 18 This will be used to drop the database object; Syntax: Drop table <table_name>; Ex: SQL> drop table student; USING RENAME This will be used to rename the database object; Syntax: rename <old_table_name> to <new_table_name>; Ex: SQL> rename student to stud; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 19. 19 USING TCL USING COMMIT This will be used to save the work. Commit is of two types.  Implicit  Explicit a) IMPLICIT This will be issued by oracle internally in two situations.  When any DDL operation is performed.  When you are exiting from SQL * PLUS. b) EXPLICIT This will be issued by the user. Syntax: Commit or commit work; * When ever you committed then the transaction was completed. USING ROLLBACK This will undo the operation. This will be applied in two methods.  Upto previous commit  Upto previous rollback Syntax: Roll or roll work; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 20. 20 Or Rollback or rollback work; * While process is going on, if suddenly power goes then oracle will rollback the transaction. USING SAVEPOINT You can use savepoints to rollback portions of your current set of transactions. Syntax: Savepoint <savepoint_name>; Ex: SQL> savepoint s1; SQL> insert into student values(1, ‘a’, 100); SQL> savepoint s2; SQL> insert into student values(2, ‘b’, 200); SQL> savepoint s3; SQL> insert into student values(3, ‘c’, 300); SQL> savepoint s4; SQL> insert into student values(4, ‘d’, 400); Before rollback SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 SQL> rollback to savepoint s3; Or SQL> rollback to s3; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 21. 21 This will rollback last two records. SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS --- ------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 22. 22 USING DCL DCL commands are used to granting and revoking the permissions. USING GRANT This is used to grant the privileges to other users. Syntax: Grant <privileges> on <object_name> to <user_name> [with grant option]; Ex: SQL> grant select on student to sudha; -- you can give individual privilege SQL> grant select, insert on student to sudha; -- you can give set of privileges SQL> grant all on student to sudha; -- you can give all privileges The sudha user has to use dot method to access the object. SQL> select * from saketh.student; The sudha user can not grant permission on student table to other users. To get this type of option use the following. SQL> grant all on student to sudha with grant option; Now sudha user also grant permissions on student table. USING REVOKE This is used to revoke the privileges from the users to which you granted the privileges. Syntax: Revoke <privileges> on <object_name> from <user_name>; Ex: SQL> revoke select on student form sudha; -- you can revoke individual privilege SQL> revoke select, insert on student from sudha; -- you can revoke set of privileges SQL> revoke all on student from sudha; -- you can revoke all privileges © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 23. 23 USING ALIASES CREATE WITH SELECT We can create a table using existing table [along with data]. Syntax: Create table <new_table_name> [col1, col2, col3 ... coln] as select * from <old_table_name>; Ex: SQL> create table student1 as select * from student; Creating table with your own column names. SQL> create table student2(sno, sname, smarks) as select * from student; Creating table with specified columns. SQL> create table student3 as select no,name from student; Creating table with out table data. SQL> create table student2(sno, sname, smarks) as select * from student where 1 = 2; In the above where clause give any condition which does not satisfy. INSERT WITH SELECT Using this we can insert existing table data to a another table in a single trip. But the table structure should be same. Syntax: Insert into <table1> select * from <table2>; Ex: SQL> insert into student1 select * from student; Inserting data into specified columns SQL> insert into student1(no, name) select no, name from student; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 24. 24 COLUMN ALIASES Syntax: Select <orginal_col> <alias_name> from <table_name>; Ex: SQL> select no sno from student; or SQL> select no “sno” from student; TABLE ALIASES If you are using table aliases you can use dot method to the columns. Syntax: Select <alias_name>.<col1>, <alias_name>.<col2> … <alias_name>.<coln> from <table_name> <alias_name>; Ex: SQL> select s.no, s.name from student s; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 25. 25 USING MERGE MERGE You can use merge command to perform insert and update in a single command. Ex: SQL> Merge into student1 s1 Using (select *From student2) s2 On(s1.no=s2.no) When matched then Update set marks = s2.marks When not matched then Insert (s1.no,s1.name,s1.marks) Values(s2.no,s2.name,s2.marks); In the above the two tables are with the same structure but we can merge different structured tables also but the datatype of the columns should match. Assume that student1 has columns like no,name,marks and student2 has columns like no, name, hno, city. SQL> Merge into student1 s1 Using (select *From student2) s2 On(s1.no=s2.no) When matched then Update set marks = s2.hno When not matched then Insert (s1.no,s1.name,s1.marks) Values(s2.no,s2.name,s2.hno); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 26. 26 MULTIBLE INSERTS We have table called DEPT with the following columns and data DEPTNO DNAME LOC -------- -------- ---- 10 accounting new york 20 research dallas 30 sales Chicago 40 operations boston a) CREATE STUDENT TABLE SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks number(3)); b) MULTI INSERT WITH ALL FIELDS SQL> Insert all Into student values(1,’a’,100) Into student values(2,’b’,200) Into student values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno=10; -- This inserts 3 rows c) MULTI INSERT WITH SPECIFIED FIELDS SQL> insert all Into student (no,name) values(4,’d’) Into student(name,marks) values(’e’,400) Into student values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno=10; -- This inserts 3 rows © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 27. 27 d) MULTI INSERT WITH DUPLICATE ROWS SQL> insert all Into student values(1,’a’,100) Into student values(2,’b’,200) Into student values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno > 10; -- This inserts 9 rows because in the select statement retrieves 3 records (3 inserts for each row retrieved) e) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED SQL> Insert all When deptno > 10 then Into student1 values(1,’a’,100) When dname = ‘SALES’ then Into student2 values(2,’b’,200) When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then Into student3 values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno>10; -- This inserts 4 rows because the first condition satisfied 3 times, second condition satisfied once and the last none. f) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED AND ELSE SQL> Insert all When deptno > 100 then Into student1 values(1,’a’,100) When dname = ‘S’ then Into student2 values(2,’b’,200) When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then Into student3 values(3,’c’,300) Else © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 28. 28 Into student values(4,’d’,400) Select *from dept where deptno>10; -- This inserts 3 records because the else satisfied 3 times g) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED AND FIRST SQL> Insert first When deptno = 20 then Into student1 values(1,’a’,100) When dname = ‘RESEARCH’ then Into student2 values(2,’b’,200) When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then Into student3 values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno=20; -- This inserts 1 record because the first clause avoid to check the remaining conditions once the condition is satisfied. h) MULTI INSERT WITH CONDITIONS BASED, FIRST AND ELSE SQL> Insert first When deptno = 30 then Into student1 values(1,’a’,100) When dname = ‘R’ then Into student2 values(2,’b’,200) When loc = ‘NEW YORK’ then Into student3 values(3,’c’,300) Else Into student values(4,’d’,400) Select *from dept where deptno=20; -- This inserts 1 record because the else clause satisfied once © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 29. 29 i) MULTI INSERT WITH MULTIBLE TABLES SQL> Insert all Into student1 values(1,’a’,100) Into student2 values(2,’b’,200) Into student3 values(3,’c’,300) Select *from dept where deptno=10; -- This inserts 3 rows ** You can use multi tables with specified fields, with duplicate rows, with conditions, with first and else clauses. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 30. 30 FUNCTIONS Functions can be categorized as follows.  Single row functions  Group functions SINGLE ROW FUNCTIONS Single row functions can be categorized into five. These will be applied for each row and produces individual output for each row.  Numeric functions  String functions  Date functions  Miscellaneous functions  Conversion functions NUMERIC FUNCTIONS  Abs  Sign  Sqrt  Mod  Nvl  Power  Exp  Ln  Log  Ceil  Floor  Round  Trunk  Bitand  Greatest © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 31. 31  Least  Coalesce a) ABS Absolute value is the measure of the magnitude of value. Absolute value is always a positive number. Syntax: abs (value) Ex: SQL> select abs(5), abs(-5), abs(0), abs(null) from dual; ABS(5) ABS(-5) ABS(0) ABS(NULL) ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------- 5 -5 0 b) SIGN Sign gives the sign of a value. Syntax: sign (value) Ex: SQL> select sign(5), sign(-5), sign(0), sign(null) from dual; SIGN(5) SIGN(-5) SIGN(0) SIGN(NULL) ---------- ---------- ---------- -------------- 1 -1 0 c) SQRT This will give the square root of the given value. Syntax: sqrt (value) -- here value must be positive. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 32. 32 Ex: SQL> select sqrt(4), sqrt(0), sqrt(null), sqrt(1) from dual; SQRT(4) SQRT(0) SQRT(NULL) SQRT(1) ---------- ---------- --------------- ---------- 2 0 1 d) MOD This will give the remainder. Syntax: mod (value, divisor) Ex: SQL> select mod(7,4), mod(1,5), mod(null,null), mod(0,0), mod(-7,4) from dual; MOD(7,4) MOD(1,5) MOD(NULL,NULL) MOD(0,0) MOD(-7,4) ------------ ---------- --------------------- ----------- ------------- 3 1 0 -3 e) NVL This will substitutes the specified value in the place of null values. Syntax: nvl (null_col, replacement_value) Ex: SQL> select * from student; -- here for 3rd row marks value is null NO NAME MARKS --- ------- --------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c SQL> select no, name, nvl(marks,300) from student; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 33. 33 NO NAME NVL(MARKS,300) --- ------- --------------------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 SQL> select nvl(1,2), nvl(2,3), nvl(4,3), nvl(5,4) from dual; NVL(1,2) NVL(2,3) NVL(4,3) NVL(5,4) ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 1 2 4 5 SQL> select nvl(0,0), nvl(1,1), nvl(null,null), nvl(4,4) from dual; NVL(0,0) NVL(1,1) NVL(null,null) NVL(4,4) ---------- ---------- ----------------- ---------- 0 1 4 f) POWER Power is the ability to raise a value to a given exponent. Syntax: power (value, exponent) Ex: SQL> select power(2,5), power(0,0), power(1,1), power(null,null), power(2,-5) from dual; POWER(2,5) POWER(0,0) POWER(1,1) POWER(NULL,NULL) POWER(2,-5) -------------- -------------- ----- --------- ----------------------- --------------- 32 1 1 .03125 g) EXP This will raise e value to the give power. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 34. 34 Syntax: exp (value) Ex: SQL> select exp(1), exp(2), exp(0), exp(null), exp(-2) from dual; EXP(1) EXP(2) EXP(0) EXP(NULL) EXP(-2) -------- --------- -------- ------------- ---------- 2.71828183 7.3890561 1 .135335283 h) LN This is based on natural or base e logarithm. Syntax: ln (value) -- here value must be greater than zero which is positive only. Ex: SQL> select ln(1), ln(2), ln(null) from dual; LN(1) LN(2) LN(NULL) ------- ------- ------------ 0 .693147181 Ln and Exp are reciprocal to each other. EXP (3) = 20.0855369 LN (20.0855369) = 3 i) LOG This is based on 10 based logarithm. Syntax: log (10, value) -- here value must be greater than zero which is positive only. Ex: SQL> select log(10,100), log(10,2), log(10,1), log(10,null) from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 35. 35 LOG(10,100) LOG(10,2) LOG(10,1) LOG(10,NULL) --------------- ----------- ------------ ----------------- 2 .301029996 0 LN (value) = LOG (EXP(1), value) SQL> select ln(3), log(exp(1),3) from dual; LN(3) LOG(EXP(1),3) ------- ----------------- 1.09861229 1.09861229 j) CEIL This will produce a whole number that is greater than or equal to the specified value. Syntax: ceil (value) Ex: SQL> select ceil(5), ceil(5.1), ceil(-5), ceil( -5.1), ceil(0), ceil(null) from dual; CEIL(5) CEIL(5.1) CEIL(-5) CEIL(-5.1) CEIL(0) CEIL(NULL) --------- ----------- ---------- ------------ -------- -------------- 5 6 -5 -5 0 k) FLOOR This will produce a whole number that is less than or equal to the specified value. Syntax: floor (value) Ex: SQL> select floor(5), floor(5.1), floor(-5), floor( -5.1), floor(0), floor(null) from dual; FLOOR(5) FLOOR(5.1) FLOOR(-5) FLOOR(-5.1) FLOOR(0) FLOOR(NULL) © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 36. 36 ----------- ------------- ------------ -------------- ----------- ---------------- 5 5 -5 -6 0 l) ROUND This will rounds numbers to a given number of digits of precision. Syntax: round (value, precision) Ex: SQL> select round(123.2345), round(123.2345,2), round(123.2354,2) from dual; ROUND(123.2345) ROUND(123.2345,0) ROUND(123.2345,2) ROUND(123.2354,2) --------------------- ------------------------ ----------------------- ----------------------- 123 123 123.23 123.24 SQL> select round(123.2345,-1), round(123.2345,-2), round(123.2345,-3), round(123.2345,-4) from dual; ROUND(123.2345,-1) ROUND(123.2345,-2) ROUND(123.2345,-3) ROUND(123.2345,-4) ------------------------ ------------------------- ------------------------ ------------------------ 120 100 0 0 SQL> select round(123,0), round(123,1), round(123,2) from dual; ROUND(123,0) ROUND(123,1) ROUND(123,2) ----------------- ----------------- ---------------- 123 123 123 SQL> select round(-123,0), round(-123,1), round(-123,2) from dual; ROUND(-123,0) ROUND(-123,1) ROUND(-123,2) ------------------ ----------------- ------------------- -123 -123 -123 SQL> select round(123,-1), round(123,-2), round(123,-3), round(-123,-1), round( -123,-2), round(-123,-3) from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 37. 37 ROUND(123,-1) ROUND(123,-2) ROUND(123,-3) ROUND(-123,-1) ROUND(-123,-2) ROUND(-123,-3) ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------- -------------- -------------------------- 120 100 0 -120 -100 0 SQL> select round(null,null), round(0,0), round(1,1), round(-1,-1), round(-2,-2) from dual; ROUND(NULL,NULL) ROUND(0,0) ROUND(1,1) ROUND(-1,-1) ROUND(-2,-2) ----------------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------- ---------------- 0 1 0 0 m) TRUNC This will truncates or chops off digits of precision from a number. Syntax: trunc (value, precision) Ex: SQL> select trunc(123.2345), trunc(123.2345,2), trunc(123.2354,2) from dual; TRUNC(123.2345) TRUNC(123.2345,2) TRUNC(123.2354,2) --------------------- ----------------------- ----------------------- 123 123.23 123.23 SQL> select trunc(123.2345,-1), trunc(123.2345,-2), trunc(123.2345,-3), trunc(123.2345,-4) from dual; TRUNC(123.2345,-1) TRUNC(123.2345,-2) TRUNC(123.2345,-3) TRUNC(123.2345,-4) ------------------------ ------------------------ ----------------------- ------------------------ 120 100 0 0 SQL> select trunc(123,0), trunc(123,1), trunc(123,2) from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 38. 38 TRUNC(123,0) TRUNC(123,1) TRUNC(123,2) ---------------- ---------------- ----------------- 123 123 123 SQL> select trunc(-123,0), trunc(-123,1), trunc(-123,2) from dual; TRUNC(-123,0) TRUNC(-123,1) TRUNC(-123,2) ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -123 -123 -123 SQL> select trunc(123,-1), trunc(123,-2), trunc(123,-3), trunc(-123,-1), trunc( -123,2), trunc(-123,-3) from dual; TRUNC(123,-1) TRUNC(123,-2) TRUNC(123,-3) TRUNC(-123,-1) TRUNC(-123,2) TRUNC(- 123,-3) ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------- ------------- --------------------------------- 120 100 0 -120 -123 0 SQL> select trunc(null,null), trunc(0,0), trunc(1,1), trunc(-1,-1), trunc(-2,-2) from dual; TRUNC(NULL,NULL) TRUNC(0,0) TRUNC(1,1) TRUNC(-1,-1) TRUNC(-2,-2) ----------------------- ------------- ------------- --------------- ---------------- 0 1 0 0 n) BITAND This will perform bitwise and operation. Syntax: bitand (value1, value2) Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 39. 39 SQL> select bitand(2,3), bitand(0,0), bitand(1,1), bitand(null,null), bitand(-2,-3) from dual; BITAND(2,3) BITAND(0,0) BITAND(1,1) BITAND(NULL,NULL) BITAND(-2,-3) -------------- --------------- -------------- ------------------------ ----------------- 2 0 1 -4 o) GREATEST This will give the greatest number. Syntax: greatest (value1, value2, value3 … valuen) Ex: SQL> select greatest(1, 2, 3), greatest(-1, -2, -3) from dual; GREATEST(1,2,3) GREATEST(-1,-2,-3) -------------------- ----------------------- 3 -1  If all the values are zeros then it will display zero.  If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.  If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing. p) LEAST This will give the least number. Syntax: least (value1, value2, value3 … valuen) Ex: SQL> select least(1, 2, 3), least(-1, -2, -3) from dual; LEAST(1,2,3) LEAST(-1,-2,-3) -------------------- ----------------------- 1 -3  If all the values are zeros then it will display zero. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 40. 40  If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.  If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing. q) COALESCE This will return first non-null value. Syntax: coalesce (value1, value2, value3 … valuen) Ex: SQL> select coalesce(1,2,3), coalesce(null,2,null,5) from dual; COALESCE(1,2,3) COALESCE(NULL,2,NULL,5) ------------------- ------------------------------- 1 2 STRING FUNCTIONS  Initcap  Upper  Lower  Length  Rpad  Lpad  Ltrim  Rtrim  Trim  Translate  Replace  Soundex  Concat ( ‘ || ‘ Concatenation operator)  Ascii  Chr  Substr  Instr  Decode  Greatest © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 41. 41  Least  Coalesce a) INITCAP This will capitalize the initial letter of the string. Syntax: initcap (string) Ex: SQL> select initcap('computer') from dual; INITCAP ----------- Computer b) UPPER This will convert the string into uppercase. Syntax: upper (string) Ex: SQL> select upper('computer') from dual; UPPER ----------- COMPUTER c) LOWER This will convert the string into lowercase. Syntax: lower (string) Ex: SQL> select lower('COMPUTER') from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 42. 42 LOWER ----------- computer d) LENGTH This will give length of the string. Syntax: length (string) Ex: SQL> select length('computer') from dual; LENGTH ----------- 8 e) RPAD This will allows you to pad the right side of a column with any set of characters. Syntax: rpad (string, length [, padding_char]) Ex: SQL> select rpad('computer',15,'*'), rpad('computer',15,'*#') from dual; RPAD('COMPUTER' RPAD('COMPUTER' ---------------------- ---------------------- computer******* computer*#*#*#* -- Default padding character was blank space. f) LPAD © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 43. 43 This will allows you to pad the left side of a column with any set of characters. Syntax: lpad (string, length [, padding_char]) Ex: SQL> select lpad('computer',15,'*'), lpad('computer',15,'*#') from dual; LPAD('COMPUTER' LPAD('COMPUTER' --------------------- --------------------- *******computer *#*#*#*computer -- Default padding character was blank space. g) LTRIM This will trim off unwanted characters from the left end of string. Syntax: ltrim (string [,unwanted_chars]) Ex: SQL> select ltrim('computer','co'), ltrim('computer','com') from dual; LTRIM( LTRIM -------- --------- mputer puter SQL> select ltrim('computer','puter'), ltrim('computer','omputer') from dual; LTRIM('C LTRIM('C ---------- ---------- computer computer -- If you haven’t specify any unwanted characters it will display entire string. h) RTRIM © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 44. 44 This will trim off unwanted characters from the right end of string. Syntax: rtrim (string [, unwanted_chars]) Ex: SQL> select rtrim('computer','er'), rtrim('computer','ter') from dual; RTRIM( RTRIM -------- --------- comput compu SQL> select rtrim('computer','comput’), rtrim('computer','compute') from dual; RTRIM('C RTRIM('C ---------- ---------- computer computer -- If you haven’t specify any unwanted characters it will display entire string. i) TRIM This will trim off unwanted characters from the both sides of string. Syntax: trim (unwanted_chars from string) Ex: SQL> select trim( 'i' from 'indiani') from dual; TRIM( ----- ndian SQL> select trim( leading'i' from 'indiani') from dual; -- this will work as LTRIM TRIM(L ------ ndiani © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 45. 45 SQL> select trim( trailing'i' from 'indiani') from dual; -- this will work as RTRIM TRIM(T ------ Indian j) TRANSLATE This will replace the set of characters, character by character. Syntax: translate (string, old_chars, new_chars) Ex: SQL> select translate('india','in','xy') from dual; TRANS -------- xydxa k) REPLACE This will replace the set of characters, string by string. Syntax: replace (string, old_chars [, new_chars]) Ex: SQL> select replace('india','in','xy'), replace(‘india’,’in’) from dual; REPLACE REPLACE ----------- ----------- Xydia dia l) SOUNDEX © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 46. 46 This will be used to find words that sound like other words, exclusively used in where clause. Syntax: soundex (string) Ex: SQL> select * from emp where soundex(ename) = soundex('SMIT'); EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO -------- -------- ----- ----- ------------ --------- ---------- 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 17-DEC-80 500 20 m) CONCAT This will be used to combine two strings only. Syntax: concat (string1, string2) Ex: SQL> select concat('computer',' operator') from dual; CONCAT('COMPUTER' ------------------------- computer operator If you want to combine more than two strings you have to use concatenation operator(||). SQL> select 'how' || ' are' || ' you' from dual; 'HOW'||'ARE --------------- how are you n) ASCII © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 47. 47 This will return the decimal representation in the database character set of the first character of the string. Syntax: ascii (string) Ex: SQL> select ascii('a'), ascii('apple') from dual; ASCII('A') ASCII('APPLE') ------------ ------------------ 97 97 o) CHR This will return the character having the binary equivalent to the string in either the database character set or the national character set. Syntax: chr (number) Ex: SQL> select chr(97) from dual; CHR ----- a p) SUBSTR This will be used to extract substrings. Syntax: substr (string, start_chr_count [, no_of_chars]) Ex: SQL> select substr('computer',2), substr('computer',2,5), substr('computer',3,7) from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 48. 48 SUBSTR( SUBST SUBSTR ---------- ------- -------- omputer omput mputer  If no_of_chars parameter is negative then it will display nothing.  If both parameters except string are null or zeros then it will display nothing.  If no_of_chars parameter is greater than the length of the string then it ignores and calculates based on the orginal string length.  If start_chr_count is negative then it will extract the substring from right end. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C O M P U T E R -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 q) INSTR This will allows you for searching through a string for set of characters. Syntax: instr (string, search_str [, start_chr_count [, occurrence] ]) Ex: SQL> select instr('information','o',4,1), instr('information','o',4,2) from dual; INSTR('INFORMATION','O',4,1) INSTR('INFORMATION','O',4,2) ------------------------------------ ------------------------------------- 4 10  If you are not specifying start_chr_count and occurrence then it will start search from the beginning and finds first occurrence only.  If both parameters start_chr_count and occurrence are null, it will display nothing. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 49. 49 r) DECODE Decode will act as value by value substitution. For every value of field, it will checks for a match in a series of if/then tests. Syntax: decode (value, if1, then1, if2, then2, ……. else); Ex: SQL> select sal, decode(sal,500,'Low',5000,'High','Medium') from emp; SAL DECODE ----- --------- 500 Low 2500 Medium 2000 Medium 3500 Medium 3000 Medium 5000 High 4000 Medium 5000 High 1800 Medium 1200 Medium 2000 Medium 2700 Medium 2200 Medium 3200 Medium SQL> select decode(1,1,3), decode(1,2,3,4,4,6) from dual; DECODE(1,1,3) DECODE(1,2,3,4,4,6) ----------------- ------------------------ 3 6  If the number of parameters are odd and different then decode will display nothing.  If the number of parameters are even and different then decode will display last value. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 50. 50  If all the parameters are null then decode will display nothing.  If all the parameters are zeros then decode will display zero. s) GREATEST This will give the greatest string. Syntax: greatest (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn) Ex: SQL> select greatest('a', 'b', 'c'), greatest('satish','srinu','saketh') from dual; GREAT GREAT ------- ------- c srinu  If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.  If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing. t) LEAST This will give the least string. Syntax: greatest (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn) Ex: SQL> select least('a', 'b', 'c'), least('satish','srinu','saketh') from dual; LEAST LEAST ------- ------- a saketh  If all the parameters are nulls then it will display nothing.  If any of the parameters is null it will display nothing. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 51. 51 u) COALESCE This will gives the first non-null string. Syntax: coalesce (strng1, string2, string3 … stringn) Ex: SQL> select coalesce('a','b','c'), coalesce(null,'a',null,'b') from dual; COALESCE COALESCE ----------- ----------- a a DATE FUNCTIONS  Sysdate  Current_date  Current_timestamp  Systimestamp  Localtimestamp  Dbtimezone  Sessiontimezone  To_char  To_date  Add_months  Months_between  Next_day  Last_day  Extract  Greatest  Least  Round  Trunc  New_time  Coalesce © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 52. 52 Oracle default date format is DD-MON-YY. We can change the default format to our desired format by using the following command. SQL> alter session set nls_date_format = ‘DD-MONTH-YYYY’; But this will expire once the session was closed. a) SYSDATE This will give the current date and time. Ex: SQL> select sysdate from dual; SYSDATE ----------- 24-DEC-06 b) CURRENT_DATE This will returns the current date in the session’s timezone. Ex: SQL> select current_date from dual; CURRENT_DATE ------------------ 24-DEC-06 c) CURRENT_TIMESTAMP This will returns the current timestamp with the active time zone information. Ex: SQL> select current_timestamp from dual; CURRENT_TIMESTAMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------- © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 53. 53 24-DEC-06 03.42.41.383369 AM +05:30 d) SYSTIMESTAMP This will returns the system date, including fractional seconds and time zone of the database. Ex: SQL> select systimestamp from dual; SYSTIMESTAMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24-DEC-06 03.49.31.830099 AM +05:30 e) LOCALTIMESTAMP This will returns local timestamp in the active time zone information, with no time zone information shown. Ex: SQL> select localtimestamp from dual; LOCALTIMESTAMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24-DEC-06 03.44.18.502874 AM f) DBTIMEZONE This will returns the current database time zone in UTC format. (Coordinated Universal Time) Ex: SQL> select dbtimezone from dual; DBTIMEZONE --------------- -07:00 g) SESSIONTIMEZONE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 54. 54 This will returns the value of the current session’s time zone. Ex: SQL> select sessiontimezone from dual; SESSIONTIMEZONE ------------------------------------ +05:30 h) TO_CHAR This will be used to extract various date formats. The available date formats as follows. Syntax: to_char (date, format) DATE FORMATS D -- No of days in week DD -- No of days in month DDD -- No of days in year MM -- No of month MON -- Three letter abbreviation of month MONTH -- Fully spelled out month RM -- Roman numeral month DY -- Three letter abbreviated day DAY -- Fully spelled out day Y -- Last one digit of the year YY -- Last two digits of the year YYY -- Last three digits of the year YYYY -- Full four digit year SYYYY -- Signed year I -- One digit year from ISO standard IY -- Two digit year from ISO standard © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 55. 55 IYY -- Three digit year from ISO standard IYYY -- Four digit year from ISO standard Y, YYY -- Year with comma YEAR -- Fully spelled out year CC -- Century Q -- No of quarters W -- No of weeks in month WW -- No of weeks in year IW -- No of weeks in year from ISO standard HH -- Hours MI -- Minutes SS -- Seconds FF -- Fractional seconds AM or PM -- Displays AM or PM depending upon time of day A.M or P.M -- Displays A.M or P.M depending upon time of day AD or BC -- Displays AD or BC depending upon the date A.D or B.C -- Displays AD or BC depending upon the date FM -- Prefix to month or day, suppresses padding of month or day TH -- Suffix to a number SP -- suffix to a number to be spelled out SPTH -- Suffix combination of TH and SP to be both spelled out THSP -- same as SPTH Ex: SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'dd month yyyy hh:mi:ss am dy') from dual; TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DD MONTH YYYYHH:MI ---------------------------------------------------- 24 december 2006 02:03:23 pm sun SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'dd month year') from dual; TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDMONTHYEAR') ------------------------------------------------------- © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 56. 56 24 december two thousand six SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'dd fmmonth year') from dual; TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DD FMMONTH YEAR') ------------------------------------------------------- 24 december two thousand six SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'ddth DDTH') from dual; TO_CHAR(S ------------ 24th 24TH SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'ddspth DDSPTH') from dual; TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDSPTHDDSPTH ------------------------------------------ twenty-fourth TWENTY-FOURTH SQL> select to_char(sysdate,'ddsp Ddsp DDSP ') from dual; TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'DDSPDDSPDDSP') ------------------------------------------------ twenty-four Twenty-Four TWENTY-FOUR i) TO_DATE This will be used to convert the string into data format. Syntax: to_date (date) Ex: SQL> select to_char(to_date('24/dec/2006','dd/mon/yyyy'), 'dd * month * day') from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 57. 57 TO_CHAR(TO_DATE('24/DEC/20 -------------------------- 24 * december * Sunday -- If you are not using to_char oracle will display output in default date format. j) ADD_MONTHS This will add the specified months to the given date. Syntax: add_months (date, no_of_months) Ex: SQL> select add_months(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), 5) from dual; ADD_MONTHS ---------------- 11-JUN-90 SQL> select add_months(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), -5) from dual; ADD_MONTH --------------- 11-AUG-89  If no_of_months is zero then it will display the same date.  If no_of_months is null then it will display nothing. k) MONTHS_BETWEEN This will give difference of months between two dates. Syntax: months_between (date1, date2) Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 58. 58 SQL> select months_between(to_date('11-aug-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), to_date('11- jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy')) from dual; MONTHS_BETWEEN(TO_DATE('11-AUG-1990','DD-MON-YYYY'),TO_DATE('11-JAN- 1990','DD-MON-YYYY')) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 SQL> select months_between(to_date('11-jan-1990','dd-mon-yyyy'), to_date('11- aug-1990','dd-mon-yyyy')) from dual; MONTHS_BETWEEN(TO_DATE('11-JAN-1990','DD-MON-YYYY'),TO_DATE('11-AUG- 1990','DD-MON-YYYY')) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -7 l) NEXT_DAY This will produce next day of the given day from the specified date. Syntax: next_day (date, day) Ex: SQL> select next_day(to_date('24-dec-2006','dd-mon-yyyy'),'sun') from dual; NEXT_DAY( ------------- 31-DEC-06 -- If the day parameter is null then it will display nothing. m) LAST_DAY This will produce last day of the given date. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 59. 59 Syntax: last_day (date) Ex: SQL> select last_day(to_date('24-dec-2006','dd-mon-yyyy'),'sun') from dual; LAST_DAY( ------------- 31-DEC-06 n) EXTRACT This is used to extract a portion of the date value. Syntax: extract ((year | month | day | hour | minute | second), date) Ex: SQL> select extract(year from sysdate) from dual; EXTRACT(YEARFROMSYSDATE) ------------------------------------ 2006 -- You can extract only one value at a time. o) GREATEST This will give the greatest date. Syntax: greatest (date1, date2, date3 … daten) Ex: SQL> select greatest(to_date('11-jan-90','dd-mon-yy'),to_date('11-mar-90','dd- mon-yy'),to_date('11-apr-90','dd-mon-yy')) from dual; GREATEST( ------------- © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 60. 60 11-APR-90 p) LEAST This will give the least date. Syntax: least (date1, date2, date3 … daten) Ex: SQL> select least(to_date('11-jan-90','dd-mon-yy'),to_date('11-mar-90','dd-mon- yy'),to_date('11-apr-90','dd-mon-yy')) from dual; LEAST( ------------- 11-JAN-90 q) ROUND Round will rounds the date to which it was equal to or greater than the given date. Syntax: round (date, (day | month | year)) If the second parameter was year then round will checks the month of the given date in the following ranges. JAN -- JUN JUL -- DEC If the month falls between JAN and JUN then it returns the first day of the current year. If the month falls between JUL and DEC then it returns the first day of the next year. If the second parameter was month then round will checks the day of the given date in the following ranges. 1 -- 15 16 -- 31 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 61. 61 If the day falls between 1 and 15 then it returns the first day of the current month. If the day falls between 16 and 31 then it returns the first day of the next month. If the second parameter was day then round will checks the week day of the given date in the following ranges. SUN -- WED THU -- SUN If the week day falls between SUN and WED then it returns the previous sunday. If the weekday falls between THU and SUN then it returns the next sunday.  If the second parameter was null then it returns nothing.  If the you are not specifying the second parameter then round will resets the time to the begining of the current day in case of user specified date.  If the you are not specifying the second parameter then round will resets the time to the begining of the next day in case of sysdate. Ex: SQL> select round(to_date('24-dec-04','dd-mon-yy'),'year'), round(to_date('11-mar- 06','dd-mon-yy'),'year') from dual; ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_ ------------ --------------- 01-JAN-05 01-JAN-06 SQL> select round(to_date('11-jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month'), round(to_date('18- jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month') from dual; ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_ ------------- --------------- 01-JAN-04 01-FEB-04 SQL> select round(to_date('26-dec-06','dd-mon-yy'),'day'), round(to_date('29-dec- 06','dd-mon-yy'),'day') from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 62. 62 ROUND(TO_ ROUND(TO_ -------------- -------------- 24-DEC-06 31-DEC-06 SQL> select to_char(round(to_date('24-dec-06','dd-mon-yy')), 'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from dual; TO_CHAR(ROUND(TO_DATE(' --------------------------------- 24 dec 2006 12:00:00 am r) TRUNC Trunc will chops off the date to which it was equal to or less than the given date. Syntax: trunc (date, (day | month | year))  If the second parameter was year then it always returns the first day of the current year.  If the second parameter was month then it always returns the first day of the current month.  If the second parameter was day then it always returns the previous sunday.  If the second parameter was null then it returns nothing.  If the you are not specifying the second parameter then trunk will resets the time to the begining of the current day. Ex: SQL> select trunc(to_date('24-dec-04','dd-mon-yy'),'year'), trunc(to_date('11-mar- 06','dd-mon-yy'),'year') from dual; TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_ ------------- -------------- 01-JAN-04 01-JAN-06 SQL> select trunc(to_date('11-jan-04','dd-mon-yy'),'month'), trunc(to_date('18-jan- 04','dd-mon-yy'),'month') from dual; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 63. 63 TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_ ------------- ------------- 01-JAN-04 01-JAN-04 SQL> select trunc(to_date('26-dec-06','dd-mon-yy'),'day'), trunc(to_date('29-dec- 06','dd-mon-yy'),'day') from dual; TRUNC(TO_ TRUNC(TO_ ------------- -------------- 24-DEC-06 24-DEC-06 SQL> select to_char(trunc(to_date('24-dec-06','dd-mon-yy')), 'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from dual; TO_CHAR(TRUNC(TO_DATE(' --------------------------------- 24 dec 2006 12:00:00 am s) NEW_TIME This will give the desired timezone’s date and time. Syntax: new_time (date, current_timezone, desired_timezone) Available timezones are as follows. TIMEZONES AST/ADT -- Atlantic standard/day light time BST/BDT -- Bering standard/day light time CST/CDT -- Central standard/day light time EST/EDT -- Eastern standard/day light time GMT -- Greenwich mean time HST/HDT -- Alaska-Hawaii standard/day light time MST/MDT -- Mountain standard/day light time NST -- Newfoundland standard time PST/PDT -- Pacific standard/day light time © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 64. 64 YST/YDT -- Yukon standard/day light time Ex: SQL> select to_char(new_time(sysdate,'gmt','yst'),'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from dual; TO_CHAR(NEW_TIME(SYSDAT ----------------------------------- 24 dec 2006 02:51:20 pm SQL> select to_char(new_time(sysdate,'gmt','est'),'dd mon yyyy hh:mi:ss am') from dual; TO_CHAR(NEW_TIME(SYSDAT ----------------------- 24 dec 2006 06:51:26 pm t) COALESCE This will give the first non-null date. Syntax: coalesce (date1, date2, date3 … daten) Ex: SQL> select coalesce('12-jan-90','13-jan-99'), coalesce(null,'12-jan-90','23-mar- 98',null) from dual; COALESCE( COALESCE( ------------- ------------ 12-jan-90 12-jan-90 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS  Uid  User  Vsize © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 65. 65  Rank  Dense_rank a) UID This will returns the integer value corresponding to the user currently logged in. Ex: SQL> select uid from dual; UID ---------- 319 b) USER This will returns the login’s user name. Ex: SQL> select user from dual; USER ---------------- SAKETH c) VSIZE This will returns the number of bytes in the expression. Ex: SQL> select vsize(123), vsize('computer'), vsize('12-jan-90') from dual; VSIZE(123) VSIZE('COMPUTER') VSIZE('12-JAN-90') ------------- ----------------------- ---------------------- 3 8 9 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 66. 66 d) RANK This will give the non-sequential ranking. Ex: SQL> select rownum,sal from (select sal from emp order by sal desc); ROWNUM SAL ---------- ---------- 1 5000 2 3000 3 3000 4 2975 5 2850 6 2450 7 1600 8 1500 9 1300 10 1250 11 1250 12 1100 13 1000 14 950 15 800 SQL> select rank(2975) within group(order by sal desc) from emp; RANK(2975)WITHINGROUP(ORDERBYSALDESC) --------------------------------------------------------- 4 d) DENSE_RANK This will give the sequential ranking. Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 67. 67 SQL> select dense_rank(2975) within group(order by sal desc) from emp; DENSE_RANK(2975)WITHINGROUP(ORDERBYSALDESC) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 3 CONVERSION FUNCTIONS  Bin_to_num  Chartorowid  Rowidtochar  To_number  To_char  To_date a) BIN_TO_NUM This will convert the binary value to its numerical equivalent. Syntax: bin_to_num( binary_bits) Ex: SQL> select bin_to_num(1,1,0) from dual; BIN_TO_NUM(1,1,0) ------------------------ 6  If all the bits are zero then it produces zero.  If all the bits are null then it produces an error. b) CHARTOROWID This will convert a character string to act like an internal oracle row identifier or rowid. c) ROWIDTOCHAR © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 68. 68 This will convert an internal oracle row identifier or rowid to character string. d) TO_NUMBER This will convert a char or varchar to number. e) TO_CHAR This will convert a number or date to character string. f) TO_DATE This will convert a number, char or varchar to a date. GROUP FUNCTIONS  Sum  Avg  Max  Min  Count Group functions will be applied on all the rows but produces single output. a) SUM This will give the sum of the values of the specified column. Syntax: sum (column) Ex: SQL> select sum(sal) from emp; SUM(SAL) © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 69. 69 ---------- 38600 b) AVG This will give the average of the values of the specified column. Syntax: avg (column) Ex: SQL> select avg(sal) from emp; AVG(SAL) --------------- 2757.14286 c) MAX This will give the maximum of the values of the specified column. Syntax: max (column) Ex: SQL> select max(sal) from emp; MAX(SAL) ---------- 5000 d) MIN This will give the minimum of the values of the specified column. Syntax: min (column) Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 70. 70 SQL> select min(sal) from emp; MIN(SAL) ---------- 500 e) COUNT This will give the count of the values of the specified column. Syntax: count (column) Ex: SQL> select count(sal),count(*) from emp; COUNT(SAL) COUNT(*) -------------- ------------ 14 14 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 71. 71 CONSTRAINTS Constraints are categorized as follows. Domain integrity constraints  Not null  Check Entity integrity constraints  Unique  Primary key Referential integrity constraints  Foreign key Constraints are always attached to a column not a table. We can add constraints in three ways.  Column level -- along with the column definition  Table level -- after the table definition  Alter level -- using alter command While adding constraints you need not specify the name but the type only, oracle will internally name the constraint. If you want to give a name to the constraint, you have to use the constraint clause. NOT NULL © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 72. 72 This is used to avoid null values. We can add this constraint in column level only. Ex: SQL> create table student(no number(2) not null, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) constraint nn not null, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); CHECK This is used to insert the values based on specified condition. We can add this constraint in all three levels. Ex: COLUMN LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3) check (marks > 300)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3) constraint ch check(marks > 300)); TABLE LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), check (marks > 300)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint ch check(marks > 300)); ALTER LEVEL SQL> alter table student add check(marks>300); SQL> alter table student add constraint ch check(marks>300); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 73. 73 UNIQUE This is used to avoid duplicates but it allow nulls. We can add this constraint in all three levels. Ex: COLUMN LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) unique, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) constraint un unique, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); TABLE LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), unique(no)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint un unique(no)); ALTER LEVEL SQL> alter table student add unique(no); SQL> alter table student add constraint un unique(no); PRIMARY KEY  This is used to avoid duplicates and nulls. This will work as combination of unique and not null.  Primary key always attached to the parent table.  We can add this constraint in all three levels. Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 74. 74 COLUMN LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) primary key, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) constraint pk primary key, name varchar(10), marks number(3)); TABLE LEVEL SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), primary key(no)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint pk primary key(no)); ALTER LEVEL SQL> alter table student add primary key(no); SQL> alter table student add constraint pk primary key(no); FOREIGN KEY  This is used to reference the parent table primary key column which allows duplicates.  Foreign key always attached to the child table.  We can add this constraint in table and alter levels only. Ex: TABLE LEVEL SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno)); SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno)); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 75. 75 ALTER LEVEL SQL> alter table emp add foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno); SQL> alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno); Once the primary key and foreign key relationship has been created then you can not remove any parent record if the dependent childs exists. USING ON DELTE CASCADE By using this clause you can remove the parent record even it childs exists. Because when ever you remove parent record oracle automatically removes all its dependent records from child table, if this clause is present while creating foreign key constraint. Ex: TABLE LEVEL SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete cascade); SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete cascade); ALTER LEVEL SQL> alter table emp add foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete cascade; SQL> alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno) references dept(deptno) on delete cascade; COMPOSITE KEYS A composite key can be defined on a combination of columns. We can define composite keys on entity integrity and referential integrity constraints. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 76. 76 Composite key can be defined in table and alter levels only. Ex: UNIQUE (TABLE LEVEL) SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), unique(no,name)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint un unique(no,name)); UNIQUE (ALTER LEVEL) SQL> alter table student add unique(no,name); SQL> alter table student add constraint un unique(no,name); PRIMARY KEY (TABLE LEVEL) SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), primary key(no,name)); SQL> create table student(no number(2) , name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint pk primary key(no,name)); PRIMARY KEY (ALTER LEVEL) SQL> alter table student add primary key(no,anme); SQL> alter table student add constraint pk primary key(no,name); FOREIGN KEY (TABLE LEVEL) SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), dname varchar(10), primary key(empno), foreign key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname)); SQL> create table emp(empno number(2), ename varchar(10), deptno number(2), dname varchar(10), constraint pk primary key(empno), constraint fk foreign key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname)); FOREIGN KEY (ALTER LEVEL) © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 77. 77 SQL> alter table emp add foreign key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname); SQL> alter table emp add constraint fk foreign key(deptno,dname) references dept(deptno,dname); DEFERRABLE CONSTRAINTS Each constraint has two additional attributes to support deferred checking of constraints.  Deferred initially immediate  Deferred initially deferred Deferred initially immediate checks for constraint violation at the time of insert. Deferred initially deferred checks for constraint violation at the time of commit. Ex: SQL> create table student(no number(2), name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint un unique(no) deferred initially immediate); SQL> create table student(no number(2), name varchar(10), marks number(3), constraint un unique(no) deferred initially deferred); SQL> alter table student add constraint un unique(no) deferrable initially deferred; SQL> set constraints all immediate; This will enable all the constraints violations at the time of inserting. SQL> set constraints all deferred; This will enable all the constraints violations at the time of commit. OPERATIONS WITH CONSTRAINTS Possible operations with constraints as follows.  Enable  Disable  Enforce  Drop ENABLE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 78. 78 This will enable the constraint. Before enable, the constraint will check the existing data. Ex: SQL> alter table student enable constraint un; DISABLE This will disable the constraint. Ex: SQL> alter table student enable constraint un; ENFORCE This will enforce the constraint rather than enable for future inserts or updates. This will not check for existing data while enforcing data. Ex: SQL> alter table student enforce constraint un; DROP This will remove the constraint. Ex: SQL> alter table student drop constraint un; Once the table is dropped, constraints automatically will drop. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 79. 79 CASE AND DEFAULT CASE Case is similar to decode but easier to understand while going through coding Ex: SQL> Select sal, Case sal When 500 then ‘low’ When 5000 then ‘high’ Else ‘medium’ End case From emp; SAL CASE ----- -------- 500 low 2500 medium 2000 medium 3500 medium 3000 medium 5000 high 4000 medium 5000 high 1800 medium © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 80. 80 1200 medium 2000 medium 2700 medium 2200 medium 3200 medium DEFAULT Default can be considered as a substitute behavior of not null constraint when applied to new rows being entered into the table. When you define a column with the default keyword followed by a value, you are actually telling the database that, on insert if a row was not assigned a value for this column, use the default value that you have specified. Default is applied only during insertion of new rows. Ex: SQL> create table student(no number(2) default 11,name varchar(2)); SQL> insert into student values(1,'a'); SQL> insert into student(name) values('b'); SQL> select * from student; NO NAME ------ --------- 1 a 11 b SQL> insert into student values(null, ‘c’); SQL> select * from student; NO NAME ------ --------- 1 a © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 81. 81 11 b C -- Default can not override nulls. ABSTRACT DATA TYPES Some times you may want type which holds all types of data including numbers, chars and special characters something like this. You can not achieve this using pre-defined types. You can define custom types which holds your desired data. Ex: Suppose in a table we have address column which holds hno and city information. We will define a custom type which holds both numeric as well as char data. CREATING ADT SQL> create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10)); / CREATING TABLE BASED ON ADT SQL> create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),address addr); INSERTING DATA INTO ADT TABLES SQL> insert into student values(1,'a',addr(111,'hyd')); SQL> insert into student values(2,'b',addr(222,'bang')); SQL> insert into student values(3,'c',addr(333,'delhi')); SELECTING DATA FROM ADT TABLES SQL> select * from student; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 82. 82 NO NAME ADDRESS(HNO, CITY) --- ------- ------------------------- 1 a ADDR(111, 'hyd') 2 b ADDR(222, 'bang') 3 c ADDR(333, 'delhi') SQL> select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s; NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY ---- ------- ----------------- ---------------- 1 a 111 hyd 2 b 222 bang 3 c 333 delhi UPDATE WITH ADT TABLES SQL> update student s set s.address.city = 'bombay' where s.address.hno = 333; SQL> select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s; NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY ---- ------- ----------------- ---------------- 1 a 111 hyd 2 b 222 bang 3 c 333 bombay DELETE WITH ADT TABLES SQL> delete student s where s.address.hno = 111; SQL> select no,name,s.address.hno,s.address.city from student s; NO NAME ADDRESS.HNO ADDRESS.CITY ---- ------- ----------------- ---------------- 2 b 222 bang 3 c 333 bombay DROPPING ADT © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 83. 83 SQL> drop type addr; OBJECT VIEWS AND METHODS OBJECT VIEWS If you want to implement objects with the existing table, object views come into picture. You define the object and create a view which relates this object to the existing table nothing but object view. Object views are used to relate the user defined objects to the existing table. Ex: 1) Assume that the table student has already been created with the following columns SQL> create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),hno number(3),city varchar(10)); 2) Create the following types SQL> create type addr as object(hno number(2),city varchar(10));/ SQL> create type stud as object(name varchar(10),address addr);/ 3) Relate the objects to the student table by creating the object view SQL> create view student_ov(no,stud_info) as select no,stud(name,addr(hno,city)) from student; 4) Now you can insert data into student table in two ways a) By regular insert SQL> Insert into student values(1,’sudha’,111,’hyd’); b) By using object view SQL> Insert into student_ov values(1,stud(‘sudha’,addr(111,’hyd’))); METHODS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 84. 84 You can define methods which are nothing but functions in types and apply in the tables which holds the types; Ex: 1) Defining methods in types SQL> Create type stud as object(name varchar(10),marks number(3), Member function makrs_f(marks in number) return number, Pragma restrict_references(marks_f,wnds,rnds,wnps,fnps));/ 2) Defining type body SQL> Create type body stud as Member function marks_f(marks in number) return number is Begin Return (marks+100); End marks_f; End;/ 3) Create a table using stud type SQL> Create table student(no number(2),info stud); 4) Insert some data into student table SQL> Insert into student values(1,stud(‘sudha’,100)); 5) Using method in select SQL> Select s.info.marks_f(s.info.marks) from student s; -- Here we are using the pragma restrict_references to avoid the writes to the Database. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 85. 85 VARRAYS AND NESTED TABLES VARRAYS A varying array allows you to store repeating attributes of a record in a single row but with limit. Ex: 1) We can create varrays using oracle types as well as user defined types. a) Varray using pre-defined types SQL> Create type va as varray(5) of varchar(10);/ b) Varrays using user defined types SQL> Create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10));/ SQL> Create type va as varray(5) of addr;/ 2) Using varray in table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),address va); 3) Inserting values into varray table SQL> Insert into student values(1,’sudha’,va(addr(111,’hyd’))); SQL> Insert into student values(2,’jagan’,va(addr(111,’hyd’),addr(222,’bang’))); 4) Selecting data from varray table SQL> Select * from student; -- This will display varray column data along with varray and adt; SQL> Select no,name, s.* from student s1, table(s1.address) s; -- This will display in general format 5) Instead of s.* you can specify the columns in varray SQL> Select no,name, s.hno,s.city from student s1,table(s1.address) s; -- Update and delete not possible in varrays. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 86. 86 -- Here we used table function which will take the varray column as input for producing output excluding varray and types. NESTED TABLES A nested table is, as its name implies, a table within a table. In this case it is a table that is represented as a column within another table. Nested table has the same effect of varrays but has no limit. Ex: 1) We can create nested tables using oracle types and user defined types which has no limit. a) Nested tables using pre-defined types SQL> Create type nt as table of varchar(10);/ b) Nested tables using user defined types SQL> Create type addr as object(hno number(3),city varchar(10));/ SQL> Create type nt as table of addr;/ 2) Using nested table in table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10),address nt) nested table address store as student_temp; 3) Inserting values into table which has nested table SQL> Insert into student values (1,’sudha’,nt(addr(111,’hyd’))); SQL> Insert into student values (2,’jagan’,nt(addr(111,’hyd’),addr(222,’bang’))); 4) Selecting data from table which has nested table SQL> Select * from student; -- This will display nested table column data along with nested table and adt; SQL> Select no,name, s.* from student s1, table(s1.address) s; -- This will display in general format 5) Instead of s.* you can specify the columns in nested table SQL> Select no,name, s.hno,s.city from student s1,table(s1.address) s; 6) Inserting nested table data to the existing row SQL> Insert into table(select address from student where no=1) © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 87. 87 values(addr(555,’chennai’)); 7) Update in nested tables SQL> Update table(select address from student where no=2) s set s.city=’bombay’ where s.hno = 222; 8) Delete in nested table SQL> Delete table(select address from student where no=3) s where s.hno=333; DATA MODEL  ALL_COLL_TYPES  ALL_TYPES  DBA_COLL_TYPES  DBA_TYPES  USER_COLL_TYPES  USER_TYPES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 88. 88 FLASHBACK QUERY Used to retrieve the data which has been already committed with out going for recovery. Flashbacks are of two types  Time base flashback  SCN based flashback (SCN stands for System Change Number) Ex: 1) Using time based flashback a) SQL> Select *from student; -- This will display all the rows b) SQL> Delete student; c) SQL> Commit; -- this will commit the work. d) SQL> Select *from student; -- Here it will display nothing e) Then execute the following procedures SQL> Exec dbms_flashback.enable_at_time(sysdate-2/1440) f) SQL> Select *from student; -- Here it will display the lost data -- The lost data will come but the current system time was used g) SQL> Exec dbms_flashback.disable -- Here we have to disable the flashback to enable it again 2) Using SCN based flashback a) Declare a variable to store SCN SQL> Variable s number © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 89. 89 b) Get the SCN SQL> Exec :s := exec dbms_flashback.get_system_change_number c) To see the SCN SQL> Print s d) Then execute the following procedures SQL> Exec dbms_flashback.enable_at_system_change_number(:s) SQL> Exec dbms_flashback.disable EXTERNAL TABLES You can user external table feature to access external files as if they are tables inside the database. When you create an external table, you define its structure and location with in oracle. When you query the table, oracle reads the external table and returns the results just as if the data had been stored with in the database. ACCESSING EXTERNAL TABLE DATA To access external files from within oracle, you must first use the create directory command to define a directory object pointing to the external file location Users who will access the external files must have the read and write privilege on the directory. Ex: CREATING DIRECTORY AND OS LEVEL FILE SQL> Sqlplus system/manager SQL> Create directory saketh_dir as ‘/Visdb/visdb/9.2.0/external’; SQL> Grant all on directory saketh_dir to saketh; SQL> Conn saketh/saketh SQL> Spool dept.lst SQL> Select deptno || ‘,’ || dname || ‘,’ || loc from dept; SQL> Spool off CREATING EXTERNAL TABLE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 90. 90 SQL> Create table dept_ext (deptno number(2), Dname varchar(14), Loc varchar(13)) Organization external ( type oracle_loader Default directory saketh_dir Access parameters ( records delimited by newline Fields terminated by “,” ( deptno number(2), Dname varchar(14), Loc varchar(13))) Location (‘/Visdb/visdb/9.2.0/dept.lst’)); SELECTING DATA FROM EXTERNAL TABLE SQL> select * from dept_ext; This will read from dept.lst which is a operating system level file. LIMITATIONS ON EXTERNAL TABLES a) You can not perform insert, update, and delete operations a) Indexing not possible b) Constraints not possible BENEFITS OF EXTERNAL TABLES a) Queries of external tables complete very quickly even though a full table scan id required with each access b) You can join external tables to each other or to standard tables © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 91. 91 REF DEREF VALUE REF  The ref function allows referencing of existing row objects.  Each of the row objects has an object id value assigned to it.  The object id assigned can be seen by using ref function. DEREF  The deref function performs opposite action.  It takes a reference value of object id and returns the value of the row objects. VALUE  Even though the primary table is object table, still it displays the rows in general format.  To display the entire structure of the object, this will be used. Ex: 1) create vendot_adt type SQL> Create type vendor_adt as object (vendor_code number(2), vendor_name varchar(2), vendor_address varchar(10));/ 2) create object tables vendors and vendors1 SQL> Create table vendors of vendor_adt; SQL> Create table vendors1 of vendor_adt; 3) insert the data into object tables SQL> insert into vendors values(1, ‘a’, ‘hyd’); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 92. 92 SQL> insert into vendors values(2, ‘b’, ‘bang’); SQL> insert into vendors1 values(3, ‘c’, ‘delhi’); SQL> insert into vendors1 values(4, ‘d’, ‘chennai’); 4) create another table orders which holds the vendor_adt type also. SQL> Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt); Or SQL> Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt with rowid); 5) insert the data into orders table The vendor_info column in the following syntaxes will store object id of any table which is referenced by vendor_adt object ( both vendors and vendors1). SQL> insert into orders values(11,(select ref(v) from vendors v where vendor_code = 1)); SQL> insert into orders values(12,(select ref(v) from vendors v where vendor_code = 2)); SQL> insert into orders values(13,(select ref(v1) from vendors1 v1 where vendor_code = 1)); SQL> insert into orders values(14,(select ref(v1) from vendors1 v1 where vendor_code = 1)); 6) To see the object ids of vendor table SQL> Select ref(V) from vendors v; 7) If you see the vendor_info of orders it will show only the object ids not the values, to see the values SQL> Select deref(o.vendor_info) from orders o; 8) Even though the vendors table is object table it will not show the adt along with data, to see the data along with the adt SQL>Select * from vendors; This will give the data without adt. SQL>Select value(v) from vendors v; This will give the columns data along wih the type. REF CONSTRAINTS  Ref can also acts as constraint. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 93. 93  Even though vendors1 also holding vendor_adt, the orders table will store the object ids of vendors only because it is constrained to that table only.  The vendor_info column in the following syntaxes will store object ids of vendors only. SQL> Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt scope is vendors); Or SQL> Create table orders (order_no number(2), vendor_info ref vendor_adt constraint fk references vendors); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 94. 94 OBJECT VIEWS WITH REFERENCES To implement the objects and the ref constraints to the existing tables, what we can do? Simply drop the both tables and recreate with objects and ref constrains. But you can achieve this with out dropping the tables and without losing the data by creating object views with references. Ex: a) Create the following tables SQL> Create table student1(no number(2) primary key,name varchar(2),marks number(3)); SQL> Create table student2(no number(2) primary key,hno number(3),city varchar(10),id number(2),foreign Key(id) references student1(no)); b) Insert the records into both tables SQL> insert into student1(1,’a’,100); SQL> insert into student1(2,’b’,200); SQL> insert into student2(11,111,’hyd’,1); SQL> insert into student2(12,222,’bang’,2); SQL> insert into student2(13,333,’bombay’,1); c) Create the type SQL> create or replace type stud as object(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks number(3));/ d) Generating OIDs SQL> Create or replace view student1_ov of stud with object identifier(or id) (no) as Select * from Student1; e) Generating references SQL> Create or replace view student2_ov as select no,hno,city, © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 95. 95 make_ref(student1_ov,id) id from Student2; d) Query the following SQL> select *from student1_ov; SQL> select ref(s) from student1_ov s; SQL> select values(s) from student1_ov; SQ> select *from student2_ov; SQL> select deref(s.id) from student2_ov s; PARTITIONS A single logical table can be split into a number of physically separate pieces based on ranges of key values. Each of the parts of the table is called a partition. A non-partitioned table can not be partitioned later. TYPES  Range partitions  List partitions  Hash partitions  Sub partitions ADVANTAGES  Reducing downtime for scheduled maintenance, which allows maintenance operations to be carried out on selected partitions while other partitions are available to users.  Reducing downtime due to data failure, failure of a particular partition will no way affect other partitions.  Partition independence allows for concurrent use of the various partitions for various purposes. ADVANTAGES OF PARTITIONS BY STORING THEM IN DIFFERENT TABLESPACES  Reduces the possibility of data corruption in multiple partitions.  Back up and recovery of each partition can be done independently. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 96. 96 DISADVANTAGES  Partitioned tables cannot contain any columns with long or long raw datatypes, LOB types or object types. RANGE PARTITIONS a) Creating range partitioned table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by range(no) (partition p1 values less than(10), partition p2 values less than(20), partition p3 values less than(30),partition p4 values less than(maxvalue)); ** if you are using maxvalue for the last partition, you can not add a partition. b) Inserting records into range partitioned table SQL> Insert into student values(1,’a’); -- this will go to p1 SQL> Insert into student values(11,’b’); -- this will go to p2 SQL> Insert into student values(21,’c’); -- this will go to p3 SQL> Insert into student values(31,’d’); -- this will go to p4 c) Retrieving records from range partitioned table SQL> Select *from student; SQL> Select *from student partition(p1); d) Possible operations with range partitions  Add  Drop  Truncate  Rename  Split  Move  Exchange e) Adding a partition SQL> Alter table student add partition p5 values less than(40); f) Dropping a partition SQL> Alter table student drop partition p4; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 97. 97 g) Renaming a partition SQL> Alter table student rename partition p3 to p6; h) Truncate a partition SQL> Alter table student truncate partition p6; i) Splitting a partition SQL> Alter table student split partition p2 at(15) into (partition p21,partition p22); j) Exchanging a partition SQL> Alter table student exchange partition p1 with table student2; k) Moving a partition SQL> Alter table student move partition p21 tablespace saketh_ts; LIST PARTITIONS a) Creating list partitioned table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by list(no) (partition p1 values(1,2,3,4,5), partition p2 values(6,7,8,9,10),partition p3 values(11,12,13,14,15), partition p4 values(16,17,18,19,20)); b) Inserting records into list partitioned table SQL> Insert into student values(1,’a’); -- this will go to p1 SQL> Insert into student values(6,’b’); -- this will go to p2 SQL> Insert into student values(11,’c’); -- this will go to p3 SQL> Insert into student values(16,’d’); -- this will go to p4 c) Retrieving records from list partitioned table SQL> Select *from student; SQL> Select *from student partition(p1); d) Possible operations with list partitions  Add  Drop  Truncate  Rename  Move  Exchange e) Adding a partition SQL> Alter table student add partition p5 values(21,22,23,24,25); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 98. 98 f) Dropping a partition SQL> Alter table student drop partition p4; g) Renaming a partition SQL> Alter table student rename partition p3 to p6; h) Truncate a partition SQL> Alter table student truncate partition p6; i) Exchanging a partition SQL> Alter table student exchange partition p1 with table student2; j) Moving a partition SQL> Alter table student move partition p2 tablespace saketh_ts; HASH PARTITIONS a) Creating hash partitioned table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2)) partition by hash(no) partitions 5; Here oracle automatically gives partition names like SYS_P1 SYS_P2 SYS_P3 SYS_P4 SYS_P5 b) Inserting records into hash partitioned table it will insert the records based on hash function calculated by taking the partition key SQL> Insert into student values(1,’a’); SQL> Insert into student values(6,’b’); SQL> Insert into student values(11,’c’); SQL> Insert into student values(16,’d’); c) Retrieving records from hash partitioned table SQL> Select *from student; SQL> Select *from student partition(sys_p1); d) Possible operations with hash partitions  Add  Truncate © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 99. 99  Rename  Move  Exchange e) Adding a partition SQL> Alter table student add partition p6 ; f) Renaming a partition SQL> Alter table student rename partition p6 to p7; g) Truncate a partition SQL> Alter table student truncate partition p7; h) Exchanging a partition SQL> Alter table student exchange partition sys_p1 with table student2; i) Moving a partition SQL> Alter table student move partition sys_p2 tablespace saketh_ts; SUB-PARTITIONS WITH RANGE AND HASH Subpartitions clause is used by hash only. We can not create subpartitions with list and hash partitions. a) Creating subpartitioned table SQL> Create table student(no number(2),name varchar(2),marks number(3)) Partition by range(no) subpartition by hash(name) subpartitions 3 (Partition p1 values less than(10),partition p2 values less than(20)); This will create two partitions p1 and p2 with three subpartitions for each partition P1 – SYS_SUBP1 SYS_SUBP2 SYS_SUBP3 P2 – SYS_SUBP4 SYS_SUBP5 SYS_SUBP6 ** if you are using maxvalue for the last partition, you can not add a partition. b) Inserting records into subpartitioned table SQL> Insert into student values(1,’a’); -- this will go to p1 SQL> Insert into student values(11,’b’); -- this will go to p2 c) Retrieving records from subpartitioned table © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 100. 100 SQL> Select *from student; SQL> Select *from student partition(p1); SQL> Select *from student subpartition(sys_subp1); d) Possible operations with subpartitions  Add  Drop  Truncate  Rename  Split e) Adding a partition SQL> Alter table student add partition p3 values less than(30); f) Dropping a partition SQL> Alter table student drop partition p3; g) Renaming a partition SQL> Alter table student rename partition p2 to p3; h) Truncate a partition SQL> Alter table student truncate partition p1; i) Splitting a partition SQL> Alter table student split partition p3 at(15) into (partition p31,partition p32); DATA MODEL  ALL_IND_PARTITIONS  ALL_IND_SUBPARTITIONS  ALL_TAB_PARTITIONS  ALL_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS  DBA_IND_PARTITIONS  DBA_IND_SUBPARTITIONS  DBA_TAB_PARTITIONS  DBA_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS  USER_IND_PARTITIONS  USER_IND_SUBPARTITIONS  USER_TAB_PARTITIONS  USER_TAB_SUBPARTITIONS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 101. 101 GROUP BY AND HAVING GROUP BY Using group by, we can create groups of related information. Columns used in select must be used with group by, otherwise it was not a group by expression. Ex: SQL> select deptno, sum(sal) from emp group by deptno; DEPTNO SUM(SAL) ---------- ---------- 10 8750 20 10875 30 9400 SQL> select deptno,job,sum(sal) from emp group by deptno,job; DEPTNO JOB SUM(SAL) ---------- --------- ---------- 10 CLERK 1300 10 MANAGER 2450 10 PRESIDENT 5000 20 ANALYST 6000 20 CLERK 1900 20 MANAGER 2975 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 102. 102 30 CLERK 950 30 MANAGER 2850 30 SALESMAN 5600 HAVING This will work as where clause which can be used only with group by because of absence of where clause in group by. Ex: SQL> select deptno,job,sum(sal) tsal from emp group by deptno,job having sum(sal) > 3000; DEPTNO JOB TSAL ---------- --------- ---------- 10 PRESIDENT 5000 20 ANALYST 6000 30 SALESMAN 5600 SQL> select deptno,job,sum(sal) tsal from emp group by deptno,job having sum(sal) > 3000 order by job; DEPTNO JOB TSAL ---------- --------- ---------- 20 ANALYST 6000 10 PRESIDENT 5000 30 SALESMAN 5600 ORDER OF EXECUTION  Group the rows together based on group by clause.  Calculate the group functions for each group.  Choose and eliminate the groups based on the having clause.  Order the groups based on the specified column. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 103. 103 ROLLUP GROUPING CUBE These are the enhancements to the group by feature. USING ROLLUP This will give the salaries in each department in each job category along wih the total salary for individual departments and the total salary of all the departments. SQL> Select deptno,job,sum(sal) from emp group by rollup(deptno,job); DEPTNO JOB SUM(SAL) ---------- --------- ---------- 10 CLERK 1300 10 MANAGER 2450 10 PRESIDENT 5000 10 8750 20 ANALYST 6000 20 CLERK 1900 20 MANAGER 2975 20 10875 30 CLERK 950 30 MANAGER 2850 30 SALESMAN 5600 30 9400 29025 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 104. 104 USING GROUPING In the above query it will give the total salary of the individual departments but with a blank in the job column and gives the total salary of all the departments with blanks in deptno and job columns. To replace these blanks with your desired string grouping will be used SQL> select decode(grouping(deptno),1,'All Depts',deptno),decode(grouping(job),1,'All jobs',job),sum(sal) from emp group by rollup(deptno,job); DECODE(GROUPING(DEPTNO),1,'ALLDEPTS',DEP DECODE(GR SUM(SAL) ----------------------------------- ---------------------------------- -------------- 10 CLERK 1300 10 MANAGER 2450 10 PRESIDENT 5000 10 All jobs 8750 20 ANALYST 6000 20 CLERK 1900 20 MANAGER 2975 20 All jobs 10875 30 CLERK 950 30 MANAGER 2850 30 SALESMAN 5600 30 All jobs 9400 All Depts All jobs 29025 Grouping will return 1 if the column which is specified in the grouping function has been used in rollup. Grouping will be used in association with decode. USING CUBE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 105. 105 This will give the salaries in each department in each job category, the total salary for individual departments, the total salary of all the departments and the salaries in each job category. SQL> select decode(grouping(deptno),1,’All Depts’,deptno),decode(grouping(job),1,’All Jobs’,job),sum(sal) from emp group by cube(deptno,job); DECODE(GROUPING(DEPTNO),1,'ALLDEPTS',DEP DECODE(GR SUM(SAL) ----------------------------------- ------------------------------------ ------------ 10 CLERK 1300 10 MANAGER 2450 10 PRESIDENT 5000 10 All Jobs 8750 20 ANALYST 6000 20 CLERK 1900 20 MANAGER 2975 20 All Jobs 10875 30 CLERK 950 30 MANAGER 2850 30 SALESMAN 5600 30 All Jobs 9400 All Depts ANALYST 6000 All Depts CLERK 4150 All Depts MANAGER 8275 All Depts PRESIDENT 5000 All Depts SALESMAN 5600 All Depts All Jobs 29025 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 106. 106 SET OPERATORS TYPES  Union  Union all  Intersect  Minus UNION This will combine the records of multiple tables having the same structure. Ex: SQL> select * from student1 union select * from student2; UNION ALL This will combine the records of multiple tables having the same structure but including duplicates. Ex: SQL> select * from student1 union all select * from student2; INTERSECT © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 107. 107 This will give the common records of multiple tables having the same structure. Ex: SQL> select * from student1 intersect select * from student2; MINUS This will give the records of a table whose records are not in other tables having the same structure. Ex: SQL> select * from student1 minus select * from student2; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 108. 108 VIEWS A view is a database object that is a logical representation of a table. It is delivered from a table but has no storage of its own and often may be used in the same manner as a table. A view takes the output of the query and treats it as a table, therefore a view can be thought of as a stored query or a virtual table. TYPES  Simple view  Complex view Simple view can be created from one table where as complex view can be created from multiple tables. WHY VIEWS?  Provides additional level of security by restricting access to a predetermined set of rows and/or columns of a table.  Hide the data complexity.  Simplify commands for the user. VIEWS WITHOUT DML © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 109. 109  Read only view  View with group by  View with aggregate functions  View with rownum  Partition view  View with distinct Ex: SQL> Create view dept_v as select *from dept with read only; SQL> Create view dept_v as select deptno, sum(sal) t_sal from emp group by deptno; SQL> Create view stud as select rownum no, name, marks from student; SQL> Create view student as select *from student1 union select *from student2; SQL> Create view stud as select distinct no,name from student; VIEWS WITH DML  View with not null column -- insert with out not null column not possible -- update not null column to null is not possible -- delete possible  View with out not null column which was in base table -- insert not possible -- update, delete possible  View with expression -- insert , update not possible -- delete possible  View with functions (except aggregate) -- insert, update not possible -- delete possible  View was created but the underlying table was dropped then we will get the message like “ view has errors ”.  View was created but the base table has been altered but still the view was with the initial definition, we have to replace the view to affect the changes.  Complex view (view with more than one table) -- insert not possible -- update, delete possible (not always) CREATING VIEW WITHOUT HAVING THE BASE TABLE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 110. 110 SQL> Create force view stud as select *From student; -- Once the base table was created then the view is validated. VIEW WITH CHECK OPTION CONSTRAINT SQL> Create view stud as select *from student where marks = 500 with check option constraint Ck; - Insert possible with marks value as 500 - Update possible excluding marks column - Delete possible DROPPING VIEWS SQL> drop view dept_v; DATA MODEL ALL_VIEW DBA_VIEW USER_VIEWS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 111. 111 SYNONYM AND SEQUENCE SYNONYM A synonym is a database object, which is used as an alias for a table, view or sequence. TYPES  Private  Public Private synonym is available to the particular user who creates. Public synonym is created by DBA which is available to all the users. ADVANTAGES  Hide the name and owner of the object.  Provides location transparency for remote objects of a distributed database. CREATE AND DROP SQL> create synonym s1 for emp; SQL> create public synonym s2 for emp; SQL> drop synonym s1; SEQUENCE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 112. 112 A sequence is a database object, which can generate unique, sequential integer values. It can be used to automatically generate primary key or unique key values. A sequence can be either in an ascending or descending order. Syntax: Create sequence <seq_name> [increment bty n] [start with n] [maxvalue n] [minvalue n] [cycle/nocycle] [cache/nocache]; By defalult the sequence starts with 1, increments by 1 with minvalue of 1 and with nocycle, nocache. Cache option pre-alloocates a set of sequence numbers and retains them in memory for faster access. Ex: SQL> create sequence s; SQL> create sequence s increment by 10 start with 100 minvalue 5 maxvalue 200 cycle cache 20; USING SEQUENCE SQL> create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10)); SQL> insert into student values(s.nextval, ‘saketh’);  Initially currval is not defined and nextval is starting value.  After that nextval and currval are always equal. CREATING ALPHA-NUMERIC SEQUENCE SQL> create sequence s start with 111234; SQL> Insert into student values (s.nextval || translate (s.nextval,’1234567890’,’abcdefghij’)); ALTERING SEQUENCE We can alter the sequence to perform the following.  Set or eliminate minvalue or maxvalue. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 113. 113  Change the increment value.  Change the number of cached sequence numbers. Ex: SQL> alter sequence s minvalue 5; SQL> alter sequence s increment by 2; SQL> alter sequence s cache 10; DROPPING SEQUENCE SQL> drop sequence s; JOINS  The purpose of a join is to combine the data across tables.  A join is actually performed by the where clause which combines the specified rows of tables.  If a join involves in more than two tables then oracle joins first two tables based on the joins condition and then compares the result with the next table and so on. TYPES • Equi join • Non-equi join • Self join • Natural join • Cross join • Outer join  Left outer  Right outer  Full outer • Inner join • Using clause • On clause Assume that we have the following tables. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 114. 114 SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC ------ ---------- ---------- 10 mkt hyd 20 fin bang 30 hr bombay SQL> select * from emp; EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR DEPTNO ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst 444 10 222 sudha clerk 333 20 333 jagan manager 111 10 444 madhu engineer 222 40 EQUI JOIN A join which contains an ‘=’ operator in the joins condition. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno=d.deptno; EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang USING CLAUSE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 115. 115 SQL> select empno,ename,job ,dname,loc from emp e join dept d using(deptno); EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang ON CLAUSE SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e join dept d on(e.deptno=d.deptno); EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang NON-EQUI JOIN A join which contains an operator other than ‘=’ in the joins condition. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno > d.deptno; EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 222 sudha clerk mkt hyd 444 madhu engineer mkt hyd 444 madhu engineer fin bang 444 madhu engineer hr bombay SELF JOIN Joining the table itself is called self join. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 116. 116 Ex: SQL> select e1.empno,e2.ename,e1.job,e2.deptno from emp e1,emp e2 where e1.empno=e2.mgr; EMPNO ENAME JOB DEPTNO ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 jagan analyst 10 222 madhu clerk 40 333 sudha manager 20 444 saketh engineer 10 NATURAL JOIN Natural join compares all the common columns. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp natural join dept; EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang CROSS JOIN This will gives the cross product. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp cross join dept; EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk mkt hyd © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 117. 117 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 444 madhu engineer mkt hyd 111 saketh analyst fin bang 222 sudha clerk fin bang 333 jagan manager fin bang 444 madhu engineer fin bang 111 saketh analyst hr bombay 222 sudha clerk hr bombay 333 jagan manager hr bombay 444 madhu engineer hr bombay OUTER JOIN Outer join gives the non-matching records along with matching records. LEFT OUTER JOIN This will display the all matching records and the records which are in left hand side table those that are not in right hand side table. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e left outer join dept d on(e.deptno=d.deptno); Or SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno=d.deptno(+); EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang 444 madhu engineer RIGHT OUTER JOIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 118. 118 This will display the all matching records and the records which are in right hand side table those that are not in left hand side table. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e right outer join dept d on(e.deptno=d.deptno); Or SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e,dept d where e.deptno(+) = d.deptno; EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang hr bombay FULL OUTER JOIN This will display the all matching records and the non-matching records from both tables. Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp e full outer join dept d on(e.deptno=d.deptno); EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang 444 madhu engineer hr bombay INNER JOIN This will display all the records that have matched. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 119. 119 Ex: SQL> select empno,ename,job,dname,loc from emp inner join dept using(deptno); EMPNO ENAME JOB DNAME LOC ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 111 saketh analyst mkt hyd 333 jagan manager mkt hyd 222 sudha clerk fin bang SUBQUERIES AND EXISTS SUBQUERIES  Nesting of queries, one within the other is termed as a subquery.  A statement containing a subquery is called a parent query.  Subqueries are used to retrieve data from tables that depend on the values in the table itself. TYPES  Single row subqueries  Multi row subqueries  Multiple subqueries  Correlated subqueries SINGLE ROW SUBQUERIES In single row subquery, it will return one value. Ex: SQL> select * from emp where sal > (select sal from emp where empno = 7566); EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 120. 120 ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------ ------- ---------- ---------- 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 19-APR-87 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17-NOV-81 5000 10 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03-DEC-81 3000 20 MULTI ROW SUBQUERIES In multi row subquery, it will return more than one value. In such cases we should include operators like any, all, in or not in between the comparision operator and the subquery. Ex: SQL> select * from emp where sal > any (select sal from emp where sal between 2500 and 4000); EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ----------- -------- ---------- ---------- 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02-APR-81 2975 20 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 19-APR-87 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17-NOV-81 5000 10 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03-DEC-81 3000 20 SQL> select * from emp where sal > all (select sal from emp where sal between 2500 and 4000); EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------- ------ ---------- ---------- 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17-NOV-81 5000 10 MULTIPLE SUBQUERIES There is no limit on the number of subqueries included in a where clause. It allows nesting of a query within a subquery. Ex: SQL> select * from emp where sal = (select max(sal) from emp where sal < (select © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 121. 121 max(sal) from emp)); EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------ ------- ---------- ---------- 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 19-APR-87 3000 20 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03-DEC-81 3000 20 CORRELATED SUBQUERIES A subquery is evaluated once for the entire parent statement where as a correlated subquery is evaluated once for every row processed by the parent statement. Ex: SQL> select distinct deptno from emp e where 5 <= (select count(ename) from emp where e.deptno = deptno); DEPTNO ---------- 20 30 EXISTS Exists function is a test for existence. This is a logical test for the return of rows from a query. Ex: Suppose we want to display the department numbers which has more than 4 employees. SQL> select deptno,count(*) from emp group by deptno having count(*) > 4; DEPTNO COUNT(*) --------- ---------- 20 5 30 6 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 122. 122 From the above query can you want to display the names of employees? SQL> select deptno,ename, count(*) from emp group by deptno,ename having count(*) > 4; no rows selected The above query returns nothing because combination of deptno and ename never return more than one count. The solution is to use exists which follows. SQL> select deptno,ename from emp e1 where exists (select * from emp e2 where e1.deptno=e2.deptno group by e2.deptno having count(e2.ename) > 4) order by deptno,ename; DEPTNO ENAME ---------- ---------- 20 ADAMS 20 FORD 20 JONES 20 SCOTT 20 SMITH 30 ALLEN 30 BLAKE 30 JAMES 30 MARTIN 30 TURNER 30 WARD NOT EXISTS SQL> select deptno,ename from emp e1 where not exists (select * from emp e2 where e1.deptno=e2.deptno group by e2.deptno having count(e2.ename) > 4) order by deptno,ename; DEPTNO ENAME © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 123. 123 --------- ---------- 10 CLARK 10 KING 10 MILLER WALKUP TREES AND INLINE VIEW WALKUP TREES Using hierarchical queries, you can retrieve data based on a natural hierarchical relationship between rows in a table. However, where a hierarchical relationship exists between the rows of a table, a process called tree walking enables the hierarchy to be constructed. Ex: SQL> select ename || '==>' || prior ename, level from emp start with ename = 'KING' connect by prior empno=mgr; ENAME||'==>'||PRIORENAM LEVEL ------------------------------------ -------- KING==> 1 JONES==>KING 2 SCOTT==>JONES 3 ADAMS==>SCOTT 4 FORD==>JONES 3 SMITH==>FORD 4 BLAKE==>KING 2 ALLEN==>BLAKE 3 WARD==>BLAKE 3 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 124. 124 MARTIN==>BLAKE 3 TURNER==>BLAKE 3 JAMES==>BLAKE 3 CLARK==>KING 2 MILLER==>CLARK 3 In the above Start with clause specifies the root row of the table. Level pseudo column gives the 1 for root , 2 for child and so on. Connect by prior clause specifies the columns which has parent-child relationship. INLINE VIEW OR TOP-N ANALYSIS In the select statement instead of table name, replacing the select statement is known as inline view. Ex: SQL> Select ename, sal, rownum rank from (select *from emp order by sal); ENAME SAL RANK ---------- ---------- ---------- SMITH 800 1 JAMES 950 2 ADAMS 1100 3 WARD 1250 4 MARTIN 1250 5 MILLER 1300 6 TURNER 1500 7 ALLEN 1600 8 CLARK 2450 9 BLAKE 2850 10 JONES 2975 11 SCOTT 3000 12 FORD 3000 13 KING 5000 14 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 125. 125 LOCKS Locks are the mechanisms used to prevent destructive interaction between users accessing same resource simultaneously. Locks provides high degree of data concurrency. TYPES  Row level locks  Table level locks ROW LEVEL LOCKS In the row level lock a row is locked exclusively so that other cannot modify the row until the transaction holding the lock is committed or rolled back. This can be done by using select..for update clause. Ex: SQL> select * from emp where sal > 3000 for update of comm.; TABLE LEVEL LOCKS A table level lock will protect table data thereby guaranteeing data integrity when data is being accessed concurrently by multiple users. A table lock can be held in several modes. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 126. 126  Share lock  Share update lock  Exclusive lock SHARE LOCK A share lock locks the table allowing other users to only query but not insert, update or delete rows in a table. Multiple users can place share locks on the same resource at the same time. Ex: SQL> lock table emp in share mode; SHARE UPDATE LOCK It locks rows that are to be updated in a table. It permits other users to concurrently query, insert , update or even lock other rows in the same table. It prevents the other users from updating the row that has been locked. Ex: SQL> lock table emp in share update mode; EXCLUSIVE LOCK Exclusive lock is the most restrictive of tables locks. When issued by any user, it allows the other user to only query. It is similar to share lock but only one user can place exclusive lock on a table at a time. Ex: SQL> lock table emp in share exclusive mode; NOWAIT If one user locked the table without nowait then another user trying to lock the same table then he has to wait until the user who has initially locked the table issues a commit or rollback statement. This delay could be avoided by appending a nowait clause in the lock table command. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 127. 127 Ex: SQL> lock table emp in exclusive mode nowait. DEADLOCK A deadlock occurs when tow users have a lock each on separate object, and they want to acquire a lock on the each other’s object. When this happens, the first user has to wait for the second user to release the lock, but the second user will not release it until the lock on the first user’s object is freed. In such a case, oracle detects the deadlock automatically and solves the problem by aborting one of the two transactions. INDEXES Index is typically a listing of keywords accompanied by the location of information on a subject. We can create indexes explicitly to speed up SQL statement execution on a table. The index points directly to the location of the rows containing the value. WHY INDEXES? Indexes are most useful on larger tables, on columns that are likely to appear in where clauses as simple equality. TYPES  Unique index  Non-unique index  Btree index  Bitmap index  Composite index  Reverse key index  Function-based index  Descending index  Domain index © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 128. 128  Object index  Cluster index  Text index  Index organized table  Partition index  Local index  Local prefixed  Local non-prefixed  Global index  Global prefixed  Global non-prefixed UNIQUE INDEX Unique indexes guarantee that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the columns that define the index. Unique index is automatically created when primary key or unique constraint is created. Ex: SQL> create unique index stud_ind on student(sno); NON-UNIQUE INDEX Non-Unique indexes do not impose the above restriction on the column values. Ex: SQL> create index stud_ind on student(sno); BTREE INDEX or ASCENDING INDEX The default type of index used in an oracle database is the btree index. A btree index is designed to provide both rapid access to individual rows and quick access to groups of rows within a range. The btree index does this by performing a succession of value comparisons. Each comparison eliminates many of the rows. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 129. 129 Ex: SQL> create index stud_ind on student(sno); BITMAP INDEX This can be used for low cardinality columns: that is columns in which the number of distinct values is snall when compared to the number of the rows in the table. Ex: SQL> create bitmap index stud_ind on student(sex); COMPOSITE INDEX A composite index also called a concatenated index is an index created on multiple columns of a table. Columns in a composite index can appear in any order and need not be adjacent columns of the table. Ex: SQL> create bitmap index stud_ind on student(sno, sname); REVERSE KEY INDEX A reverse key index when compared to standard index, reverses each byte of the column being indexed while keeping the column order. When the column is indexed in reverse mode then the column values will be stored in an index in different blocks as the starting value differs. Such an arrangement can help avoid performance degradations in indexes where modifications to the index are concentrated on a small set of blocks. Ex: SQL> create index stud_ind on student(sno, reverse); We can rebuild a reverse key index into normal index using the noreverse keyword. Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 130. 130 SQL> alter index stud_ind rebuild noreverse; FUNCTION BASED INDEX This will use result of the function as key instead of using column as the value for the key. Ex: SQL> create index stud_ind on student(upper(sname)); DESCENDING INDEX The order used by B-tree indexes has been ascending order. You can categorize data in B- tree index in descending order as well. This feature can be useful in applications where sorting operations are required. Ex: SQL> create index stud_ind on student(sno desc); TEXT INDEX Querying text is different from querying data because words have shades of meaning, relationships to other words, and opposites. You may want to search for words that are near each other, or words that are related to thers. These queries would be extremely difficult if all you had available was the standard relational operators. By extending SQL to include text indexes, oracle text permits you to ask very complex questions about the text. To use oracle text, you need to create a text index on the column in which the text is stored. Text index is a collection of tables and indexes that store information about the text stored in the column. TYPES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 131. 131 There are several different types of indexes available in oracle 9i. The first, CONTEXT is supported in oracle 8i as well as oracle 9i. As of oracle 9i, you can use the CTXCAT text index fo further enhance your text index management and query capabilities.  CONTEXT  CTXCAT  CTXRULE The CTXCAT index type supports the transactional synchronization of data between the base table and its text index. With CONTEXT indexes, you need to manually tell oracle to update the values in the text index after data changes in base table. CTXCAT index types do not generate score values during the text queries. HOW TO CREATE TEXT INDEX? You can create a text index via a special version of the create index comman. For context index, specify the ctxsys.context index type and for ctxcat index, specify the ctxsys.ctxcat index type. Ex: Suppose you have a table called BOOKS with the following columns Title, Author, Info. SQL> create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.context; SQL> create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.ctxcat; TEXT QUERIES Once a text index is created on the info column of BOOKS table, text-searching capabilities increase dynamically. CONTAINS & CATSEARCH CONTAINS function takes two parameters – the column name and the search string. Syntax: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 132. 132 Contains(indexed_column, search_str); If you create a CTXCAT index, use the CATSEARCH function in place of CONTAINS. CATSEARCH takes three parameters – the column name, the search string and the index set. Syntax: Contains(indexed_column, search_str, index_set); HOW A TEXT QEURY WORKS? When a function such as CONTAINS or CATSEARCH is used in query, the text portion of the query is processed by oracle text. The remainder of the query is processed just like a regular query within the database. The result of the text query processing and the regular query processing are merged to return a single set of records to the user. SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF A WORD The following queries will search for a word called ‘prperty’ whose score is greater than zero. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property’, null) > 0; Suppose if you want to know the score of the ‘property’ in each book, if score values for individual searches range from 0 to 10 for each occurrence of the string within the text then use the score function. SQL> select title, score(10) from books where contains(info, ‘property’, 10) > 0; SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF MULTIPLE WORDS The following queries will search for two words. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property AND harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property AND harvests’, null) > 0; Instead of using AND you could hae used an ampersand(&). Before using this method, set define off so the & character will not be seen as part of a variable name. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 133. 133 SQL> set define off SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property & harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property harvests’, null) > 0; The following queries will search for more than two words. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property AND harvests AND workers’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property harvests workers’, null) > 0; The following queries will search for either of the two words. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property OR harvests’) > 0; Instead of OR you can use a vertical line (|). SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property | harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property | harvests’, null) > 0; In the following queries the ACCUM(accumulate) operator adds together the scores of the individual searches and compares the accumulated score to the threshold value. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property ACCUM harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property ACCUM harvests’, null) > 0; Instead of OR you can use a comma(,). SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property , harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property , harvests’, null) > 0; In the following queries the MINUS operator subtracts the score of the second term’s search from the score of the first term’s search. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property MINUS harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property NOT harvests’, null) > 0; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 134. 134 Instead of MINUS you can use – and instead of NOT you can use ~. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘property - harvests’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘property ~ harvests’, null) > 0; SEARCHING FOR AN EXACT MATCH OF A PHRASE The following queries will search for the phrase. If the search phrase includes a reserved word within oracle text, the you must use curly braces ({}) to enclose text. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘transactions {and} finances’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘transactions {and} finances’, null) > 0; You can enclose the entire phrase within curly braces, in which case any reserved words within the phrase will be treated as part of the search criteria. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘{transactions and finances}’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where catsearch(info, ‘{transactions and finances}’, null) > 0; SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT ARE NEAR EACH OTHER The following queries will search for the words that are in between the search terms. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘workers NEAR harvests’) > 0; Instead of NEAR you can use ;. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘workers ; harvests’) > 0; In CONTEXT index queries, you can specify the maximum number of words between the search terms. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘NEAR((workers, harvests),10)’ > 0; USING WILDCARDS DURING SEARCHES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 135. 135 You can use wildcards to expand the list of valid search terms used during your query. Just as in regular text-string wildcard processing, two wildcards are available. % - percent sign; multiple-character wildcard _ - underscore; single-character wildcard SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘worker%’) > 0; SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘work___’) > 0; SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT SHARE THE SAME STEM Rather than using wildcards, you can use stem-expansion capabilities to expand the list of text strings. Given the ‘stem’ of a word, oracle will expand the list of words to search for to include all words having the same stem. Sample expansions are show here. Play - plays playing played playful SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘$manage’) > 0; SEARCHING FOR FUZZY MATCHES A fuzzy match expands the specified search term to include words that are spelled similarly but that do not necessarily have the same word stem. Fuzzy matches are most helpful when the text contains misspellings. The misspellings can be either in the searched text or in the search string specified by the user during the query. The following queries will not return anything because its search does not contain the word ‘hardest’. SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘hardest’) > 0; It does, however, contains the word ‘harvest’. A fuzzy match will return the books containing the word ‘harvest’ even though ‘harvest’ has a different word stem thant the word used as the search term. To use a fuzzy match, precede the search term with a question mark, with no space between the question mark and the beginning of the search term. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 136. 136 SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘?hardest’) > 0; SEARCHING FOR WORDS THAT SOUND LIKE OTHER WORDS SOUNDEX, expands search terms based on how the word sounds. The SOUNDEX expansion method uses the same text-matching logic available via the SOUNDEX function in SQL. To use the SOUNDEX option, you must precede the search term with an exclamation mark(!). SQL> select * from books where contains(info, ‘!grate’) > 0; INDEX SYNCHRONIZATION When using CONTEXT indexes, you need to manage the text index contents; the text indexes are not updated when the base table is updated. When the table was updated, its text index is out of sync with the base table. To sync of the index, execute the SYNC_INDEX procedure of the CTX_DDL package. SQL> exec CTX_DDL.SYNC_INDEX(‘book_index’); INDEX SETS Historically, problems with queries of text indexes have occurred when other criteria are used alongside text searches as part of the where clause. To improve the mixed query capability, oracle features index sets. The indexes within the index set may be structured relational columns or on text columns. To create an index set, use the CTX_DDL package to create the index set and add indexes to it. When you create a text index, you can then specify the index set it belongs to. SQL> exec CTX_DDL.CREATE_INDEX_SET(‘books_index_set’); The add non-text indexes. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 137. 137 SQL> exec CTX_DDL.ADD_INDEX(‘books_index_set’, ‘title_index’); Now create a CTXCAT text index. Specify ctxsys.ctxcat as the index type, and list the index set in the parameters clause. SQL> create index book_index on books(info) indextype is ctxsys.ctxcat parameters(‘index set books_index_set’); INDEX-ORGANIZED TABLE An index-organized table keeps its data sorted according to the primary key column values for the table. Index-organized tables store their data as if the entire table was stored in an index. An index-organized table allows you to store the entire table’s data in an index. Ex: SQL> create table student (sno number(2),sname varchar(10),smarks number(3) constraint pk primary key(sno) organization index; PARTITION INDEX Similar to partitioning tables, oracle allows you to partition indexes too. Like table partitions, index partitions could be in different tablespaces. LOCAL INDEXES  Local keyword tells oracle to create a separte index for each partition.  In the local prefixed index the partition key is specified on the left prefix. When the underlying table is partitioned baes on, say two columns then the index can be prefixed on the first column specified.  Local prefixed indexes can be unique or non unique.  Local indexes may be easier to manage than global indexes. Ex: SQL> create index stud_index on student(sno) local; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 138. 138 GLOBAL INDEXES  A global index may contain values from multiple partitions.  An index is global prefixed if it is partitioned on the left prefix of the index columns.  The global clause allows you to create a non-partitioned index.  Global indexes may perform uniqueness checks faster than local (partitioned) indexes.  You cannot create global indexes for hash partitions or subpartitions. Ex: SQL> create index stud_index on student(sno) global; Similar to table partitions, it is possible to move them from one device to another. But unlike table partitions, movement of index partitions requires individual reconstruction of the index or each partition (only in the case of global index). Ex: SQL> alter index stud_ind rebuild partition p2  Index partitions cannot be dropped manually.  They are dropped implicitly when the data they refer to is dropped from the partitioned table. MONITORING USE OF INDEXES Once you turned on the monitoring the use of indexes, then we can check whether the table is hitting the index or not. To monitor the use of index use the follwing syntax. Syntax: alter index index_name monitoring usage; then check for the details in V$OBJECT_USAGE view. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 139. 139 If you want to stop monitoring use the following. Syntax: alter index index_name nomonitoring usage; DATA MODEL  ALL_INDEXES  DBA_INDEXES  USER_INDEXES  ALL_IND-COLUMNS  DBA-IND_COLUMNS  USER_IND_COLUMNS  ALL_PART_INDEXES  DBA_PART_INDEXES  USER_PART_INDEXES  V$OBJECT_USAGE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 140. 140 SQL*PLUS COMMNANDS These commands does not require statement terminator and applicable to the sessions , those will be automatically cleared when session was closed. BREAK This will be used to breakup the data depending on the grouping. Syntax: Break or bre [on <column_name> on report] COMPUTE This will be used to perform group functions on the data. Syntax: Compute or comp [group_function of column_name on breaking_column_name or report] TTITLE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 141. 141 This will give the top title for your report. You can on or off the ttitle. Syntax: Ttitle or ttit [left | center | right] title_name skip n other_characters Ttitle or ttit [on or off] BTITLE This will give the bottom title for your report. You can on or off the btitle. Syntax: Btitle or btit [left | center | right] title_name skip n other_characters Btitle or btit [on or off] Ex: SQL> bre on deptno skip 1 on report SQL> comp sum of sal on deptno SQL> comp sum of sal on report SQL> ttitle center 'EMPLOYEE DETAILS' skip1 center '----------------' SQL> btitle center '** THANKQ **' SQL> select * from emp order by deptno; Output: EMPLOYEE DETAILS ----------------------- EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------- ------- -------------- -------- ---------- ---------- 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 09-JUN-81 2450 10 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17-NOV-81 5000 7934 MILLER CLERK 7782 23-JAN-82 1300 ---------- ********** 8750 sum 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 17-DEC-80 800 20 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 142. 142 7876 ADAMS CLERK 7788 23-MAY-87 1100 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03-DEC-81 3000 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 19-APR-87 3000 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02-APR-81 2975 ---------- ********** 10875 sum 7499 ALLEN SALESMAN 7698 20-FEB-81 1600 300 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 7839 01-MAY-81 2850 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 7698 28-SEP-81 1250 1400 7900 JAMES CLERK 7698 03-DEC-81 950 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 7698 08-SEP-81 1500 0 7521 WARD SALESMAN 7698 22-FEB-81 1250 500 ---------- ********** 9400 sum ---------- sum 29025 ** THANKQ ** CLEAR This will clear the existing buffers or break or computations or columns formatting. Syntax: Clear or cle buffer | bre | comp | col; Ex: SQL> clear buffer Buffer cleared SQL> clear bre Breaks cleared SQL> clear comp Computes cleared SQL> clear col © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 143. 143 Columns cleared CHANGE This will be used to replace any strings in SQL statements. Syntax: Change or c/old_string/new_string If the old_string repeats many times then new_string replaces the first string only. Ex: SQL> select * from det; select * from det * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00942: table or view does not exist SQL> c/det/dept 1* select * from dept SQL> / DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- ---------------- ----------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH ALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON COLUMN This will be used to increase or decrease the width of the table columns. Syntax: Column or col <column_name> format <num_format|text_format> © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 144. 144 Ex: SQL> col deptno format 999 SQL> col dname format a10 SAVE This will be used to save your current SQL statement as SQL Script file. Syntax: Save or sav <file_name>.[extension] replace or rep If you want to save the filename with existing filename the you have to use replace option. By default it will take sql as the extension. Ex: SQL> save ss Created file ss.sql SQL> save ss replace Wrote file ss.sql EXECUTE This will be used to execute stored subprograms or packaged subprograms. Syntax: Execute or exec <subprogram_name> Ex: SQL> exec sample_proc SPOOL This will record the data when you spool on, upto when you say spool off. By default it will give lst as extension. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 145. 145 Syntax: Spool on | off | out | <file_name>.[Extension] Ex: SQL> spool on SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC --------- -------------- ---------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON SQL> spool off SQL> ed on.lst SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC --------- -------------- ---------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON SQL> spool off LIST This will give the current SQL statement. Syntax: List or li [start_line_number] [end_line_number] © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 146. 146 Ex: SQL> select 2 * 3 from 4 dept; SQL> list 1 select 2 * 3 from 4* dept SQL> list 1 1* select SQL> list 3 3* from SQL> list 1 3 1 select 2 * 3* from INPUT This will insert the new line to the current SQL statement. Syntax: Input or in <string> Ex: SQL> select * SQL> list 1* select * SQL> input from dept SQL> list 1 select * 2* from dept © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 147. 147 APPEND This will adds a new string to the existing string in the SQL statement without any space. Syntax: Append or app <string> Ex: SQL> select * SQL> list 1* select * SQL> append from dept 1* select * from dept SQL> list 1* select * from dept DELETE This will delete the current SQL statement lines. Syntax: Delete or del <start_line_number> [<end_line_number>] Ex: SQL> select 2 * 3 from 4 dept 5 where 6 deptno 7 >10; SQL> list 1 select 2 * 3 from © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 148. 148 4 dept 5 where 6 deptno 7* >10 SQL> del 1 SQL> list 1 * 2 from 3 dept 4 where 5 deptno 6* >10 SQL> del 2 SQL> list 1 * 2 dept 3 where 4 deptno 5* >10 SQL> del 2 4 SQL> list 1 * 2* >10 SQL> del SQL> list 1 * VARIABLE This will be used to declare a variable. Syntax: Variable or var <variable_name> <variable_type> Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 149. 149 SQL> var dept_name varchar(15) SQL> select dname into dept_name from dept where deptno = 10; PRINT This will be used to print the output of the variables that will be declared at SQL level. Syntax: Print <variable_name> Ex: SQL> print dept_name DEPT_NAME -------------- ACCOUNTING START This will be used to execute SQL scripts. Syntax: start <filename_name>.sql Ex: SQL> start ss.sql SQL> @ss.sql -- this will execute sql script files only. HOST This will be used to interact with the OS level from SQL. Syntax: Host [operation] Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 150. 150 SQL> host SQL> host dir SHOW Using this, you can see several commands that use the set command and status. Syntax: Show all | <set_command> Ex: SQL> show all appinfo is OFF and set to "SQL*Plus" arraysize 15 autocommit OFF autoprint OFF autorecovery OFF autotrace OFF blockterminator "." (hex 2e) btitle OFF and is the first few characters of the next SELECT statement cmdsep OFF colsep " " compatibility version NATIVE concat "." (hex 2e) copycommit 0 COPYTYPECHECK is ON define "&" (hex 26) describe DEPTH 1 LINENUM OFF INDENT ON echo OFF editfile "afiedt.buf" embedded OFF escape OFF FEEDBACK ON for 6 or more rows flagger OFF flush ON © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 151. 151 SQL> sho verify verify OFF RUN This will runs the command in the buffer. Syntax: Run | / Ex: SQL> run SQL> / STORE This will save all the set command statuses in a file. Syntax: Store set <filename>.[extension] [create] | [replace] | [append] Ex: SQL> store set my_settings.scmd Created file my_settings.scmd SQL> store set my_settings.cmd replace Wrote file my_settings.cmd SQL> store set my_settings.cmd append Appended file to my_settings.cmd FOLD_AFTER This will fold the columns one after the other. Syntax: Column <column_name> fold_after [no_of_lines] Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 152. 152 SQL> col deptno fold_after 1 SQL> col dname fold_after 1 SQL> col loc fold_after 1 SQL> set heading off SQL> select * from dept; 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON FOLD_BEFORE This will fold the columns one before the other. Syntax: Column <column_name> fold_before [no_of_lines] DEFINE This will give the list of all the variables currently defined. Syntax: Define [variable_name] Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 153. 153 SQL> define DEFINE _DATE = "16-MAY-07" (CHAR) DEFINE _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER = "oracle" (CHAR) DEFINE _USER = "SCOTT" (CHAR) DEFINE _PRIVILEGE = "" (CHAR) DEFINE _SQLPLUS_RELEASE = "1001000200" (CHAR) DEFINE _EDITOR = "Notepad" (CHAR) DEFINE _O_VERSION = "Oracle Database 10g Enterprise Edition Release 10.1.0.2.0 – Production With the Partitioning, OLAP and Data Mining options" (CHAR) DEFINE _O_RELEASE = "1001000200" (CHAR) SET COMMANDS These commands does not require statement terminator and applicable to the sessions , those will be automatically cleared when session was closed. LINESIZE This will be used to set the linesize. Default linesize is 80. Syntax: Set linesize <value> Ex: SQL> set linesize 100 PAGESIZE This will be used to set the pagesize. Default pagesize is 14. Syntax: Set pagesize <value> Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 154. 154 SQL> set pagesize 30 DESCRIBE This will be used to see the object’s structure. Syntax: Describe or desc <object_name> Ex: SQL> desc dept Name Null? Type ----------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------- DEPTNO NOT NULL NUMBER(2) DNAME VARCHAR2(14) LOC VARCHAR2(13) PAUSE When the displayed data contains hundreds or thousands of lines, when you select it then it will automatically scrolls and displays the last page data. To prevent this you can use this pause option. By using this it will display the data correspoinding to the pagesize with a break which will continue by hitting the return key. By default this will be off. Syntax: Set pause on | off Ex: SQL> set pause on FEEDBACK © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 155. 155 This will give the information regarding howmany rows you selected the object. By default the feedback message will be displayed, only when the object contains more than 5 rows. Syntax: Set feedback <value> Ex: SQL> set feedback 4 SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- -------------- ------------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 4 rows selected. HEADING If you want to display data without headings, then you can achieve with this. By default heading is on. Syntax: Set heading on | off Ex: SQL> set heading off SQL> select * from dept; 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 156. 156 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON SERVEROUTPUT This will be used to display the output of the PL/SQL programs. By default this will be off. Syntax: Set serveroutput on | off Ex: SQL> set serveroutput on TIME This will be used to display the time. By default this will be off. Syntax: Set time on | off Ex: SQL> set time on 19:56:33 SQL> TIMING This will give the time taken to execute the current SQL statement. By default this will be off. Syntax: Set timing on | off Ex: SQL> set timing on © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 157. 157 SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- -------------- ------------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Elapsed: 00:00:00.06 SQLPROMPT This will be used to change the SQL prompt. Syntax: Set sqlprompt <prompt> Ex: SQL> set sqlprompt 'ORACLE>' ORACLE> SQLCASE This will be used to change the case of the SQL statements. By default the case is mixed. Syntax: Set sqlcase upper | mixed | lower Ex: SQL> set sqlcase upper SQLTERMINATOR This will be used to change the terminator of the SQL statements. By default the terminator is ;. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 158. 158 Syntax: Set sqlterminator <termination_character> Ex: SQL> set sqlterminator : SQL> select * from dept: DEFINE By default if the & character finds then it will treat as bind variable and ask for the input. Suppose your want to treat it as a normal character while inserting data, then you can prevent this by using the define option. By default this will be on Syntax: Set define on | off Ex: SQL>insert into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD'); Enter value for d: old 1: insert into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD') new 1: INSERT INTO DEPT VALUES(50,'R','HYD') SQL> set define off SQL>insert into dept values(50,'R&D','HYD'); -- here it won’t ask for value NEWPAGE This will shows how many blank lines will be left before the report. By default it will leave one blank line. Syntax: Set newpage <value> Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 159. 159 SQL> set newpage 10 The zero value for newpage does not produce zero blank lines instead it switches to a special property which produces a top-of-form character (hex 13) just before the date on each page. Most modern printers respond to this by moving immediately to the top of the next page, where the priting of the report will begin. HEADSEP This allow you to indicate where you want to break a page title or a column heading that runs longer than one line. The default heading separator is vertical bar (|). Syntax: Set headsep <separation_char> Ex: SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- -------------- ------------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON SQL> set headsetp ! SQL> col dname heading 'DEPARTMENT ! NAME' SQL> / DEPARTMENT DEPTNO NAME LOC ---------- ----------------- ---------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 160. 160 ECHO When using a bind variable, the SQL statement is maintained by echo. By default this is off. Syntax: Set echo on | off VERIFY When using a bind variable, the old and new statements will be maintained by verify. By default this is on. Syntax: Set verify on | off Ex: SQL> select * from dept where deptno = &dno; Enter value for dno: 10 old 1: select * from dept where deptno = &dno new 1: select * from dept where deptno = 10 DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- ---------------- ----------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK SQL> set verify off SQL> select * from dept where deptno = &dno; Enter value for dno: 20 DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- ------------- ----------- 20 RESEARCH DALLAS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 161. 161 PNO This will give displays the page numbers. By default the value would be zero. Ex: SQL> col hiredate new_value xtoday noprint format a1 trunc SQL> ttitle left xtoday right 'page' sql.pno SQL> select * from emp where deptno = 10; 09-JUN-81 page 1 EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------------- --------- ----- ---------- ---------- 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 2450 10 7839 KING PRESIDENT 5000 10 7934 MILLER CLERK 7782 1300 10 In the above noprint tells SQLPLUS not to display this column when it prints the results of the SQL statement. Dates that have been reformatted by TO_CHAR get a default width of about 100 characters. By changing the format to a1 trunc, you minimize this effect. NEW_VALUE inserts contents of the column retrieved by the SQL statement into a variable called xtoday. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 162. 162 SPECIAL FILES LOGIN.sql If you would like SQLPLUS to define your own environmental settings, put all the required commands in a file named login.sql. This is a special filename that SQLPLUS always looks for whenever it starts up. If it finds login.sql, it executes any commands in it as if you had entered then by hand. You can put any command in login.sql that you can use in SQLPLUS, including SQLPLUS commands and SQL statements. All ot them executed before SQLPLUS gives you the SQL> prompt. GLOGIN.sql This is used in the same ways as LOGIN.sql but to establish default SQLPLUS settings for all users of a database. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 163. 163 IMPORTANT QUERIES 1) To find the nth row of a table SQL> Select *from emp where rowid = (select max(rowid) from emp where rownum <= 4); Or SQL> Select *from emp where rownum <= 4 minus select *from emp where rownum <= 3; 2) To find duplicate rows SQL> Select *from emp where rowid in (select max(rowid) from emp group by empno, ename, mgr, job, hiredate, comm, deptno, sal); Or SQL> Select empno,ename,sal,job,hiredate,comm , count(*) from emp group by empno,ename,sal,job,hiredate,comm having count(*) >=1; 3) To delete duplicate rows SQL> Delete emp where rowid in (select max(rowid) from emp group by © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 164. 164 empno,ename,mgr,job,hiredate,sal,comm,deptno); 4) To find the count of duplicate rows SQL> Select ename, count(*) from emp group by ename having count(*) >= 1; 5) How to display alternative rows in a table? SQL> select *from emp where (rowid,0) in (select rowid,mod(rownum,2) from emp); 6) Getting employee details of each department who is drawing maximum sal? SQL> select *from emp where (deptno,sal) in ( select deptno,max(sal) from emp group by deptno); 7) How to get number of employees in each department , in which department is having more than 2500 employees? SQL> Select deptno,count(*) from emp group by deptno having count(*) >2500; 8) To reset the time to the beginning of the day SQL> Select to_char(trunc(sysdate),’dd-mon-yyyy hh:mi:ss am’) from dual; 9) To find nth maximum sal SQL> Select *from emp where sal in (select max(sal) from (select *from emp order by sal) where rownum <= 5); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 165. 165 INTRODUCTION CHARACTERSTICS  Highly structured, readable and accessible language.  Standard and Protable language.  Embedded language.  Improved execution authority. 10g FEATURES  Optimized compiler . To change the optimizer settings for the entire database, set the database parameter PLSQL_OPTIMIZE_LEVEL. Valid settings are as follows 0 - No optimization 1 - Moderate optimization 2 - Aggressive optimization These settings are also modifiable for the current session. SQL> alter session set plsql_optimze_level=2; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 166. 166 Oracle retains optimizer settings on a module-by-module basis. When you recompile a particular module with nondefault settings, the settings will stick allowing you to recompile later on using REUSE SETTINGS. SQL> Alter procedure proc compile plsql_optimize_level=1; SQL> Alter procedure proc compile reuse settings;  Compile-time warnings. Starting with oracle database 10g release 1 you can enable additional compile-time warnings to help make your programs more robust. The compiler can detect potential runtime problems with your code, such as identifying lines of code that will never be run. This process, also known as lint checking. To enable these warnings fo the entire database, set the database parameter PLSQL_WARNINGS. These settings are also modifiable for the current session. SQL> alter session set plsql_warnings = ‘enable:all’; The above can be achieved using the built-in package DBMS_WARNING.  Conditional compilation. Conditional compilation allows the compiler to allow to compile selected parts of a program based on conditions you provide with the $IF directive.  Support for non-sequential collections in FORALL.  Improved datatype support.  Backtrace an exception to its line number. When handling an error, how can you find the line number on which the error was originally raised? In earlier release, the only way to do this was allow you exception to go unhandled and then view the full error trace stack. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 167. 167 Now you can call DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_BACKTRACE function to obtain that stack and manipulate it programmatically within your program.  Set operators for nested tables.  Support for regular expressions. Oracle database 10g supports the use of regular expressions inside PL/SQL code via four new built-in functions.  REGEXP_LIKE  REGEXP_INSTR  REGEXP_SUBSTR  REGEXP_REPLACE  Programmer-defined quoting mechanism. Starting with oracle database 10g release 1, you can define your own quoting mechanism for string literals in both SQL and PL/SQL. Use the characters q’(q followed by a single quote) to note the programmer- defined deliemeter for you string literal. Ex: DECLARE v varchar(10) := 'computer'; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line(q'*v = *' || v); dbms_output.put_line(q'$v = $' || v); END; Output: v = computer v = computer  Many new built-in packages. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 168. 168 DBMS_SCHEDULER Represents a major update to DBMS_JOB. DBMS_SCHEDULER provides much improved functionality for scheduling and executing jobs defined via stored procedures. DBMS_CRYPTO Offers the ability to encrypt and decrypt common oracle datatype, including RAWs, BLOBs, and CLOBs. It also provides globalization support for encrypting data across different charactersets. DBMS_MONITOR Provides an API to control additional tracing and statistics gathering of sessions. DBMS_WARNING Provides an API into the PL/SQL compiler warnings module, allowing you to read and change settings that control which warnings are suppressed, displayed, or treated as errors. STANDARD PACKAGE Oracle has defined in this special package. Oracle defines quite a few identifiers in this package, including built-in exceptions, functions and subtypes. You can reference the built-in form by prefixing it with STANDARD. The basic unit in any PL/SQL program is block. All PL/SQL programs are composed of blocks which can occur sequentially or nested. BLOCK STRUCTURE Declare -- declarative section Begin -- executable section Exception © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 169. 169 -- exception section End; In the above declarative and exceptiona sections are optional. BLOCK TYPES  Anonymous blocks  Named blocks  Labeled blocks  Subprograms  Triggers ANONYMOUS BLOCKS Anonymous blocks implies basic block structure. Ex: BEGIN Dbms_output.put_line(‘My first program’): END; LABELED BLOCKS Labeled blocks are anonymous blocks with a label which gives a name to the block. Ex: <<my_bloock>> BEGIN Dbms_output.put_line(‘My first program’): END; SUBPROGRAMS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 170. 170 Subprograms are procedures and functions. They can be stored in the database as stand- alone objects, as part of package or as methods of an object type. TRIGGERS Triggers consists of a PL/SQL block that is associated with an event that occur in the database. NESTED BLOCKS A block can be nested within the executable or exception section of an outer block. IDENTIFIERS Identifiers are used to name PL/SQL objects, such as variables, cursors, types and subprograms. Identifiers consists of a letter, optionally followed by any sequence of characters, including letters, numbers, dollar signs, underscores, and pound signs only. The maximum length for an identifier is 30 characters. QUOTED IDENTIFIERS If you want to make an identifier case sensitive, include characters such as spaces or use a reserved word, you can enclose the identifier in double quotation marks. Ex: DECLARE "a" number := 5; "A" number := 6; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a); dbms_output.put_line('A = ' || A); END; Output: a=6 A=6 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 171. 171 COMMENTS Comments improve readability and make your program more understandable. They are ignored by the PL/SQL compiler. There are two types of comments available.  Single line comments  Multiline comments SINGLE LINE COMMENTS A single-line comment can start any point on a line with two dashes and continues until the end of the line. Ex: BEGIN Dbms_output.put_line(‘hello’); -- sample program END; MULTILINE COMMENTS Multiline comments start with the /* delimiter and ends with */ delimiter. Ex: BEGIN Dbms_output.put_line(‘hello’); /* sample program */ END; VARIABLE DECLERATIONS Variables can be declared in declarative section of the block; Ex: DECLARE a number; b number := 5; c number default 6; CONSTANT DECLERATIONS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 172. 172 To declare a constant, you include the CONSTANT keyword, and you must supply a default value. Ex: DECLARE b constant number := 5; c constant number default 6; NOT NULL CLAUSE You can also specify that the variable must be not null. Ex: DECLARE b constant number not null:= 5; c number not null default 6; ANCHORED DECLERATIONS PL/SQL offers two kinds of achoring.  Scalar anchoring  Record anchoring SCALAR ANCHORING Use the %TYPE attribute to define your variable based on table’s column of some other PL/SQL scalar variable. Ex: DECLARE dno dept.deptno%type; Subtype t_number is number; a t_number; Subtype t_sno is student.sno%type; V_sno t_sno; RECORD ANCHORING © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 173. 173 Use the %ROWTYPE attribute to define your record structure based on a table. Ex: `DECLARE V_dept dept%rowtype; BENEFITS OF ANCHORED DECLARATIONS  Synchronization with database columns.  Normalization of local variables. PROGRAMMER-DEFINED TYPES With the SUBTYPE statement, PL/SQL allows you to define your own subtypes or aliases of predefined datatypes, sometimes referred to as abstract datatypes. There are two kinds of subtypes.  Constrained  Unconstrained CONSTRAINED SUBTYPE A subtype that restricts or constrains the values normally allowd by the datatype itself. Ex: Subtype positive is binary_integer range 1..2147483647; In the above declaration a variable that is declared as positive can store only ingeger greater than zero even though binary_integer ranges from -2147483647..+2147483647. UNCONSTRAINED SUBTYPE A subtype that does not restrict the values of the original datatype in variables declared with the subtype. Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 174. 174 Subtype float is number; DATATYPE CONVERSIONS PL/SQL can handle conversions between different families among the datatypes. Conversion can be done in two ways.  Explicit conversion  Implicit conversion EXPLICIT CONVERSION This can be done using the built-in functions available. IMPLICIT CONVERSION PL/SQL will automatically convert between datatype families when possible. Ex: DECLARE a varchar(10); BEGIN select deptno into a from dept where dname='ACCOUNTING'; END; In the above variable a is char type and deptno is number type even though, oracle will automatically converts the numeric data into char type assigns to the variable. PL/SQL can automatically convert between  Characters and numbers  Characters and dates VARIABLE SCOPE AND VISIBILITY The scope of a variable is the portion of the program in which the variable can be accessed. For PL/SQL variables, this is from the variable declaration until the end of the © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 175. 175 block. When a variable goes out of scope, the PL/SQL engine will free the memory used to store the variable. The visibility of a variable is the portion of the program where the variable can be accessed without having to qualify the reference. The visibility is always within the scope. If it is out of scope, it is not visible. Ex1: DECLARE a number; -- scope of a BEGIN -------- DECLARE b number; -- scope of b BEGIN ----- END; ------ END; Ex2: DECLARE a number; b number; BEGIN -- a , b available here DECLARE b char(10); BEGIN -- a and char type b is available here END; ----- END; Ex3: <<my_block>> DECLARE a number; b number; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 176. 176 BEGIN -- a , b available here DECLARE b char(10); BEGIN -- a and char type b is available here -- number type b is available using <<my_block>>.b END; ------ END; PL/SQL CONTROL STRUCTURES PL/SQL has a variety of control structures that allow you to control the behaviour of the block as it runs. These structures include conditional statements and loops.  If-then-else  Case  Case with no else  Labeled case  Searched case  Simple loop  While loop  For loop  Goto and Labels IF-THEN-ELSE Syntax: If <condition1> then Sequence of statements; Elsif <condition1> then Sequence of statements; …… Else Sequence of statements; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 177. 177 End if; Ex: DECLARE dno number(2); BEGIN select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING'; if dno = 10 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK'); elsif dno = 20 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS'); elsif dno = 30 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO'); else dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON'); end if; END; Output: Location is NEW YORK CASE Syntax: Case test-variable When value1 then sequence of statements; When value2 then sequence of statements; …… When valuen then sequence of statements; Else sequence of statements; End case; Ex: DECLARE dno number(2); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 178. 178 BEGIN select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING'; case dno when 10 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK'); when 20 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS'); when 30 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO'); else dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON'); end case; END; Output: Location is NEW YORK CASE WITHOUT ELSE Syntax: Case test-variable When value1 then sequence of statements; When value2 then sequence of statements; …… When valuen then sequence of statements; End case; Ex: DECLARE dno number(2); BEGIN select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING'; case dno when 10 then © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 179. 179 dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK'); when 20 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS'); when 30 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO'); when 40 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON'); end case; END; Output: Location is NEW YORK LABELED CASE Syntax: <<label>> Case test-variable When value1 then sequence of statements; When value2 then sequence of statements; …… When valuen then sequence of statements; End case; Ex: DECLARE dno number(2); BEGIN select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING'; <<my_case>> case dno when 10 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK'); when 20 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS'); when 30 then © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 180. 180 dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO'); when 40 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON'); end case my_case; END; Output: Location is NEW YORK SEARCHED CASE Syntax: Case When <condition1> then sequence of statements; When <condition2> then sequence of statements; …… When <conditionn> then sequence of statements; End case; Ex: DECLARE dno number(2); BEGIN select deptno into dno from dept where dname = 'ACCOUNTING'; case dno when dno = 10 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is NEW YORK'); when dno = 20 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is DALLAS'); when dno = 30 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is CHICAGO'); when dno = 40 then dbms_output.put_line('Location is BOSTON'); end case; END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 181. 181 Output: Location is NEW YORK SIMPLE LOOP Syntax: Loop Sequence of statements; Exit when <condition>; End loop; In the syntax exit when <condition> is equivalent to If <condition> then Exit; End if; Ex: DECLARE i number := 1; BEGIN loop dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i); i := i + 1; exit when i > 5; end loop; END; Output: i=1 i=2 i=3 i=4 i=5 WHILE LOOP © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 182. 182 Syntax: While <condition> loop Sequence of statements; End loop; Ex: DECLARE i number := 1; BEGIN While i <= 5 loop dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i); i := i + 1; end loop; END; Output: i=1 i=2 i=3 i=4 i=5 FOR LOOP Syntax: For <loop_counter_variable> in low_bound..high_bound loop Sequence of statements; End loop; Ex1: BEGIN For i in 1..5 loop dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i); end loop; END; Output: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 183. 183 i=1 i=2 i=3 i=4 i=5 Ex2: BEGIN For i in reverse 1..5 loop dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i); end loop; END; Output: i=5 i=4 i=3 i=2 i=1 NULL STATEMENT Usually when you write a statement in a program, you want it to do something. There are cases, however, when you want to tell PL/SQL to do absolutely nothing, and that is where the NULL comes. The NULL statement deos nothing except pass control to the next executable statement. You can use NULL statement in the following situations.  Improving program readability. Sometimes, it is helpful to avoid any ambiguity inherent in an IF statement that doesn’t cover all possible cases. For example, when you write an IF statement, you do not have to include an ELSE clause.  Nullifying a raised exception. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 184. 184 When you don’t want to write any special code to handle an exception, you can use the NULL statement to make sure that a raised exception halts execution of the current PL/SQL block but does not propagate any exceptions to enclosing blocks.  Using null after a label. In some cases, you can pair NULL with GOTO to avoid having to execute additional statements. For example, I use a GOTO statement to quickly move to the end of my program if the state of my data indicates that no further processing is required. Because I do not have to do anything at the termination of the program, I place a NULL statement after the label because at least one executable statement is required there. Even though NULL deos nothing, it is still an executable statement. GOTO AND LABELS Syntax: Goto label; Where label is a label defined in the PL/SQL block. Labels are enclosed in double angle brackets. When a goto statement is evaluated, control immediately passes to the statement identified by the label. Ex: BEGIN For i in 1..5 loop dbms_output.put_line('i = ' || i); if i = 4 then goto exit_loop; end if; end loop; <<exit_loop>> Null; END; Output: i=1 i=2 i=3 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 185. 185 i=4 RESTRICTIONS ON GOTO  It is illegal to branch into an inner block, loop.  At least one executable statement must follow.  It is illegal to branch into an if statement.  It is illegal to branch from one if statement to another if statement.  It is illegal to branch from exception block to the current block. PRAGMAS Pragmas are compiler directives. They serve as instructions to the PL/SQL compiler. The compiler will act on the pragma during the compilation of the block. Syntax: PRGAMA instruction_to_compiler. PL/SQL offers several pragmas:  AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION  EXCEPTION_INIT  RESTRICT_REFERENCES  SERIALLY_REUSABLE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 186. 186 SUBPROGRAMS PROCEDURES A procedure is a module that performs one or more actions. Syntax: Procedure [schema.]name [(parameter1 [,parameter2 …])] [authid definer | current_user] is -- [declarations] Begin -- executable statements [Exception -- exception handlers] © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 187. 187 End [name]; In the above authid clause defines whether the procedure will execute under the authority of the definer of the procedure or under the authority of the current user. FUNCTIONS A function is a module that returns a value. Syntax: Function [schema.]name [(parameter1 [,parameter2 …])] Return return_datatype [authid definer | current_user] [deterministic] [parallel_enable] is -- [declarations] Begin -- executable statements [Exception -- exception handlers] End [name]; In the above authid clause defines whether the procedure will execute under the authority of the definer of the procedure or under the authority of the current user. Deterministic clause defines, an optimization hint that lets the system use a saved copy of the function’s return result, if available. The quety optimizer can choose whether to use the saved copy or re-call the function. Parallel_enable clause defines, an optimization hint that enables the function to be executed in parallel when called from within SELECT statement. PARAMETER MODES  In (Default)  Out © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 188. 188  In out IN In parameter will act as pl/sql constant. OUT  Out parameter will act as unintialized variable.  You cannot provide a default value to an out parameter.  Any assignments made to out parameter are rolled back when an exception is raised in the program.  An actual parameter corresponding to an out formal parameter must be a variable. IN OUT  In out parameter will act as initialized variable.  An actual parameter corresponding to an in out formal parameter must be a variable. DEFAULT PARAMETERS Default Parameters will not allow in the beginning and middle. Out and In Out parameters can not have default values. Ex: procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number default 6, c in number default 7) – valid procedure p(a in number, b in number default 6, c in number default 7) – valild procedure p(a in number, b in number, c in number default 7) – valild procedure p(a in number, b in number default 6, c in number) – invalild procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number default 6, c in number) – invalild procedure p(a in number default 5, b in number, c in number) – invalild © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 189. 189 NOTATIONS Notations are of two types.  Positional notation  Name notation We can combine positional and name notation but positional notation can not be followed by the name notation. Ex: Suppose we have a procedure proc(a number,b number,c number) and we have one anonymous block which contains v1,v2, and v3; SQL> exec proc (v1,v2,v3) -- Positional notation SQL> exec proc (a=>v1,b=>v2,c=>v3) -- Named notation FORMAL AND ACTUAL PARAMETERS  Parametes which are in calling subprogram are actual parameters.  Parametes which are in called subprogram are formal parameters.  If any subprogram was called, once the call was completed then the values of formal parameters are copied to the actual parameters. Ex1: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE SAMPLE(a in number,b out number,c in out number) is BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('After call'); dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a ||' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c); b := 10; c := 20; dbms_output.put_line('After assignment'); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 190. 190 dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a ||' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c); END SAMPLE; DECLARE v1 number := 4; v2 number := 5; v3 number := 6; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Before call'); dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3); sample(v1,v2,v3); dbms_output.put_line('After completion of call'); dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3); END; Output: Before call v1 = 4 v2 = 5 v3 = 6 After call a=4b= c=6 After assignment a = 4 b = 10 c = 20 After completion of call v1 = 4 v2 = 10 v3 = 20 Ex2: CREATE OR REPLACE FUN(a in number,b out number,c in out number) return number IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('After call'); dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c); dbms_output.put_line('Before assignement Result = ' || (a*nvl(b,1)*c)); b := 5; c := 7; dbms_output.put_line('After assignment'); dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b || ' c = ' || c); return (a*b*c); END FUN; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 191. 191 DECLARE v1 number := 1; v2 number := 2; v3 number := 3; v number; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Before call'); dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3); v := fun(v1,v2,v3); dbms_output.put_line('After call completed'); dbms_output.put_line('v1 = ' || v1 || ' v2 = ' || v2 || ' v3 = ' || v3); dbms_output.put_line('Result = ' || v); END; Output: Before call v1 = 1 v2 = 2 v3 = 3 After call a=1b= c=3 Before assignement Result = 3 After assignment a=1b=5c=7 After call completed v1 = 1 v2 = 5 v3 = 7 Result = 35 RESTRICTIONS ON FORMAL PARAMETERS  By declaring with specified size in actual parameters.  By declaring formal parameters with %type specifier. USING NOCOPY  Nocopy is a hint, not a command. This means that the compiler might silently decide that it can’t fulfill your request for a nocopy parameter. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 192. 192  The copying from formal to actual can be restricted by issuing nocopy qualifier.  To pass the out and in out parameters by reference use nocopy qualifier. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE PROC(a in out nocopy number) IS BEGIN ---- END PROC; CALL AND EXEC Call is a SQL statement, which can be used to execute subprograms like exec. Syntax: Call subprogram_name([argument_list]) [into host_variable];  The parantheses are always required, even if the subprogram takes no arguments.  We can not use call with out and in out parameters.  Call is a SQL statement, it is not valid inside a PL/SQL block;  The INTO clause is used for the output variables of functions only.  We can not use ‘exec’ with out or in out parameters.  Exec is not valid inside a PL/SQL block; Ex1: CREATE OR REPLACE PROC IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('hello world'); END PROC; Output: SQL> call proc(); hello world Ex2: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 193. 193 CREATE OR REPLACE PROC(a in number,b in number) IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || a || ' b = ' || b); END PROC; Output: SQL> call proc(5,6); a=5b=6 Ex3: CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION FUN RETURN VARCHAR IS BEGIN return 'hello world'; END FUN; Output: SQL> variable v varchar(20) SQL> call fun() into :v; SQL> print v hello world CALL BY REFERENCE AND CALL BY VALUE  In parameters by default call by reference where as out and in out call by value.  When parameter passed by reference, a pointer to the actual parameter is passed to the corresponding formal parameter.  When parameter passed by value it copies the value of the actual parameter to the formal parameter.  Call by reference is faster than the call by value because it avoids the copying. SUBPROGRAMS OVERLOADING  Possible with different number of parameters.  Possible with different types of data.  Possible with same type with objects. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 194. 194  Can not be possible with different types of modes.  We can overload local subprograms also. Ex: SQL> create or replace type t1 as object(a number);/ SQL> create or replace type t1 as object(a number);/ DECLARE i t1 := t1(5); j t2 := t2(5); PROCEDURE P(m t1) IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('a = ' || m.a); END P; PROCEDURE P(n t2) IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('b = ' || n.b); END P; PROCEDURE PRODUCT(a number,b number) IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Product of a,b = ' || a * b); END PRODUCT; PROCEDURE PRODUCT(a number,b number,c number) IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Product of a,b = ' || a * b * c); END PRODUCT; BEGIN p(i); p(j); product(4,5); product(4,5,6); END; Output: a=5 b=5 Product of a,b = 20 Product of a,b = 120 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 195. 195 BENEFITS OF OVERLOADING  Supporting many data combinations  Fitting the program to the user. RESTRICTIONS ON OVERLOADING  Overloaded programs with parameter lists that differ only by name must be called using named notation.  The parameter list of overloaded programs must differ by more than parameter mode.  All of the overloaded programs must be defined within the same PL/SQL scope or block.  Overloaded functions must differ by more than their return type. IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT SUBPROGRAMS  When a stored subprogram is created, it is stored in the data dictionary.  The subprogram is stored in compile form which is known as p-code in addition to the source text.  The p-code has all of the references in the subprogram evaluated, and the source code is translated into a form that is easily readable by PL/SQL engine.  When the subprogram is called, the p-code is read from the disk, if necessary, and executed.  Once it reads from the disk, the p-code is stored in the shared pool portion of the system global area (SGA), where it can be accessed by multiple users as needed.  Like all of the contents of the shared pool, p-code is aged out of the shared pool according to a least recently used (LRU) algorithm.  Subprograms can be local.  Local subprograms must be declared in the declarative section of PL/SQL block and called from the executable section.  Subprograms can not have the declarative section separately.  Stored subprograms can have local subprograms; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 196. 196  Local subprograms also can have local subprograms.  If the subprogram contains a variable with the same name as the column name of the table then use the dot method to differentiate (subprogram_name.sal).  Subprograms can be invalidated. PROCEDURES V FUNCTIONS  Procedures may return through out and in out parameters where as function must return.  Procedures can not have return clause where as functions must.  We can use call statement directly for executing procedure where as we need to declare a variable in case of functions.  Functions can use in select statements where as procedures can not.  Functions can call from reports environment where as procedures can not.  We can use exec for executing procedures where as functions can not.  Function can be used in dbms_output where as procedure can not.  Procedure call is a standalone executable statement where as function call is a part of an executable statement. STORED V LOCAL SUBPROGRAMS  The stored subprogram is stored in compiled p-code in the database, when the procedure is called it does not have to be compiled. The local subprogram is compiled as part of its containing block. If the containing block is anonymous and is run multiple times, the subprogram has to be compiled each time.  Stored subprograms can be called from any block submitted by a user who has execute privileges on the subprogram. Local subprograms can be called only from the block containing the subprogram.  By keeping the stored subprogram code separate from the calling block, the calling block is shorter and easier to understand. The local subprogram and the calling block are one and the same, which can lead to part confusion. If a change to the calling block is made, the subprogram will be recompiled as of the recompilation of the containing block. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 197. 197  The compiled p-code can be pinned in the shared pool using the DBMS_SHARED_POOL Package. This can improve performance. Local subprograms cannot be pinned in the shared pool by themselves.  Stand alone stored subprograms can not be overloaded, but packaged subprograms can be overloaded within the same package.  Local subprograms can be overloaded within the same block. Ex1: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Stored subprogram'); END; Output: SQL> exec p Stored subprogram Ex2: DECLARE PROCEDURE P IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Local subprogram'); END; BEGIN p; END; Output: Local subprogram COMPILING SUBPROGRAMS  SQL> Alter procedure P1 compile;  SQL> Alter function F1 compile; SUBPROGRAMS DEPENDECIES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 198. 198  A stored subprogram is marked as invalid in the data dictionary if it has compile errors.  A stored subprogram can also become invalid if a DDL operation is performed on one of its dependent objects.  If a subprogram is invalidated, the PL/SQL engine will automatically attempt to recompile in the next time it is called.  If we have two procedures like P1 and P2 in which P1 depends on P2. If we compile P2 then P1 is invalidated. SUBPROGRAMS DEPENDENCIES IN REMOTE DATABASES  We will call remote subprogram using connect string like P1@ORACLE;  If we have two procedures like P1 and P2 in which P1 depends on P2 but P2 was in remote database. If we compile P2 it will not invalidate P1 immediately because the data dictionary does not track remote dependencies.  Instead the validity of remote objects is checked at runtime. When P1 is called, the remote data dictionary is queried to determine the status of P2.  P1 and P2 are compared to see it P1 needs to be recompiled, there are two different methods of comparision  Timestamp Model  Signature Model TIMESTAMP MODEL  This is the default model used by oracle.  With this model, the timestamps of the last modifications of the two objects are compared.  The last_ddl_time field of user_objects contains the timestamp.  If the base object has a newer timestamp than the dependent object, the dependent object will be recompiled. ISSUES WITH THIS MODEL  If the objects are in different time zones, the comparison is invalid. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 199. 199  When P1 is in a client side PL/SQL engine such as oracle forms, in this case it may not possible to recompile P1, because the source for it may not be included with the forms. SIGNATURE MODEL  When a procedure is created, a signature is stored in the data dictionary in addition to the p-code.  The signature encodes the types and order of the parametes.  When P1 is compiled the first time, the signature of P2 is included. Thus, P1 only needs to recompiled when the signature of P2 changes.  In order to use the signature model, the parameter REMOTE_DEPENDENCIES_MODE must be set to SIGNATURE. This is a parameter in the database initialization file. THREE WAYS OF SETTING THIS MODE  Add the line REMOTE_DEPENDENCIES_MODE=SIGNATURE to the database initialization file. The next time the database is started, the mode will be set to SIGNATURE for all sessions.  Alter system set remote_dependencies_mode = signature; This will affect the entire database (all sessions) from the time the statement is issued. You must have the ALTER SYSTEM privilege to issue this command.  Alter session set remote_dependencies_mode = signature; This will only affect your session ISSUES WITH THIS MODEL  Signatures don’t get modified if the default values of formal parameters are changed.  Suppose P2 has a default value for one of its parameters, and P1 is using this default value. If the default in the specification for P2 is changed, P1 will not be recompiled by default. The old value for the default parameter will still be used until P1 is manually recompiled. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 200. 200  If P1 is calling a packaged procedure P2, and a new overloaded version of P2 is added to the remote package, the signature is not changed. P1 will still use the old version(not the new overloaded one) until P1 is recompiled manually. FORWARD DECLERATION Before going to use the procedure in any other subprogram or other block , you must declare the prototype of the procedure in declarative section. Ex1: DECLARE PROCEDURE P1 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p1'); p2; END P1; PROCEDURE P2 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p2'); p3; END P2; PROCEDURE P3 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p3'); END P3; BEGIN p1; END; Output: p2; * ERROR at line 5: ORA-06550: line 5, column 1: PLS-00313: 'P2' not declared in this scope ORA-06550: line 5, column 1: PL/SQL: Statement ignored ORA-06550: line 10, column 1: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 201. 201 PLS-00313: 'P3' not declared in this scope ORA-06550: line 10, column 1: PL/SQL: Statement ignored Ex2: DECLARE PROCEDURE P2; -- forward declaration PROCEDURE P3; PROCEDURE P1 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p1'); p2; END P1; PROCEDURE P2 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p2'); p3; END P2; PROCEDURE P3 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('From procedure p3'); END P3; BEGIN p1; END; Output: From procedure p1 From procedure p2 From procedure p3 PRIVILEGES AND STORED SUBPROGRAMS EXECUTE PREVILEGE © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 202. 202  For stored subprograms and packages the relevant privilege is EXECUTE.  If user A had the procedure called emp_proc then user A grants execute privilege on procedure to user B with the following command. SQL> Grant execute on emp_proc to user B.  Then user B can run the procedure by issuing SQL> Exec user A.emp_proc userA created the following procedure CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS cursor is select *from student1; BEGIN for v in c loop insert into student2 values(v.no,v.name,v.marks); end loop; END P; userA granted execute privilege to userB using SQL> grant execute on p to userB Then userB executed the procedure SQL> Exec userA.p If suppose userB also having student2 table then which table will populate whether userA’s or userB’s. The answer is userA’s student2 table only because by default the procedure will execute under the privlige set of its owner. The above procedure is known as definer’s procedure. HOW TO POPULATE USER B’s TABLE  Oracle introduces Invoker’s and Definer’s rights.  By default it will use the definer’s rights.  An invoker’s rights routine can be created by using AUTHID clause to populate the userB’s table. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 203. 203  It is valid for stand-alone subprograms, package specifications, and object type specifications only. userA created the following procedure CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P AUTHID CURRENT_USER IS cursor is select *from student1; BEGIN for v in c loop insert into student2 values(v.no,v.name,v.marks); end loop; END P; Then grant execute privilege on p to userB. Executing the procedure by userB, which populates userB’s table. The above procedure is called invoker’s procedure. Instead of current_user of authid clause, if you use definer then it will be called definer’ procedure. STORED SUBPROGRAMS AND ROLES we have two users saketh and sudha in which saketh has student table and sudha does not. Sudha is going to create a procedure based on student table owned by saketh. Before doing this saketh must grant the permissions on this table to sudha. SQL> conn saketh/saketh SQL> grant all on student to sudha; then sudha can create procedure SQL> conn sudha/sudha CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS cursor c is select *from saketh.student; BEGIN for v in c loop © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 204. 204 dbms_output.put_line(‘No = ‘ || v.no); end loop; END P; here procedure will be created. If the same privilege was granted through a role it wont create the procedure. Examine the following code SQL> conn saketh/saketh SQL> create role saketh_role; SQL> grant all on student to saketh_role; SQL> grant saketh_role to sudha; then conn sudha/sudha CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P IS cursor c is select *from saketh.student; BEGIN for v in c loop dbms_output.put_line(‘No = ‘ || v.no); end loop; END P; The above code will raise error instead of creating procedure . This is because of early binding which PL/SQL uses by default in which references are evaluated in compile time but when you are using a role this will affect immediately. ISSUES WITH INVOKER’S RIGHTS  In an invoker’s rights routine, external references in SQL statements will be resolved using the caller’s privilege set.  But references in PL/SQL statements are still resolved under the owner’s privilege set. TRIGGERS, VIEWS AND INVOKER’S RIGHTS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 205. 205  A database trigger will always be executed with definer’s rights and will execute under the privilege set of the schema that owns the triggering table.  This is also true for PL/SQL function that is called from a view. In this case, the function will execute under the privilege set of the view’s owner. PACKAGES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 206. 206 A package is a container for related objects. It has specification and body. Each of them is stored separately in data dictionary. PACKAGE SYNTAX Create or replace package <package_name> is -- package specification includes subprograms signatures, cursors and global or public variables. End <package_name>; Create or replace package body <package_name> is -- package body includes body for all the subprograms declared in the spec, private Variables and cursors. Begin -- initialization section Exception -- Exception handling seciton End <package_name>; IMPORTANT POINGS ABOUT PACKAGES  The first time a packaged subprogram is called or any reference to a packaged variable or type is made, the package is instantiated.  Each session will have its own copy of packaged variables, ensuring that two sessions executing subprograms in the same package use different memory locations.  In many cases initialization needs to be run the first time the package is instantiated within a session. This can be done by adding initialization section to the package body after all the objects.  Packages are stored in the data dictionary and can not be local.  Packaged subprograms has an advantage over stand alone subprogram.  When ever any reference to package, the whole package p-code was stored in shared pool of SGA.  Package may have local subprograms.  You can include authid clause inside the package spec not in the body. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 207. 207  The execution section of a package is know as initialization section.  You can have an exception section at the bottom of a package body.  Packages subprograms are not invalidated. COMPILING PACKAGES  SQL> Alter package PKG compile;  SQL> Alter package PKG compile specification;  SQL> Alter package PKG compile body; PACKAGE DEPENDENCIES  The package body depends on the some objects and the package header.  The package header does not depend on the package body, which is an advantage of packages.  We can change the package body with out changing the header. PACKAGE RUNTIME STATE Package runtime state is differ for the following packages.  Serially reusable packages  Non serially reusable packages SERIALLY REUSABLE PACKAGES To force the oracle to use serially reusable version then include PRAGMA SERIALLY_REUSABLE in both package spec and body, Examine the following package. CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS pragma serially_reusable; procedure emp_proc; END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS pragma serially_reusable; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 208. 208 cursor c is select ename from emp; PROCEDURE EMP_PROC IS v_ename emp.ename%type; v_flag boolean := true; v_numrows number := 0; BEGIN if not c%isopen then open c; end if; while v_flag loop fetch c into v_ename; v_numrows := v_numrows + 1; if v_numrows = 5 then v_flag := false; end if; dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_ename); end loop; END EMP_PROC; END PKG; SQL> exec pkg.emp_proc Ename = SMITH Ename = ALLEN Ename = WARD Ename = JONES Ename = MARTIN SQL> exec pkg.emp_proc Ename = SMITH Ename = ALLEN Ename = WARD Ename = JONES Ename = MARTIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 209. 209  The above package displays the same output for each execution even though the cursor is not closed.  Because the serially reusable version resets the state of the cursor each time it was called. NON SERIALL Y REUSABLE PACKAGES This is the default version used by the oracle, examine the following package. CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS procedure emp_proc; END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS cursor c is select ename from emp; PROCEDURE EMP_PROC IS v_ename emp.ename%type; v_flag boolean := true; v_numrows number := 0; BEGIN if not c%isopen then open c; end if; while v_flag loop fetch c into v_ename; v_numrows := v_numrows + 1; if v_numrows = 5 then v_flag := false; end if; dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_ename); end loop; END EMP_PROC; END PKG; SQL> exec pkg.emp_proc Ename = SMITH Ename = ALLEN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 210. 210 Ename = WARD Ename = JONES Ename = MARTIN SQL> exec pkg.emp_proc Ename = BLAKE Ename = CLARK Ename = SCOTT Ename = KING Ename = TURNER  The above package displays the different output for each execution even though the cursor is not closed.  Because the non-serially reusable version remains the state of the cursor over database calls. DEPENDENCIES OF PACKAGE RUNTIME STATE Dependencies can exists between package state and anonymous blocks. Examine the following program Create this package in first session CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS v number := 5; procedure p; END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS PROCEDURE P IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('v = ' || v); v := 10; dbms_output.put_line('v = ' || v); END P; END PKG; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 211. 211 Connect to second session, run the following code. BEGIN pkg.p; END; The above code wil work. Go back to first session and recreate the package using create. Then connect to second session and run the following code again. BEGIN pkg.p; END; This above code will not work because of the following.  The anonymous block depends on pkg. This is compile time dependency.  There is also a runtime dependency on the packaged variables, since each session has its own copy of packaged variables.  Thus when pkg is recompiled the runtime dependency is followed, which invalidates the block and raises the oracle error.  Runtime dependencies exist only on package state. This includes variables and cursors declared in a package.  If the package had no global variables, the second execution of the anonymous block would have succeeded. PURITY LEVELS In general, calls to subprograms are procedural, they cannot be called from SQL statements. However, if a stand-alone or packaged function meets certain restrictions, it can be called during execution of a SQL statement. User-defined functions are called the same way as built-in functions but it must meet different restrictions. These restrictions are defined in terms of purity levels. There are four types of purity levels. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 212. 212 WNDS -- Writes No Database State RNDS -- Reads No Database State WNPS -- Writes No Package State RNPS -- Reads No Package State In addition to the preceding restrictions, a user-defined function must also meet the following requirements to be called from a SQL statement.  The function has to be stored in the database, either stand-alone or as part of a package.  The function can take only in parametes.  The formal parameters must use only database types, not PL/SQL types such as boolean or record.  The return type of the function must also be a database type.  The function must not end the current transaction with commit or rollback, or rollback to a savepoint prior to the function execution.  It also must not issue any alter session or alter system commands. RESTRICT_REFERENCES For packaged functions, however, the RESTRICT_REFERENCES pragma is required to specify the purity level of a given function. Syntax: PRAGMA RESTRICT_REFERENCES(subprogram_name or package_name, WNDS [,WNPS] [,RNDS] [,RNPS]); Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS function fun1 return varchar; pragma restrict_references(fun1,wnds); function fun2 return varchar; pragma restrict_references(fun2,wnds); END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS FUNCTION FUN1 return varchar IS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 213. 213 BEGIN update dept set deptno = 11; return 'hello'; END FUN1; FUNCTION FUN2 return varchar IS BEGIN update dept set dname ='aa'; return 'hello'; END FUN2; END PKG; The above package body will not created, it will give the following erros. PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN1' violates its associated pragma PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN2' violates its associated pragma CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS FUNCTION FUN1 return varchar IS BEGIN return 'hello'; END FUN1; FUNCTION FUN2 return varchar IS BEGIN return 'hello'; END FUN2; END PKG; Now the package body will be created. DEFAULT If there is no RESTRICT_REFERENCES pragma associated with a given packaged function, it will not have any purity level asserted. However, you can change the default purity level for a package. The DEFAULT keyword is used instead of the subprogram name in the pragma. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 214. 214 pragma restrict_references(default,wnds); function fun1 return varchar; function fun2 return varchar; END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS FUNCTION FUN1 return varchar IS BEGIN update dept set deptno = 11; return 'hello'; END FUN1; FUNCTION FUN2 return varchar IS BEGIN update dept set dname ='aa'; return 'hello'; END FUN2; END PKG; The above package body will not created, it will give the following erros because the pragma will apply to all the functions. PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN1' violates its associated pragma PLS-00452: Subprogram 'FUN2' violates its associated pragma CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS FUNCTION FUN1 return varchar IS BEGIN return 'hello'; END FUN1; FUNCTION FUN2 return varchar IS BEGIN return 'hello'; END FUN2; END PKG; Now the package body will be created. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 215. 215 TRUST If the TRUST keyword is present, the restrictions listed in the pragma are not enforced. Rather, they are trusted to be true. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS function fun1 return varchar; pragma restrict_references(fun1,wnds,trust); function fun2 return varchar; pragma restrict_references(fun2,wnds,trust); END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY PKG IS FUNCTION FUN1 return varchar IS BEGIN update dept set deptno = 11; return 'hello'; END FUN1; FUNCTION FUN2 return varchar IS BEGIN update dept set dname ='aa'; return 'hello'; END FUN2; END PKG; The above package will be created successfully. IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT RESTRICT_REFERENCES  This pragma can appear anywhere in the package specification, after the function declaration.  It can apply to only one function definition.  For overload functions, the pragma applies to the nearest definition prior to the Pragma.  This pragma is required only for packages functions not for stand-alone functions. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 216. 216  The Pragma can be declared only inside the package specification.  The pragma is checked at compile time, not runtime.  It is possible to specify without any purity levels when trust or combination of default and trust keywords are present. PINNING IN THE SHARED POOL The shared pool is the portion of the SGS that contains, among other things, the p-code of compiled subprograms as they are run. The first time a stored a store subprogram is called, the p-code is loaded from disk into the shared pool. Once the object is no longer referenced, it is free to be aged out. Objects are aged out of the shared pool using an LRU(Least Recently Used) algorithm. The DBMS_SHARED_POOL package allows you to pin objects in the shared pool. When an object is pinned, it will never be aged out until you request it, no matter how full the pool gets or how often the object is accessed. This can improve performance, as it takes time to reload a package from disk. DBMS_SHARED_POOL has four procedures  KEEP  UNKEEP  SIZES  ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD KEEP The DBMS_SHARED_POOL.KEEP procedure is used to pin objects in the pool. Syntax: PROCEDURE KEEP(object_name varchar2,flag char default ‘P’); Here the flag represents different types of flag values for different types of objects. P -- Package, function or procedure Q -- Sequence © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 217. 217 R -- Trigger C -- SQL Cursor T -- Object type JS -- Java source JC -- Java class JR -- Java resource JD -- Java shared data UNKEEP UNKEEP is the only way to remove a kept object from the shared pool, without restarting the database. Kept objects are never aged out automatically. Syntax: PROCEDURE UNKEEP(object_name varchar2, flag char default ‘P’); SIZES SIZES will echo the contents of the shared pool to the screen. Syntax: PROCEDURE SIZES(minsize number); Objects with greater than the minsize will be returned. SIZES uses DBMS_OUTPUT to return the data. ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD When the database determines that there is not enough memory in the shared pool to satisfy a given request, it will begin aging objects out until there is enough memory. It enough objects are aged out, this can have a performance impact on other database sessions. The ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD can be used to remedy this. Syntax: PROCEDURE ABORTED_REQUEST_THRESHOLD(threshold_size number); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 218. 218 Once this procedure is called, oracle will not start aging objects from the pool unless at least threshold_size bytes is needed. DATA MODEL FOR SUBPROGRAMS AND PACKAGES  USER_OBJECTS  USER_SOURCE  USER_ERRORS  DBA_OBJECTS  DBA_SOURCE  DBA_ERRORS  ALL_OBJECTS  ALL_SOURCE  ALL_ERRORS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 219. 219 CURSORS Cursor is a pointer to memory location which is called as context area which contains the information necessary for processing, including the number of rows processed by the statement, a pointer to the parsed representation of the statement, and the active set which is the set of rows returned by the query. Cursor contains two parts  Header  Body Header includes cursor name, any parameters and the type of data being loaded. Body includes the select statement. Ex: Cursor c(dno in number) return dept%rowtype is select *from dept; In the above Header – cursor c(dno in number) return dept%rowtype Body – select *from dept CURSOR TYPES  Implicit (SQL)  Explicit  Parameterized cursors  REF cursors CURSOR STAGES  Open  Fetch © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 220. 220  Close CURSOR ATTRIBUTES  %found  %notfound  %rowcount  %isopen  %bulk_rowcount  %bulk_exceptions CURSOR DECLERATION Syntax: Cursor <cursor_name> is select statement; Ex: Cursor c is select *from dept; CURSOR LOOPS  Simple loop  While loop  For loop SIMPLE LOOP Syntax: Loop Fetch <cursor_name> into <record_variable>; Exit when <cursor_name> % notfound; <statements>; End loop; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 221. 221 Ex: DECLARE cursor c is select * from student; v_stud student%rowtype; BEGIN open c; loop fetch c into v_stud; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name); end loop; close c; END; Output: Name = saketh Name = srinu Name = satish Name = sudha WHILE LOOP Syntax: While <cursor_name> % found loop Fetch <cursor_name> nto <record_variable>; <statements>; End loop; Ex: DECLARE cursor c is select * from student; v_stud student%rowtype; BEGIN open c; fetch c into v_stud; while c%found loop fetch c into v_stud; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 222. 222 dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name); end loop; close c; END; Output: Name = saketh Name = srinu Name = satish Name = sudha FOR LOOP Syntax: for <record_variable> in <cursor_name> loop <statements>; End loop; Ex: DECLARE cursor c is select * from student; BEGIN for v_stud in c loop dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud.name); end loop; END; Output: Name = saketh Name = srinu Name = satish Name = sudha PARAMETARIZED CURSORS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 223. 223  This was used when you are going to use the cursor in more than one place with different values for the same where clause.  Cursor parameters must be in mode.  Cursor parameters may have default values.  The scope of cursor parameter is within the select statement. Ex: DECLARE cursor c(dno in number) is select * from dept where deptno = dno; v_dept dept%rowtype; BEGIN open c(20); loop fetch c into v_dept; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || v_dept.dname || ' Loc = ' || v_dept.loc); end loop; close c; END; Output: Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS PACKAGED CURSORS WITH HEADER IN SPEC AND BODY IN PACKAGE BODY  cursors declared in packages will not close automatically.  In packaged cursors you can modify the select statement without making any changes to the cursor header in the package specification.  Packaged cursors with must be defined in the package body itself, and then use it as global for the package.  You can not define the packaged cursor in any subprograms.  Cursor declaration in package with out body needs the return clause. Ex1: CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE PKG IS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 224. 224 cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept; procedure proc is END PKG; CREATE OR REPLACE PAKCAGE BODY PKG IS cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept; PROCEDURE PROC IS BEGIN for v in c loop dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v.deptno || ' Dname = ' || v.dname || ' Loc = ' || v.loc); end loop; END PROC; END PKG; Output: SQL> exec pkg.proc Deptno = 10 Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK Deptno = 20 Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON Ex2: CREATE OR REPLACE PAKCAGE BODY PKG IS cursor c return dept%rowtype is select * from dept where deptno > 20; PROCEDURE PROC IS BEGIN for v in c loop dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v.deptno || ' Dname = ' || v.dname || ' Loc = ' || v.loc); end loop; END PROC; END PKG; Output: SQL> exec pkg.proc Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 225. 225 Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON REF CURSORS AND CURSOR VARIABLES  This is unconstrained cursor which will return different types depends upon the user input.  Ref cursors can not be closed implicitly.  Ref cursor with return type is called strong cursor.  Ref cursor with out return type is called weak cursor.  You can declare ref cursor type in package spec as well as body.  You can declare ref cursor types in local subprograms or anonymous blocks.  Cursor variables can be assigned from one to another.  You can declare a cursor variable in one scope and assign another cursor variable with different scope, then you can use the cursor variable even though the assigned cursor variable goes out of scope.  Cursor variables can be passed as a parameters to the subprograms.  Cursor variables modes are in or out or in out.  Cursor variables can not be declared in package spec and package body (excluding subprograms).  You can not user remote procedure calls to pass cursor variables from one server to another.  Cursor variables can not use for update clause.  You can not assign nulls to cursor variables.  You can not compare cursor variables for equality, inequality and nullity. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE REF_CURSOR(TABLE_NAME IN VARCHAR) IS type t is ref cursor; c t; v_dept dept%rowtype; type r is record(ename emp.ename%type,job emp.job%type,sal emp.sal%type); v_emp r; v_stud student.name%type; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 226. 226 BEGIN if table_name = 'DEPT' then open c for select * from dept; elsif table_name = 'EMP' then open c for select ename,job,sal from emp; elsif table_name = 'STUDENT' then open c for select name from student; end if; loop if table_name = 'DEPT' then fetch c into v_dept; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Deptno = ' || v_dept.deptno || ' Dname = ' || v_dept.dname || ' Loc = ' || v_dept.loc); elsif table_name = 'EMP' then fetch c into v_emp; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v_emp.ename || ' Job = ' || v_emp.job || ' Sal = ' || v_emp.sal); elsif table_name = 'STUDENT' then fetch c into v_stud; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Name = ' || v_stud); end if; end loop; close c; END; Output: SQL> exec ref_cursor('DEPT') Deptno = 10 Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK Deptno = 20 Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS Deptno = 30 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO Deptno = 40 Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 227. 227 SQL> exec ref_cursor('EMP') Ename = SMITH Job = CLERK Sal = 800 Ename = ALLEN Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1600 Ename = WARD Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1250 Ename = JONES Job = MANAGER Sal = 2975 Ename = MARTIN Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1250 Ename = BLAKE Job = MANAGER Sal = 2850 Ename = CLARK Job = MANAGER Sal = 2450 Ename = SCOTT Job = ANALYST Sal = 3000 Ename = KING Job = PRESIDENT Sal = 5000 Ename = TURNER Job = SALESMAN Sal = 1500 Ename = ADAMS Job = CLERK Sal = 1100 Ename = JAMES Job = CLERK Sal = 950 Ename = FORD Job = ANALYST Sal = 3000 Ename = MILLER Job = CLERK Sal = 1300 SQL> exec ref_cursor('STUDENT') Name = saketh Name = srinu Name = satish Name = sudha CURSOR EXPRESSIONS  You can use cursor expressions in explicit cursors.  You can use cursor expressions in dynamic SQL.  You can use cursor expressions in REF cursor declarations and variables.  You can not use cursor expressions in implicit cursors.  Oracle opens the nested cursor defined by a cursor expression implicitly as soon as it fetches the data containing the cursor expression from the parent or outer cursor.  Nested cursor closes if you close explicitly. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 228. 228  Nested cursor closes whenever the outer or parent cursor is executed again or closed or canceled.  Nested cursor closes whenever an exception is raised while fetching data from a parent cursor.  Cursor expressions can not be used when declaring a view.  Cursor expressions can be used as an argument to table function.  You can not perform bind and execute operations on cursor expressions when using the cursor expressions in dynamic SQL. USING NESTED CURSORS OR CURSOR EXPRESSIONS Ex: DECLARE cursor c is select ename,cursor(select dname from dept d where e.empno = d.deptno) from emp e; type t is ref cursor; c1 t; c2 t; v1 emp.ename%type; v2 dept.dname%type; BEGIN open c; loop fetch c1 into v1; exit when c1%notfound; fetch c2 into v2; exit when c2%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Ename = ' || v1 || ' Dname = ' || v2); end loop; end loop; close c; END; CURSOR CLAUSES  Return © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 229. 229  For update  Where current of  Bulk collect RETURN Cursor c return dept%rowtype is select *from dept; Or Cursor c1 is select *from dept; Cursor c return c1%rowtype is select *from dept; Or Type t is record(deptno dept.deptno%type, dname dept.dname%type); Cursor c return t is select deptno, dname from dept; FOR UPDATE AND WHERE CURRENT OF Normally, a select operation will not take any locks on the rows being accessed. This will allow other sessions connected to the database to change the data being selected. The result set is still consistent. At open time, when the active set is determined, oracle takes a snapshot of the table. Any changes that have been committed prior to this point are reflected in the active set. Any changes made after this point, even if they are committed, are not reflected unless the cursor is reopened, which will evaluate the active set again. However, if the FOR UPDATE caluse is pesent, exclusive row locks are taken on the rows in the active set before the open returns. These locks prevent other sessions from changing the rows in the active set until the transaction is committed or rolled back. If another session already has locks on the rows in the active set, then SELECT … FOR UPDATE operation will wait for these locks to be released by the other session. There is no time-out for this waiting period. The SELECT…FOR UPDATE will hang until the other session releases the lock. To handle this situation, the NOWAIT clause is available. Syntax: Select …from … for update of column_name [wait n]; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 230. 230 If the cursor is declared with the FOR UPDATE clause, the WHERE CURRENT OF clause can be used in an update or delete statement. Syntax: Where current of cursor; Ex: DECLARE cursor c is select * from dept for update of dname; BEGIN for v in c loop update dept set dname = 'aa' where current of c; commit; end loop; END; BULK COLLECT  This is used for array fetches  With this you can retrieve multiple rows of data with a single roundtrip.  This reduces the number of context switches between the pl/sql and sql engines.  Reduces the overhead of retrieving data.  You can use bulk collect in both dynamic and static sql.  You can use bulk collect in select, fetch into and returning into clauses.  SQL engine automatically initializes and extends the collections you reference in the bulk collect clause.  Bulk collect operation empties the collection referenced in the into clause before executing the query.  You can use the limit clause of bulk collect to restrict the no of rows retrieved.  You can fetch into multible collections with one column each.  Using the returning clause we can return data to the another collection. BULK COLLECT IN FETCH Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 231. 231 DECLARE Type t is table of dept%rowtype; nt t; Cursor c is select *from dept; BEGIN Open c; Fetch c bulk collect into nt; Close c; For i in nt.first..nt.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' || nt(i).loc); end loop; END; Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON BULK COLLECT IN SELECT Ex: DECLARE Type t is table of dept%rowtype; Nt t; BEGIN Select * bulk collect into nt from dept; for i in nt.first..nt.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' || nt(i).loc); end loop; END; Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 232. 232 Dname = SALES Loc = CHICAGO Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = BOSTON LIMIT IN BULK COLLECT You can use this to limit the number of rows to be fetched. Ex: DECLARE Type t is table of dept%rowtype; nt t; Cursor c is select *from dept; BEGIN Open c; Fetch c bulk collect into nt limit 2; Close c; For i in nt.first..nt.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i).dname || ' Loc = ' || nt(i).loc); end loop; END; Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK Dname = RESEARCH Loc = DALLAS MULTIPLE FETCHES IN INTO CLAUSE Ex1: DECLARE Type t is table of dept.dname%type; nt t; Type t1 is table of dept.loc%type; nt1 t; Cursor c is select dname,loc from dept; BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 233. 233 Open c; Fetch c bulk collect into nt,nt1; Close c; For i in nt.first..nt.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i)); end loop; For i in nt1.first..nt1.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || nt1(i)); end loop; END; Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Dname = RESEARCH Dname = SALES Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = NEW YORK Loc = DALLAS Loc = CHICAGO Loc = BOSTON Ex2: DECLARE type t is table of dept.dname%type; type t1 is table of dept.loc%type; nt t; nt1 t1; BEGIN Select dname,loc bulk collect into nt,nt1 from dept; for i in nt.first..nt.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Dname = ' || nt(i)); end loop; for i in nt1.first..nt1.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || nt1(i)); end loop; END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 234. 234 Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Dname = RESEARCH Dname = SALES Dname = OPERATIONS Loc = NEW YORK Loc = DALLAS Loc = CHICAGO Loc = BOSTON RETURNING CLAUSE IN BULK COLLECT You can use this to return the processed data to the ouput variables or typed variables. Ex: DECLARE type t is table of number(2); nt t := t(1,2,3,4); type t1 is table of varchar(2); nt1 t1; type t2 is table of student%rowtype; nt2 t2; BEGIN select name bulk collect into nt1 from student; forall v in nt1.first..nt1.last update student set no = nt(v) where name = nt1(v) returning no,name,marks bulk collect into nt2; for v in nt2.first..nt2.last loop dbms_output.put_line('Marks = ' || nt2(v)); end loop; END; Output: Marks = 100 Marks = 200 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 235. 235 Marks = 300 Marks = 400 POINTS TO REMEMBER  Cursor name can be up to 30 characters in length.  Cursors declared in anonymous blocks or subprograms closes automatically when that block terminates execution.  %bulk_rowcount and %bulk_exceptions can be used only with forall construct.  Cursor declarations may have expressions with column aliases.  These expressions are called virtual columns or calculated columns. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 236. 236 SQL IN PL/SQL The only statements allowed directly in pl/sql are DML and TCL. BINDING Binding a variable is the process of identifying the storage location associated with an identifier in the program. Types of binding  Early binding  Late binding  Binding during the compiled phase is early binding.  Binding during the runtime phase is late binding.  In early binding compile phase will take longer because of binding work but the execution is faster.  In late binding it will shorten the compile phase but lengthens the execution time.  PL/SQL by default uses early binding.  Binding also involves checking the database for permissions to access the object Referenced. DYNAMIC SQL © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 237. 237  If you use DDL in pl/sql it validates the permissions and existence if requires during compile time which makes invalid.  We can avoid this by using Dynamic SQL.  Dynamic SQL allows you to create a SQL statement dynamically at runtime. Two techniques are available for Dynamic SQL.  Native Dynamic SQL  DBMS_SQL package USING NATIVE DYNAMIC SQL USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE Ex: BEGIN Execute immediate ‘create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))’; or Execute immediate (‘create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))’); END; USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE WITH PL/SQL VARIABLES Ex: DECLARE v varchar(100); BEGIN v := 'create table student(no number(2),name varchar(10))'; execute immediate v; END; USING EXECUTE IMMEDIATE WITH BIND VARIABLES AND USING CLAUSE Ex: DECLARE v varchar(100); BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 238. 238 v := 'insert into student values(:v1,:v2,:v3)'; execute immediate v using 6,'f',600; END; EXECUTING QUERIES WITH OPEN FOR AND USING CLAUSE Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P(smarks in number) IS s varchar(100) := 'select *from student where marks > :m'; type t is ref cursor; c t; v student%rowtype; BEGIN open c for s using smarks; loop fetch c into v; exit when c%notfound; dbms_output.put_line('Student Marks = ' || v.marks); end loop; close c; END; Output: SQL> exec p(100) Student Marks = 200 Student Marks = 300 Student Marks = 400 QUERIES WITH EXECUTE IMMEDIATE Ex: DECLARE d_name dept.dname%type; lc dept.loc%type; v varchar(100); BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 239. 239 v := 'select dname from dept where deptno = 10'; execute immediate v into d_name; dbms_output.put_line('Dname = '|| d_name); v := 'select loc from dept where dname = :dn'; execute immediate v into lc using d_name; dbms_output.put_line('Loc = ' || lc); END; Output: Dname = ACCOUNTING Loc = NEW YORK VARIABLE NAMES Ex: DECLARE Marks number(3) := 100; BEGIN Delete student where marks = marks; -- this will delete all the rows in the -- student table END; This can be avoided by using the labeled blocks. <<my_block>> DECLARE Marks number(3) := 100; BEGIN Delete student where marks = my_block.marks; -- delete rows which has -- a marks of 100 END; GETTING DATA INTO PL/SQL VARIABLES Ex: DECLARE V1 number; V2 varchar(2); BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 240. 240 Select no,name into v1,v2 from student where marks = 100; END; DML AND RECORDS Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P(srow in student%rowtype) IS BEGIN insert into student values srow; END P; DECLARE s student%rowtype; BEGIN s.no := 11; s.name := 'aa'; s.marks := 100; p(s); END; RECORD BASED INSERTS Ex: DECLARE srow student%rowtype; BEGIN srow.no := 7; srow.name := 'cc'; srow.marks := 500; insert into student values srow; END; RECORD BASED UPDATES Ex: DECLARE srow student%rowtype; BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 241. 241 srow.no := 6; srow.name := 'cc'; srow.marks := 500; update student set row=srow where no = srow.no; END; USING RECORDS WITH RETURNING CLAUSE Ex: DECLARE srow student%rowtype; sreturn student%rowtype; BEGIN srow.no := 8; srow.name := 'dd'; srow.marks := 500; insert into student values srow returning no,name,marks into sreturn; dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.no); dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.name); dbms_output.put_line('No = ' || sreturn.marks); END; Output: No = 8 No = dd No = 500 USING DBMS_SQL PACKAGE DBMS_SQL is used to execute dynamic SQL from with in PL/SQL. Unlike native dynamic SQL, it is not built directly into the language, and thus is less efficient. The DBMS_SQL package allows you to directly control the processing of a statement within a cursor, with operations such as opening and closing a cursor, parsing a statement, binding input variable, and defining output variables. Ex1: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 242. 242 DECLARE cursor_id number; flag number; v_stmt varchar(50); BEGIN cursor_id := dbms_sql.open_cursor; v_stmt := 'create table stud(sno number(2),sname varchar(10))'; dbms_sql.parse(cursor_id,v_stmt,dbms_sql.native); flag := dbms_sql.execute(cursor_id); dbms_sql.close_cursor(cursor_id); dbms_output.put_line('Table created'); END; Output: Table created SQL> desc stud Name Null? Type ----------------------------------------------------------------- -------- -------- SNO NUMBER(2) SNAME VARCHAR2(10) Ex2: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE DBMS_SQL_PROC(v1 student.no%type, v2 student.marks%type) is cursor_id number; flag number; v_update varchar(50); BEGIN cursor_id := dbms_sql.open_cursor; v_update := 'update student set marks = :smarks where no = :sno'; dbms_sql.parse(cursor_id,v_update,dbms_sql.native); dbms_sql.bind_variable(cursor_id,':sno',v1); dbms_sql.bind_variable(cursor_id,':smarks',v2); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 243. 243 flag := dbms_sql.execute(cursor_id); dbms_sql.close_cursor(cursor_id); END DBMS_SQL_PROC; Output: SQL> select * from student; -- before execution NO NA MARKS ---- ------ -- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 SQL> exec dbms_sql_proc(2,222) SQL> select * from student; -- after execution NO NA MARKS ---- ------ -- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 222 3 c 300 FORALL STATEMENT This can be used to get the data from the database at once by reducting the number of context switches which is a transfer of control between PL/SQL and SQL engine. Syntax: Forall index_var in [ Lower_bound..upper_bound | Indices of indexing_collection | Values of indexing_collection ] SQL statement; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 244. 244 FORALL WITH NON-SEQUENTIAL ARRAYS Ex: DECLARE type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer; ibt t; BEGIN ibt(1) := 1; ibt(10) := 2; forall i in ibt.first..ibt.last update student set marks = 900 where no = ibt(i); END; The above program will give error like ‘element at index [2] does not exists. You can rectify it in one of the two following ways. USGAGE OF INDICES OF TO AVOID THE ABOVE BEHAVIOUR This will be used when you have a collection whose defined rows specify which rows in the binding array you would like to processed. Ex: DECLARE type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer; ibt t; type t1 is table of boolean index by binary_integer; ibt1 t1; BEGIN ibt(1) := 1; ibt(10) := 2; ibt(100) := 3; ibt1(1) := true; ibt1(10) := true; ibt1(100) := true; forall i in indices of ibt1 update student set marks = 900 where no = ibt(i); END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 245. 245 Ouput: SQL> select * from student -- before execution NO NA MARKS ---------- ------------ 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 SQL> select * from student -- after execution NO NA MARKS ---------- ------------ 1 a 900 2 b 900 3 c 900 USGAGE OF VALUES OF TO AVOID THE ABOVE BEHAVIOUR This will be used when you have a collection of integers whose content identifies the position in the binding array that you want to be processed by the FORALL statement. Ex: DECLARE type t is table of student.no%type index by binary_integer; ibt t; type t1 is table of pls_integer index by binary_integer; ibt1 t1; BEGIN ibt(1) := 1; ibt(10) := 2; ibt(100) := 3; ibt1(11) := 1; ibt1(15) := 10; ibt1(18) := 100; forall i in values of ibt1 update student set marks = 567 where no = ibt(i); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 246. 246 END; Ouput: SQL> select * from student -- before execution NO NA MARKS ---------- ------------ 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 SQL> select * from student -- after execution NO NA MARKS ---------- ------------ 1 a 900 2 b 900 3 c 900 POINTS ABOUT BULK BINDS  Passing the entire PL/SQL table to the SQL engine in one step is known as bulk bind.  Bulk binds are done using the forall statement.  If there is an error processing one of the rows in bulk DML operation, only that row is rolled back. POINTS ABOUT RETURING CLAUSE  This will be used only with DML statements to return data into PL/SQL variables.  This will be useful in situations like , when performing insert or update or delete if you want to know the data of the table which has been effected by the DML.  With out going for another SELECT using RETURNING clause we will get the data which will avoid a call to RDBMS kernel. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 247. 247 COLLECTIONS Collections are also composite types, in that they allow you to treat several variables as a unit. A collection combines variables of the same type. TYPES  Varrays  Nested tables  Index - by tables (Associate arrays) VARRAYS A varray is datatype very similar to an array. A varray has a fixed limit on its size, specified as part of the declaration. Elements are inserted into varray starting at index 1, up to maximum lenth declared in the varray type. The maximum size of the varray is 2 giga bytes. Syntax: Type <type_name> is varray | varying array (<limit>) of <element_type>; Ex1: DECLARE type t is varray(10) of varchar(2); va t := t('a','b','c','d'); flag boolean; BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 248. 248 dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || va.limit); dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || va.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || va.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || va.next(2)); dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || va.prior(3)); dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in va.first..va.last loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i)); end loop; flag := va.exists(3); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists with an element ' || va(3)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 does not exists'); end if; va.extend; dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || va.count); flag := va.exists(5); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 exists with an element ' || va(5)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 does not exists'); end if; flag := va.exists(6); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 exists with an element ' || va(6)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 does not exists'); end if; va.extend(2); dbms_output.put_line('After extend of two indexes, Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in va.first..va.last loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i)); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 249. 249 end loop; va(5) := 'e'; va(6) := 'f'; va(7) := 'g'; dbms_output.put_line('AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in va.first..va.last loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i)); end loop; va.extend(3,2); dbms_output.put_line('After extend of three indexes, Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in va.first..va.last loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i)); end loop; va.trim; dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || va.count); va.trim(3); dbms_output.put_line('After trim of three indexs, Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('AFTER TRIM, VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in va.first..va.last loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '] = ' || va(i)); end loop; va.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire varray, Count = ' || va.count); END; Output: Limit = 10 Count = 4 First Index = 1 Last Index = 4 Next Index = 3 Previous Index = 2 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1] = a © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 250. 250 va[2] = b va[3] = c va[4] = d Index 3 exists with an element c After extend of one index, Count = 5 Index 5 exists with an element Index 6 does not exists After extend of two indexes, Count = 7 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1] = a va[2] = b va[3] = c va[4] = d va[5] = va[6] = va[7] = AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1] = a va[2] = b va[3] = c va[4] = d va[5] = e va[6] = f va[7] = g After extend of three indexes, Count = 10 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1] = a va[2] = b va[3] = c va[4] = d va[5] = e va[6] = f va[7] = g va[8] = b va[9] = b © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 251. 251 va[10] = b After trim of one index, Count = 9 After trim of three indexs, Count = 6 AFTER TRIM, VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1] = a va[2] = b va[3] = c va[4] = d va[5] = e va[6] = f After delete of entire varray, Count = 0 Ex2: DECLARE type t is varray(4) of student%rowtype; va t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..va.count loop select * into va(i) from student where sno = i; dbms_output.put_line('Sno = ' || va(i).sno || ' Sname = ' || va(i).sname); end loop; END; Output: Sno = 1 Sname = saketh Sno = 2 Sname = srinu Sno = 3 Sname = divya Sno = 4 Sname = manogni Ex3: DECLARE type t is varray(4) of student.smarks%type; va t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..va.count loop select smarks into va(i) from student where sno = i; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 252. 252 dbms_output.put_line('Smarks = ' || va(i)); end loop; END; Output: Smarks = 100 Smarks = 200 Smarks = 300 Smarks = 400 Ex4: DECLARE type r is record(c1 student.sname%type,c2 student.smarks%type); type t is varray(4) of r; va t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..va.count loop select sname,smarks into va(i) from student where sno = i; dbms_output.put_line('Sname = ' || va(i).c1 || ' Smarks = ' || va(i).c2); end loop; END; Output: Sname = saketh Smarks = 100 Sname = srinu Smarks = 200 Sname = divya Smarks = 300 Sname = manogni Smarks = 400 Ex5: DECLARE type t is varray(1) of addr; va t := t(null); cursor c is select * from employ; i number := 1; BEGIN for v in c loop select address into va(i) from employ where ename = v.ename; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 253. 253 dbms_output.put_line('Hno = ' || va(i).hno || ' City = ' || va(i).city); end loop; END; Output: Hno = 11 City = hyd Hno = 22 City = bang Hno = 33 City = kochi Ex6: DECLARE type t is varray(5) of varchar(2); va1 t; va2 t := t(); BEGIN if va1 is null then dbms_output.put_line('va1 is null'); else dbms_output.put_line('va1 is not null'); end if; if va2 is null then dbms_output.put_line('va2 is null'); else dbms_output.put_line('va2 is not null'); end if; END; Output: va1 is null va2 is not null NESTED TABLES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 254. 254 A nested table is thought of a database table which has no limit on its size. Elements are inserted into nested table starting at index 1. The maximum size of the varray is 2 giga bytes. Syntax: Type <type_name> is table of <table_type>; Ex1: DECLARE type t is table of varchar(2); nt t := t('a','b','c','d'); flag boolean; BEGIN if nt.limit is null then dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Nested Tables'); else dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || nt.limit); end if; dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || nt.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || nt.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || nt.next(2)); dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || nt.prior(3)); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; flag := nt.exists(3); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists with an element ' || nt(3)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 does not exists'); end if; nt.extend; dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || nt.count); flag := nt.exists(5); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 255. 255 if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 exists with an element ' || nt(5)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 5 does not exists'); end if; flag := nt.exists(6); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 exists with an element ' || nt(6)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 6 does not exists'); end if; nt.extend(2); dbms_output.put_line('After extend of two indexes, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt(5) := 'e'; nt(6) := 'f'; nt(7) := 'g'; dbms_output.put_line('AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt.extend(5,2); dbms_output.put_line('After extend of five indexes, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt.trim; dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || nt.count); nt.trim(3); dbms_output.put_line('After trim of three indexs, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('AFTER TRIM, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 256. 256 for i in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt.delete(1); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 2..nt.count+1 loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt.delete(4); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of fourth index, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 2..3 loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; for i in 5..nt.count+2 loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '] = ' || nt(i)); end loop; nt.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire nested table, Count = ' || nt.count); END; Output: No limit to Nested Tables Count = 4 First Index = 1 Last Index = 4 Next Index = 3 Previous Index = 2 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1] = a nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d Index 3 exists with an element c © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 257. 257 After extend of one index, Count = 5 Index 5 exists with an element Index 6 does not exists After extend of two indexes, Count = 7 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1] = a nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d nt[5] = nt[6] = nt[7] = AFTER ASSINGNING VALUES TO EXTENDED ELEMENTS, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1] = a nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d nt[5] = e nt[6] = f nt[7] = g After extend of five indexes, Count = 12 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1] = a nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d nt[5] = e nt[6] = f nt[7] = g nt[8] = b nt[9] = b nt[10] = b nt[11] = b nt[12] = b © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 258. 258 After trim of one index, Count = 11 After trim of three indexs, Count = 8 AFTER TRIM, NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1] = a nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d nt[5] = e nt[6] = f nt[7] = g nt[8] = b After delete of first index, Count = 7 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[4] = d nt[5] = e nt[6] = f nt[7] = g nt[8] = b After delete of fourth index, Count = 6 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[2] = b nt[3] = c nt[5] = e nt[6] = f nt[7] = g nt[8] = b After delete of entire nested table, Count = 0 Ex2: DECLARE type t is table of student%rowtype; nt t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..nt.count loop © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 259. 259 select * into nt(i) from student where sno = i; dbms_output.put_line('Sno = ' || nt(i).sno || ' Sname = ' || nt(i).sname); end loop; END; Output: Sno = 1 Sname = saketh Sno = 2 Sname = srinu Sno = 3 Sname = divya Sno = 4 Sname = manogni Ex3: DECLARE type t is table of student.smarks%type; nt t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..nt.count loop select smarks into nt(i) from student where sno = i; dbms_output.put_line('Smarks = ' || nt(i)); end loop; END; Output: Smarks = 100 Smarks = 200 Smarks = 300 Smarks = 400 Ex4: DECLARE type r is record(c1 student.sname%type,c2 student.smarks%type); type t is table of r; nt t := t(null,null,null,null); BEGIN for i in 1..nt.count loop select sname,smarks into nt(i) from student where sno = i; dbms_output.put_line('Sname = ' || nt(i).c1 || ' Smarks = ' || nt(i).c2); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 260. 260 end loop; END; Output: Sname = saketh Smarks = 100 Sname = srinu Smarks = 200 Sname = divya Smarks = 300 Sname = manogni Smarks = 400 Ex5: DECLARE type t is table of addr; nt t := t(null); cursor c is select * from employ; i number := 1; BEGIN for v in c loop select address into nt(i) from employ where ename = v.ename; dbms_output.put_line('Hno = ' || nt(i).hno || ' City = ' || nt(i).city); end loop; END; Output: Hno = 11 City = hyd Hno = 22 City = bang Hno = 33 City = kochi Ex6: DECLARE type t is varray(5) of varchar(2); nt1 t; nt2 t := t(); BEGIN if nt1 is null then dbms_output.put_line('nt1 is null'); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 261. 261 else dbms_output.put_line('nt1 is not null'); end if; if nt2 is null then dbms_output.put_line('nt2 is null'); else dbms_output.put_line('nt2 is not null'); end if; END; Output: nt1 is null nt2 is not null SET OPERATIONS IN NESTED TABLES You can perform set operations in the nested tables. You can also perform equality comparisions between nested tables. Possible operations are  UNION  UNION DISTINCT  INTERSECT  EXCEPT ( act like MINUS) Ex: DECLARE type t is table of varchar(2); nt1 t := t('a','b','c'); nt2 t := t('c','b','a'); nt3 t := t('b','c','a','c'); nt4 t := t('a','b','d'); nt5 t; BEGIN nt5 := set(nt1); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 262. 262 dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := set(nt3); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := nt1 multiset union nt4; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := nt1 multiset union nt3; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := nt1 multiset union distinct nt3; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := nt1 multiset except nt4; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; nt5 := nt4 multiset except nt1; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in nt5.first..nt5.last loop dbms_output.put_line('nt5[ ' || i || ' ] = ' || nt5(i)); end loop; END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 263. 263 Output: NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = a nt5[ 2 ] = b nt5[ 3 ] = c NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = b nt5[ 2 ] = c nt5[ 3 ] = a NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = a nt5[ 2 ] = b nt5[ 3 ] = c nt5[ 4 ] = a nt5[ 5 ] = b nt5[ 6 ] = d NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = a nt5[ 2 ] = b nt5[ 3 ] = c nt5[ 4 ] = b nt5[ 5 ] = c nt5[ 6 ] = a nt5[ 7 ] = c NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = a nt5[ 2 ] = b nt5[ 3 ] = c NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = c NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt5[ 1 ] = d INDEX-BY TABLES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 264. 264 An index-by table has no limit on its size. Elements are inserted into index-by table whose index may start non-sequentially including negative integers. Syntax: Type <type_name> is table of <table_type> index by binary_integer; Ex: DECLARE type t is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer; ibt t; flag boolean; BEGIN ibt(1) := 'a'; ibt(-20) := 'b'; ibt(30) := 'c'; ibt(100) := 'd'; if ibt.limit is null then dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Index by Tables'); else dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || ibt.limit); end if; dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count); dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || ibt.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || ibt.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || ibt.next(2)); dbms_output.put_line('Previous Index = ' || ibt.prior(3)); dbms_output.put_line('INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS'); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[-20] = ' || ibt(-20)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[1] = ' || ibt(1)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[30] = ' || ibt(30)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[100] = ' || ibt(100)); flag := ibt.exists(30); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 30 exists with an element ' || ibt(30)); else © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 265. 265 dbms_output.put_line('Index 30 does not exists'); end if; flag := ibt.exists(50); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 50 exists with an element ' || ibt(30)); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 50 does not exists'); end if; ibt.delete(1); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || ibt.count); ibt.delete(30); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of index thirty, Count = ' || ibt.count); dbms_output.put_line('INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS'); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[-20] = ' || ibt(-20)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt[100] = ' || ibt(100)); ibt.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire index-by table, Count = ' || ibt.count); END; Output: No limit to Index by Tables Count = 4 First Index = -20 Last Index = 100 Next Index = 30 Previous Index = 1 INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS ibt[-20] = b ibt[1] = a ibt[30] = c ibt[100] = d Index 30 exists with an element c Index 50 does not exists After delete of first index, Count = 3 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 266. 266 After delete of index thirty, Count = 2 INDEX BY TABLE ELEMENTS ibt[-20] = b ibt[100] = d After delete of entire index-by table, Count = 0 DIFFERENCES AMONG COLLECTIONS  Varrays has limit, nested tables and index-by tables has no limit.  Varrays and nested tables must be initialized before assignment of elements, in index-by tables we can directly assign elements.  Varrays and nested tables stored in database, but index-by tables can not.  Nested tables and index-by tables are PL/SQL tables, but varrays can not.  Keys must be positive in case of nested tables and varrays, in case of index-by tables keys can be positive or negative.  Referencing nonexistent elements raises SUBSCRIPT_BEYOND_COUNT in both nested tables and varrays, but in case of index-by tables NO_DATA_FOUND raises.  Keys are sequential in both nested tables and varrays, non-sequential in index-by tables.  Individual indexes can be deleted in both nested tables and index-by tables, but in varrays can not.  Individual indexes can be trimmed in both nested tables and varrays, but in index- by tables can not.  Individual indexes can be extended in both nested tables and varrays, but in index- by tables can not. MULTILEVEL COLLECTIONS Collections of more than one dimension which is a collection of collections, known as multilevel collections. Syntax: Type <type_name1> is table of <table_type> index by binary_integer; Type <type_name2> is varray(<limit>) | table | of <type_name1> | index by © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 267. 267 binary_integer; Ex1: DECLARE type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer; type t2 is varray(5) of t1; va t2 := t2(); c number := 97; flag boolean; BEGIN va.extend(4); dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || va.limit); for i in 1..va.count loop for j in 1..va.count loop va(i)(j) := chr(c); c := c + 1; end loop; end loop; dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..va.count loop for j in 1..va.count loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; dbms_output.put_line('First index = ' || va.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last index = ' || va.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next index = ' || va.next(2)); dbms_output.put_line('Previous index = ' || va.prior(3)); flag := va.exists(2); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists'); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists'); end if; va.extend; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 268. 268 va(1)(5) := 'q'; va(2)(5) := 'r'; va(3)(5) := 's'; va(4)(5) := 't'; va(5)(1) := 'u'; va(5)(2) := 'v'; va(5)(3) := 'w'; va(5)(4) := 'x'; va(5)(5) := 'y'; dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..va.count loop for j in 1..va.count loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; va.trim; dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one index, Count = ' || va.count); va.trim(2); dbms_output.put_line('After trim of two indexes, Count = ' || va.count); dbms_output.put_line('VARRAY ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..va.count loop for j in 1..va.count loop dbms_output.put_line('va[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || va(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; va.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire varray, Count = ' || va.count); END; Output: Count = 4 Limit = 5 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1][1] = a © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 269. 269 va[1][2] = b va[1][3] = c va[1][4] = d va[2][1] = e va[2][2] = f va[2][3] = g va[2][4] = h va[3][1] = i va[3][2] = j va[3][3] = k va[3][4] = l va[4][1] = m va[4][2] = n va[4][3] = o va[4][4] = p First index = 1 Last index = 4 Next index = 3 Previous index = 2 Index 2 exists After extend of one index, Count = 5 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1][1] = a va[1][2] = b va[1][3] = c va[1][4] = d va[1][5] = q va[2][1] = e va[2][2] = f va[2][3] = g va[2][4] = h va[2][5] = r va[3][1] = i va[3][2] = j va[3][3] = k © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 270. 270 va[3][4] = l va[3][5] = s va[4][1] = m va[4][2] = n va[4][3] = o va[4][4] = p va[4][5] = t va[5][1] = u va[5][2] = v va[5][3] = w va[5][4] = x va[5][5] = y After trim of one index, Count = 4 After trim of two indexes, Count = 2 VARRAY ELEMENTS va[1][1] = a va[1][2] = b va[2][1] = e va[2][2] = f After delete of entire varray, Count = 0 Ex2: DECLARE type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer; type t2 is table of t1; nt t2 := t2(); c number := 65; v number := 1; flag boolean; BEGIN nt.extend(4); dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count); if nt.limit is null then dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Nested Tables'); else dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || nt.limit); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 271. 271 end if; for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop nt(i)(j) := chr(c); c := c + 1; if c = 91 then c := 97; end if; end loop; end loop; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; dbms_output.put_line('First index = ' || nt.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last index = ' || nt.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next index = ' || nt.next(2)); dbms_output.put_line('Previous index = ' || nt.prior(3)); flag := nt.exists(2); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists'); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 2 exists'); end if; nt.extend(2); nt(1)(5) := 'Q'; nt(1)(6) := 'R'; nt(2)(5) := 'S'; nt(2)(6) := 'T'; nt(3)(5) := 'U'; nt(3)(6) := 'V'; nt(4)(5) := 'W'; nt(4)(6) := 'X'; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 272. 272 nt(5)(1) := 'Y'; nt(5)(2) := 'Z'; nt(5)(3) := 'a'; nt(5)(4) := 'b'; nt(5)(5) := 'c'; nt(5)(6) := 'd'; nt(6)(1) := 'e'; nt(6)(2) := 'f'; nt(6)(3) := 'g'; nt(6)(4) := 'h'; nt(6)(5) := 'i'; nt(6)(6) := 'j'; dbms_output.put_line('After extend of one index, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; nt.trim; dbms_output.put_line('After trim of one indexe, Count = ' || nt.count); nt.trim(2); dbms_output.put_line('After trim of two indexes, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(i)(j)); end loop; end loop; nt.delete(2); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of second index, Count = ' || nt.count); dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); loop exit when v = 4; for j in 1..nt.count+1 loop © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 273. 273 dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || v || '][' || j || '] = ' || nt(v)(j)); end loop; v := v + 1; if v= 2 then v := 3; end if; end loop; nt.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire nested table, Count = ' || nt.count); END; Output: Count = 4 No limit to Nested Tables NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1][1] = A nt[1][2] = B nt[1][3] = C nt[1][4] = D nt[2][1] = E nt[2][2] = F nt[2][3] = G nt[2][4] = H nt[3][1] = I nt[3][2] = J nt[3][3] = K nt[3][4] = L nt[4][1] = M nt[4][2] = N nt[4][3] = O nt[4][4] = P First index = 1 Last index = 4 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 274. 274 Next index = 3 Previous index = 2 Index 2 exists After extend of one index, Count = 6 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1][1] = A nt[1][2] = B nt[1][3] = C nt[1][4] = D nt[1][5] = Q nt[1][6] = R nt[2][1] = E nt[2][2] = F nt[2][3] = G nt[2][4] = H nt[2][5] = S nt[2][6] = T nt[3][1] = I nt[3][2] = J nt[3][3] = K nt[3][4] = L nt[3][5] = U nt[3][6] = V nt[4][1] = M nt[4][2] = N nt[4][3] = O nt[4][4] = P nt[4][5] = W nt[4][6] = X nt[5][1] = Y nt[5][2] = Z nt[5][3] = a nt[5][4] = b nt[5][5] = c nt[5][6] = d © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 275. 275 nt[6][1] = e nt[6][2] = f nt[6][3] = g nt[6][4] = h nt[6][5] = i nt[6][6] = j After trim of one indexe, Count = 5 After trim of two indexes, Count = 3 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1][1] = A nt[1][2] = B nt[1][3] = C nt[2][1] = E nt[2][2] = F nt[2][3] = G nt[3][1] = I nt[3][2] = J nt[3][3] = K After delete of second index, Count = 2 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1][1] = A nt[1][2] = B nt[1][3] = C nt[3][1] = I nt[3][2] = J nt[3][3] = K After delete of entire nested table, Count = 0 Ex3: DECLARE type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer; type t2 is table of t1 index by binary_integer; ibt t2; flag boolean; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 276. 276 if ibt.limit is null then dbms_output.put_line('No limit to Index-by Tables'); else dbms_output.put_line('Limit = ' || ibt.limit); end if; ibt(1)(1) := 'a'; ibt(4)(5) := 'b'; ibt(5)(1) := 'c'; ibt(6)(2) := 'd'; ibt(8)(3) := 'e'; ibt(3)(4) := 'f'; dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS'); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([1][1] = ' || ibt(1)(1)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([4][5] = ' || ibt(4)(5)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4)); dbms_output.put_line('First Index = ' || ibt.first); dbms_output.put_line('Last Index = ' || ibt.last); dbms_output.put_line('Next Index = ' || ibt.next(3)); dbms_output.put_line('Prior Index = ' || ibt.prior(8)); ibt(1)(2) := 'g'; ibt(1)(3) := 'h'; ibt(1)(4) := 'i'; ibt(1)(5) := 'k'; ibt(1)(6) := 'l'; ibt(1)(7) := 'm'; ibt(1)(8) := 'n'; dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || ibt.count); dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..8 loop dbms_output.put_line('ibt[1][' || i || '] = ' || ibt(1)(i)); end loop; dbms_output.put_line('ibt([4][5] = ' || ibt(4)(5)); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 277. 277 dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4)); flag := ibt.exists(3); if flag = true then dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists'); else dbms_output.put_line('Index 3 exists'); end if; ibt.delete(1); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of first index, Count = ' || ibt.count); ibt.delete(4); dbms_output.put_line('After delete of fourth index, Count = ' || ibt.count); dbms_output.put_line('INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS'); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([5][1] = ' || ibt(5)(1)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([6][2] = ' || ibt(6)(2)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([8][3] = ' || ibt(8)(3)); dbms_output.put_line('ibt([3][4] = ' || ibt(3)(4)); ibt.delete; dbms_output.put_line('After delete of entire index-by table, Count = ' || ibt.count); END; Output: Count = 0 No limit to Index-by Tables INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS ibt([1][1] = a ibt([4][5] = b ibt([5][1] = c ibt([6][2] = d ibt([8][3] = e ibt([3][4] = f First Index = 1 Last Index = 8 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 278. 278 Next Index = 4 Prior Index = 6 Count = 6 INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS ibt[1][1] = a ibt[1][2] = g ibt[1][3] = h ibt[1][4] = i ibt[1][5] = k ibt[1][6] = l ibt[1][7] = m ibt[1][8] = n ibt([4][5] = b ibt([5][1] = c ibt([6][2] = d ibt([8][3] = e ibt([3][4] = f Index 3 exists After delete of first index, Count = 5 After delete of fourth index, Count = 4 INDEX-BY TABLE ELEMENTS ibt([5][1] = c ibt([6][2] = d ibt([8][3] = e ibt([3][4] = f After delete of entire index-by table, Count = 0 Ex4: DECLARE type t1 is table of varchar(2) index by binary_integer; type t2 is table of t1 index by binary_integer; type t3 is table of t2; nt t3 := t3(); c number := 65; BEGIN nt.extend(2); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 279. 279 dbms_output.put_line('Count = ' || nt.count); for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop for k in 1..nt.count loop nt(i)(j)(k) := chr(c); c := c + 1; end loop; end loop; end loop; dbms_output.put_line('NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS'); for i in 1..nt.count loop for j in 1..nt.count loop for k in 1..nt.count loop dbms_output.put_line('nt[' || i || '][' || j || '][' || k || '] = ' || nt(i)(j)(k)); end loop; end loop; end loop; END; Output: Count = 2 NESTED TABLE ELEMENTS nt[1][1][1] = A nt[1][1][2] = B nt[1][2][1] = C nt[1][2][2] = D nt[2][1][1] = E nt[2][1][2] = F nt[2][2][1] = G nt[2][2][2] = H OBJECTS USED IN THE EXAMPLES SQL> select * from student; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 280. 280 SNO SNAME SMARKS ---------- -------------- ---------- 1 saketh 100 2 srinu 200 3 divya 300 4 manogni 400 SQL> create or replace type addr as object(hno number(2),city varchar(10));/ SQL> select * from employ; ENAME JOB ADDRESS(HNO, CITY) ---------- ---------- ----------------------------- Ranjit clerk ADDR(11, 'hyd') Satish manager ADDR(22, 'bang') Srinu engineer ADDR(33, 'kochi') © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 281. 281 ERROR HANDLING PL/SQL implements error handling with exceptions and exception handlers. Exceptions can be associated with oracle errors or with your own user-defined errors. By using exceptions and exception handlers, you can make your PL/SQL programs robust and able to deal with both unexpected and expected errors during execution. ERROR TYPES  Compile-time errors  Runtime errors Errors that occur during the compilation phase are detected by the PL/SQL engine and reported back to the user, we have to correct them. Runtime errors are detected by the PL/SQL runtime engine which can programmatically raise and caught by exception handlers. Exceptions are designed for run-time error handling, rather than compile-time error handling. HANDLING EXCEPTIONS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 282. 282 When exception is raised, control passes to the exception section of the block. The exception section consists of handlers for some or all of the exceptions. An exception handler contains the code that is executed when the error associated with the exception occurs, and the exception is raised. Syntax: EXCEPTION When exception_name then Sequence_of_statements; When exception_name then Sequence_of_statements; When others then Sequence_of_statements; END; EXCEPTION TYPES  Predefined exceptions  User-defined exceptions PREDEFINED EXCEPTIONS Oracle has predefined several exceptions that corresponds to the most common oracle errors. Like the predefined types, the identifiers of these exceptions are defined in the STANDARD package. Because of this, they are already available to the program, it is not necessary to declare them in the declarative secion. Ex1: DECLARE a number; b varchar(2); v_marks number; cursor c is select * from student; type t is varray(3) of varchar(2); va t := t('a','b'); va1 t; BEGIN © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 283. 283 -- NO_DATA_FOUND BEGIN select smarks into v_marks from student where sno = 50; EXCEPTION when no_data_found then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid student number'); END; -- CURSOR_ALREADY_OPEN BEGIN open c; open c; EXCEPTION when cursor_already_open then dbms_output.put_line('Cursor is already opened'); END; -- INVALID_CURSOR BEGIN close c; open c; close c; close c; EXCEPTION when invalid_cursor then dbms_output.put_line('Cursor is already closed'); END; -- TOO_MANY_ROWS BEGIN select smarks into v_marks from student where sno > 1; EXCEPTION when too_many_rows then dbms_output.put_line('Too many values are coming to marks variable'); END; -- ZERO_DIVIDE BEGIN a := 5/0; EXCEPTION when zero_divide then © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 284. 284 dbms_output.put_line('Divided by zero - invalid operation'); END; -- VALUE_ERROR BEGIN b := 'saketh'; EXCEPTION when value_error then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length'); END; -- INVALID_NUMBER BEGIN insert into student values('a','srinu',100); EXCEPTION when invalid_number then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid number'); END; -- SUBSCRIPT_OUTSIDE_LIMIT BEGIN va(4) := 'c'; EXCEPTION when subscript_outside_limit then dbms_output.put_line('Index is greater than the limit'); END; -- SUBSCRIPT_BEYOND_COUNT BEGIN va(3) := 'c'; EXCEPTION when subscript_beyond_count then dbms_output.put_line('Index is greater than the count'); END; -- COLLECTION_IS_NULL BEGIN va1(1) := 'a'; EXCEPTION when collection_is_null then dbms_output.put_line('Collection is empty'); END; -- END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 285. 285 Output: Invalid student number Cursor is already opened Cursor is already closed Too many values are coming to marks variable Divided by zero - invalid operation Invalid string length Invalid number Index is greater than the limit Index is greater than the count Collection is empty Ex2: DECLARE c number; BEGIN c := 5/0; EXCEPTION when zero_divide then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid Operation'); when others then dbms_output.put_line('From OTHERS handler: Invalid Operation'); END; Output: Invalid Operation USER-DEFINED EXCEPTIONS A user-defined exception is an error that is defined by the programmer. User-defined exceptions are declared in the declarative secion of a PL/SQL block. Just like variables, exeptions have a type EXCEPTION and scope. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 286. 286 RAISING EXCEPTIONS User-defined exceptions are raised explicitly via the RAISE statement. Ex: DECLARE e exception; BEGIN raise e; EXCEPTION when e then dbms_output.put_line('e is raised'); END; Output: e is raised BULIT-IN ERROR FUNCTIONS SQLCODE AND SQLERRM  SQLCODE returns the current error code, and SQLERRM returns the current error message text;  For user-defined exception SQLCODE returns 1 and SQLERRM returns “user-deifned exception”.  SQLERRM wiil take only negative value except 100. If any positive value other than 100 returns non-oracle exception. Ex1: DECLARE e exception; v_dname varchar(10); BEGIN -- USER-DEFINED EXCEPTION BEGIN raise e; EXCEPTION when e then dbms_output.put_line(SQLCODE || ' ' || SQLERRM); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 287. 287 END; -- PREDEFINED EXCEPTION BEGIN select dname into v_dname from dept where deptno = 50; EXCEPTION when no_data_found then dbms_output.put_line(SQLCODE || ' ' || SQLERRM); END; END; Output: 1 User-Defined Exception 100 ORA-01403: no data found Ex2: BEGIN dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(100)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(0)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(1)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-100)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-500)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(200)); dbms_output.put_line(SQLERRM(-900)); END; Output: ORA-01403: no data found ORA-0000: normal, successful completion User-Defined Exception ORA-00100: no data found ORA-00500: Message 500 not found; product=RDBMS; facility=ORA -200: non-ORACLE exception ORA-00900: invalid SQL statement DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_STACK © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 288. 288  The built-in function, like SQLERRM, returns the message associated with the current error.  It differs from SQLERRM in two ways:  Its length is not restricted; it will return the full error message string.  You can not pass an error code number to this function; it cannot be used to return the message for a random error code. Ex: DECLARE v number := 'ab'; BEGIN null; EXCEPTION when others then dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_error_stack); END; Output: declare * ERROR at line 1: ORA-06502: PL/SQL: numeric or value error: character to number conversion error ORA-06512: at line 2 DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_CALL_STACK This function returns a formatted string showing the execution call stack inside your PL/SQL application. Its usefulness is not restricted to error management; you will also find its handy for tracing the exectution of your code. You may not use this function in exception block. Ex: BEGIN dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_call_stack); END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 289. 289 Output: ----- PL/SQL Call Stack ----- Object_handle line_number object_name 69760478 2 anonymous block DBMS_UTILITY.FORMAT_ERROR_BACKTRACE It displays the execution stack at the point where an exception was raised. Thus , you can call this function with an exception section at the top level of your stack and still find out where the error was raised deep within the call stack. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P1 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 1'); raise value_error; END P1; CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P2 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 2'); p1; END P2; CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE P3 IS BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('from procedure 3'); p2; EXCEPTION when others then dbms_output.put_line(dbms_utility.format_error_backtrace); END P3; Output: SQL> exec p3 from procedure 3 from procedure 2 from procedure 1 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 290. 290 ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P1", line 4 ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P2", line 4 ORA-06512: at "SAKETH.P3", line 4 EXCEPTION_INIT PRAGMA Using this you can associate a named exception with a particular oracle error. This gives you the ability to trap this error specifically, rather than via an OTHERS handler. Syntax: PRAGMA EXCEPTION_INIT(exception_name, oracle_error_number); Ex: DECLARE e exception; pragma exception_init(e,-1476); c number; BEGIN c := 5/0; EXCEPTION when e then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid Operation'); END; Output: Invalid Operation RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR You can use this built-in function to create your own error messages, which can be more descriptive than named exceptions. Syntax: RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR(error_number, error_message,, [keep_errors_flag]); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 291. 291 The Boolean parameter keep_errors_flag is optional. If it is TRUE, the new error is added to the list of errors already raised. If it is FALSE, which is default, the new error will replace the current list of errors. Ex: DECLARE c number; BEGIN c := 5/0; EXCEPTION when zero_divide then raise_application_error(-20222,'Invalid Operation'); END; Output: DECLARE * ERROR at line 1: ORA-20222: Invalid Operation ORA-06512: at line 7 EXCEPTION PROPAGATION Exceptions can occur in the declarative, the executable, or the exception section of a PL/SQL block. EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE EXECUATABLE SECTION Exceptions raised in execuatable section can be handled in current block or outer block. Ex1: DECLARE e exception; BEGIN BEGIN raise e; END; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 292. 292 EXCEPTION when e then dbms_output.put_line('e is raised'); END; Output: e is raised Ex2: DECLARE e exception; BEGIN BEGIN raise e; END; END; Output: ERROR at line 1: ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception ORA-06512: at line 5 EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE DECLARATIVE SECTION Exceptions raised in the declarative secion must be handled in the outer block. Ex1: DECLARE c number(3) := 'abcd'; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Hello'); EXCEPTION when others then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length'); END; Output: ERROR at line 1: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 293. 293 ORA-06502: PL/SQL: numeric or value error: character to number conversion error ORA-06512: at line 2 Ex2: BEGIN DECLARE c number(3) := 'abcd'; BEGIN dbms_output.put_line('Hello'); EXCEPTION when others then dbms_output.put_line('Invalid string length'); END; EXCEPTION when others then dbms_output.put_line('From outer block: Invalid string length'); END; Output: From outer block: Invalid string length EXCEPTION RAISED IN THE EXCEPTION SECTION Exceptions raised in the declarative secion must be handled in the outer block. Ex1: DECLARE e1 exception; e2 exception; BEGIN raise e1; EXCEPTION when e1 then dbms_output.put_line('e1 is raised'); raise e2; when e2 then dbms_output.put_line('e2 is raised'); © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 294. 294 END; Output: e1 is raised DECLARE * ERROR at line 1: ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception ORA-06512: at line 9 ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception Ex2: DECLARE e1 exception; e2 exception; BEGIN BEGIN raise e1; EXCEPTION when e1 then dbms_output.put_line('e1 is raised'); raise e2; when e2 then dbms_output.put_line('e2 is raised'); END; EXCEPTION when e2 then dbms_output.put_line('From outer block: e2 is raised'); END; Output: e1 is raised From outer block: e2 is raised Ex3: DECLARE e exception; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 295. 295 BEGIN raise e; EXCEPTION when e then dbms_output.put_line('e is raised'); raise e; END; Output: e is raised DECLARE * ERROR at line 1: ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception ORA-06512: at line 8 ORA-06510: PL/SQL: unhandled user-defined exception RESTRICTIONS You can not pass exception as an argument to a subprogram. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 296. 296 DATABASE TRIGGERS Triggers are similar to procedures or functions in that they are named PL/SQL blocks with declarative, executable, and exception handling sections. A trigger is executed implicitly whenever the triggering event happens. The act of executing a trigger is known as firing the trigger. RESTRICTIONS ON TRIGGERES  Like packages, triggers must be stored as stand-alone objects in the database and cannot be local to a block or package.  A trigger does not accept arguments. USE OF TRIGGERS  Maintaining complex integrity constraints not possible through declarative constraints enable at table creation. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 297. 297  Auditing information in a table by recording the changes made and who made them.  Automatically signaling other programs that action needs to take place when chages are made to a table.  Perform validation on changes being made to tables.  Automate maintenance of the database. TYPES OF TRIGGERS  DML Triggers  Instead of Triggers  DDL Triggers  System Triggers  Suspend Triggers CATEGORIES Timing -- Before or After Level -- Row or Statement Row level trigger fires once for each row affected by the triggering statement. Row level trigger is identified by the FOR EACH ROW clause. Statement level trigger fires once either before or after the statement. DML TRIGGER SYNTAX Create or replace trigger <trigger_name> {Before | after} {insert or update or delete} on <table_name> [For each row] [When (…)] [Declare] © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 298. 298 -- declaration Begin -- trigger body [Exception] -- exception section End <trigger_name>; DML TRIGGERS A DML trigger is fired on an INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE operation on a database table. It can be fired either before or after the statement executes, and can be fired once per affected row, or once per statement. The combination of these factors determines the types of the triggers. These are a total of 12 possible types (3 statements * 2 timing * 2 levels). STATEMENT LEVEL Statement level trigger fires only once. Ex: SQL> create table statement_level(count varchar(50)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER STATEMENT_LEVEL_TRIGGER after update on student BEGIN insert into statement_level values('Statement level fired'); END STATEMENT_LEVEL_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> update student set smarks=500; 3 rows updated. SQL> select * from statement_level; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 299. 299 COUNT ---------------------------- Statement level fired ROW LEVEL Row level trigger fires once for each row affected by the triggering statement. Ex: SQL> create table row_level(count varchar(50)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER ROW_LEVEL_TRIGGER after update on student BEGIN insert into row_level values('Row level fired'); END ROW_LEVEL_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> update student set smarks=500; 3 rows updated. SQL> select * from statement_level; COUNT ---------------------------- Row level fired Row level fired Row level fired ORDER OF DML TRIGGER FIRING  Before statement level  Before row level © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 300. 300  After row level  After statement level Ex: Suppose we have a follwing table. SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS ----- ------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 SQL> create table firing_order(order varchar(50)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER BEFORE_STATEMENT before insert on student BEGIN insert into firing_order values('Before Statement Level'); END BEFORE_STATEMENT; CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER BEFORE_ROW before insert on student for each row BEGIN insert into firing_order values('Before Row Level'); END BEFORE_ROW; CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_STATEMENT after insert on student BEGIN insert into firing_order values('After Statement Level'); END AFTER_STATEMENT; CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_ROW after insert on student © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 301. 301 for each row BEGIN insert into firing_order values('After Row Level'); END AFTER_ROW; Output: SQL> select * from firing_order; no rows selected SQL> insert into student values(5,'e',500); 1 row created. SQL> select * from firing_order; ORDER -------------------------------------------------- Before Statement Level Before Row Level After Row Level After Statement Level SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS ---- -------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 5 e 500 CORRELATION IDENTIFIERS IN ROW-LEVEL TRIGGERS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 302. 302 Inside the trigger, you can access the data in the row that is currently being processed. This is accomplished through two correlation identifiers - :old and :new. A correlation identifier is a special kind of PL/SQL bind variable. The colon in front of each indicates that they are bind variables, in the sense of host variables used in embedded PL/SQL, and indicates that they are not regular PL/SQL variables. The PL/SQL compiler will treat them as records of type Triggering_table%ROWTYPE. Although syntactically they are treated as records, in reality they are not. :old and :new are also known as pseudorecords, for this reason. TRIGGERING STATEMENT :OLD :NEW -------------------------------------- ---------------------------- ----------------------------------------------- INSERT all fields are NULL. values that will be inserted When the statement is completed. UPDATE original values for new values that will be updated the row before the when the statement is completed. update. DELETE original values before all fields are NULL. the row is deleted. Ex: SQL> create table marks(no number(2) old_marks number(3),new_marks number(3)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER OLD_NEW before insert or update or delete on student for each row BEGIN insert into marks values(:old.no,:old.marks,:new.marks); END OLD_NEW; Output: SQL> select * from student; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 303. 303 NO NAME MARKS ----- ------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 5 e 500 SQL> select * from marks; no rows selected SQL> insert into student values(6,'f',600); 1 row created. SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS ---- -------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 5 e 500 6 f 600 SQL> select * from marks; NO OLD_MARKS NEW_MARKS ---- --------------- --------------- 600 SQL> update student set marks=555 where no=5; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 304. 304 1 row updated. SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS ----- ------- ---------- 1 a 100 2 b 200 3 c 300 4 d 400 5 e 555 6 f 600 SQL> select * from marks; NO OLD_MARKS NEW_MARKS ------ ---------------- --------------- 600 5 500 555 SQL> delete student where no = 2; 1 row deleted. SQL> select * from student; NO NAME MARKS ---- -------- ---------- 1 a 100 3 c 300 4 d 400 5 e 555 6 f 600 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 305. 305 SQL> select * from marks; NO OLD_MARKS NEW_MARKS ----- -------------- ---------------- 600 5 500 555 2 200 REFERENCING CLAUSE If desired, you can use the REFERENCING clause to specify a different name for :old ane :new. This clause is found after the triggering event, before the WHEN clause. Syntax: REFERENCING [old as old_name] [new as new_name] Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER REFERENCE_TRIGGER before insert or update or delete on student referencing old as old_student new as new_student for each row BEGIN insert into marks values(:old_student.no,:old_student.marks,:new_student.marks); END REFERENCE_TRIGGER; WHEN CLAUSE WHEN clause is valid for row-level triggers only. If present, the trigger body will be executed only for those rows that meet the condition specified by the WHEN clause. Syntax: WHEN trigger_condition; Where trigger_condition is a Boolean expression. It will be evaluated for each row. The :new and :old records can be referenced inside trigger_condition as well, but like REFERENCING, the colon is not used there. The colon is only valid in the trigger body. © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 306. 306 Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER WHEN_TRIGGER before insert or update or delete on student referencing old as old_student new as new_student for each row when (new_student.marks > 500) BEGIN insert into marks values(:old_student.no,:old_student.marks,:new_student.marks); END WHEN_TRIGGER; TRIGGER PREDICATES There are three Boolean functions that you can use to determine what the operation is. The predicates are  INSERTING  UPDATING  DELETING Ex: SQL> create table predicates(operation varchar(20)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER PREDICATE_TRIGGER before insert or update or delete on student BEGIN if inserting then insert into predicates values('Insert'); elsif updating then insert into predicates values('Update'); elsif deleting then insert into predicates values('Delete'); end if; END PREDICATE_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> delete student where no=1; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 307. 307 1 row deleted. SQL> select * from predicates; MSG --------------- Delete SQL> insert into student values(7,'g',700); 1 row created. SQL> select * from predicates; MSG --------------- Delete Insert SQL> update student set marks = 777 where no=7; 1 row updated. SQL> select * from predicates; MSG --------------- Delete Insert Update INSTEAD-OF TRIGGERS © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 308. 308 Instead-of triggers fire instead of a DML operation. Also, instead-of triggers can be defined only on views. Instead-of triggers are used in two cases:  To allow a view that would otherwise not be modifiable to be modified.  To modify the columns of a nested table column in a view. Ex: SQL> create view emp_dept as select empno,ename,job,dname,loc,sal,e.deptno from emp e, dept d where e.deptno = d.deptno; CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER INSTEAD_OF_TRIGGER instead of insert on emp_dept BEGIN insert into dept1 values(50,'rd','bang'); insert into emp1(empno,ename,job,sal,deptno)values(2222,'saketh','doctor',8000,50); END INSTEAD_OF_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> insert into emp_dept values(2222,'saketh','doctor',8000,'rd','bang',50); SQL> select * from emp_dept; EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL DNAME LOC DEPTNO ---------- ---------- ------------ ----------- ------------- ------------- ---------- 7369 SMITH CLERK 800 RESEARCH DALLAS 20 7499 ALLEN SALESMAN 1600 SALES CHICAGO 30 7521 WARD SALESMAN 1250 SALES CHICAGO 30 7566 JONES MANAGER 2975 RESEARCH DALLAS 20 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 1250 SALES CHICAGO 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 2850 SALES CHICAGO 30 7782 CLARK MANAGER 2450 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 10 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 3000 RESEARCH DALLAS 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 5000 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 10 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 1500 SALES CHICAGO 30 7876 ADAMS CLERK 1100 RESEARCH DALLAS 20 7900 JAMES CLERK 950 SALES CHICAGO 30 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 309. 309 7902 FORD ANALYST 3000 RESEARCH DALLAS 20 7934 MILLER CLERK 1300 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 10 2222 saketh doctor 8000 rd bang 50 SQL> select * from dept; DEPTNO DNAME LOC ---------- ---------------- ----------- 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 50 rd bang SQL> select * from emp; EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO ---------- ---------- --------------- -------- -------------- --------- --------- ---------- 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 1 7-DEC-80 800 20 7499 ALLEN SALESMAN 7698 20-FEB-81 1600 300 30 7521 WARD SALESMAN 7698 22-FEB-81 1250 500 30 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02-APR-81 2975 20 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 7698 28-SEP-81 1250 1400 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 7839 01-MAY-81 2850 30 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 09-JUN-81 2450 10 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 19-APR-87 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17-NOV-81 5000 10 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 7698 08-SEP-81 1500 0 30 7876 ADAMS CLERK 7788 23-MAY-87 1100 20 7900 JAMES CLERK 7698 03-DEC-81 950 30 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03-DEC-81 3000 20 7934 MILLER CLERK 7782 23-JAN-82 1300 10 2222 saketh doctor 8000 50 © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 310. 310 DDL TRIGGERS Oracle allows you to define triggers that will fire when Data Definition Language statements are executed. Syntax: Create or replace trigger <trigger_name> {Before | after} {DDL event} on {database | schema} [When (…)] [Declare] -- declaration Begin -- trigger body [Exception] -- exception section End <trigger_name>; Ex: SQL> create table my_objects(obj_name varchar(10),obj_type varchar(10),obj_owner varchar(10),obj_time date); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER CREATE_TRIGGER after create on database BEGIN insert into my_objects values(sys.dictionary_obj_name,sys.dictionary_obj_type, sys.dictionary_obj_owner, sysdate); END CREATE_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> select * from my_objects; no rows selected © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 311. 311 SQL> create table stud1(no number(2)); SQL> select * from my_objects; OBJ_NAME OBJ_TYPE OBJ_OWNER OBJ_TIME ------------- -------------- -------------- ------------ STUD1 TABLE SYS 21-JUL-07 SQL> create sequence ss; SQL> create view stud_view as select * from stud1; SQL> select * from my_objects; OBJ_NAME OBJ_TYPE OBJ_OWNER OBJ_TIME -------------- ------------- ---------------- ------------- STUD1 TABLE SYS 21-JUL-07 SS SEQUENCE SYS 21-JUL-07 STUD_VIEW VIEW SYS 21-JUL-07 WHEN CLAUSE If WHEN present, the trigger body will be executed only for those that meet the condition specified by the WHEN clause. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER CREATE_TRIGGER after create on database when (sys.dictionary_obj_type = ‘TABLE’) BEGIN insert into my_objects values(sys.dictionary_obj_name,sys.dictionary_obj_type, sys.dictionary_obj_owner, sysdate); END CREATE_TRIGGER; © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 312. 312 SYSTEM TRIGGERS System triggers will fire whenever database-wide event occurs. The following are the database event triggers. To create system trigger you need ADMINISTER DATABASE TRIGGER privilege.  STARTUP  SHUTDOWN  LOGON  LOGOFF  SERVERERROR Syntax: Create or replace trigger <trigger_name> {Before | after} {Database event} on {database | schema} [When (…)] [Declare] -- declaration section Begin -- trigger body [Exception] -- exception section End <trigger_name>; Ex: SQL> create table user_logs(u_name varchar(10),log_time timestamp); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AFTER_LOGON after logon on database BEGIN insert into user_logs values(user,current_timestamp); END AFTER_LOGON; Output: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 313. 313 SQL> select * from user_logs; no rows selected SQL> conn saketh/saketh SQL> select * from user_logs; U_NAME LOG_TIME ---------- ------------------------------------------------ SAKETH 22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM SQL> conn system/oracle SQL> select * from user_logs; U_NAME LOG_TIME ---------- ------------------------------------------------ SAKETH 22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM SYSTEM 22-JUL-07 12.07.34.218000 AM SQL> conn scott/tiger SQL> select * from user_logs; U_NAME LOG_TIME ---------- ----------------------------------------------- SAKETH 22-JUL-07 12.07.13.140000 AM SYSTEM 22-JUL-07 12.07.34.218000 AM SCOTT 22-JUL-07 12.08.43.093000 AM SERVERERROR The SERVERERROR event can be used to track errors that occur in the database. The error code is available inside the trigger through the SERVER_ERROR attribute function. Ex: © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 314. 314 SQL> create table my_errors(error_msg varchar(200)); CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER after servererror on database BEGIN insert into my_errors values(dbms_utility.format_error_stack); END SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> create table ss (no)); create table ss (no)) * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00922: missing or invalid option SQL> select * from my_errors; ERROR_MSG ------------------------------------------------------------- ORA-00922: missing or invalid option SQL> insert into student values(1,2,3); insert into student values(1,2,3) * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00942: table or view does not exist SQL> select * from my_errors; ERROR_MSG ------------------------------------------------------------- ORA-00922: missing or invalid option ORA-00942: table or view does not exist SERVER_ERROR ATTRIBUTE FUNCTION © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 315. 315 It takes a single number type of argument and returns the error at the position on the error stack indicated by the argument. The position 1 is the top of the stack. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER after servererror on database BEGIN insert into my_errors values(server_error(1)); END SERVER_ERROR_TRIGGER; SUSPEND TRIGGERS This will fire whenever a statement is suspended. This might occur as the result of a space issue such as exceeding an allocated tablepace quota. This functionality can be used to address the problem and allow the operatin to continue. Syntax: Create or replace trigger <trigger_name> after suspend on {database | schema} [When (…)] [Declare] -- declaration section Begin -- trigger body [Exception] -- exception section End <trigger_name>; Ex: SQL> create tablespace my_space datafile 'f:my_file.dbf' size 2m; SQL> create table student(sno number(2),sname varchar(10)) tablespace my_space; CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER SUSPEND_TRIGGER © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 316. 316 after suspend on database BEGIN dbms_output.put_line(‘ No room to insert in your tablespace'); END SUSPEND_TRIGGER; Output: Insert more rows in student table then , you will get No room to insert in your tablespace AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION Prior to Oracle8i, there was no way in which some SQL operations within a transaction could be committed independent of the rest of the operations. Oracle allows this, however, through autonomous transactions. An autonomous transaction is a transaction that is started within the context of another transaction, known as parent transaction, but is independent of it. The autonomous transaction can be committed or rolled back regardless ot the state of the parent transaction. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION_TRIGGER after insert on student DECLARE pragma autonomous_transaction; BEGIN update student set marks = 555; commit; END AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> select * from student; NO NA MARKS ----- ----- -- ---------- © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 317. 317 1 a 111 2 b 222 3 c 300 SQL> insert into student values(4,'d',444); SQL> select * from student; NO NA MARKS ---- ------ -- ---------- 1 a 555 2 b 555 3 c 555 4 d 444 RESTRICTIONS ON AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION  If an autonomous transaction attempts to access a resource held by the main transaction, a deadlock can occur in you program.  You cannot mark all programs in a package as autonomous with a single PRAGMA declaration. You must indicate autonomous transactions explicity in each program.  To exit without errors from an autonomous transaction program that has executed at least one INSERT or UPDATE or DELETE, you must perform an explicit commit or rollback.  The COMMIT and ROLLBACK statements end the active autonomous transaction, but they do not force the termination of the autonomous routine. You can have multiple COMMIT and/or ROLLBACK statements inside your autonomous block.  You can not rollback to a savepoint set in the main transaction.  The TRANSACTIONS parameter in the oracle initialization file specifies the maximum number of transactions allowed concurrently in a session. The default value is 75 for this, but you can increase the limit. MUTATING TABLES © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 318. 318 There are restrictions on the tables and columns that a trigger body may access. In order to define these restrictions, it is necessary to understand mutating and constraining tables. A mutating table is table that is currentlty being modified by a DML statement and the trigger event also DML statement. A mutating table error occurs when a row-level trigger tries to examine or change a table that is already undergoing change. A constraining table is a table that might need to be read from for a referential integrity constraint. Ex: CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER MUTATING_TRIGGER before delete on student for each row DECLARE ct number; BEGIN select count(*) into ct from student where no = :old.no; END MUTATING_TRIGGER; Output: SQL> delete student where no = 1; delete student where no = 1 * ERROR at line 1: ORA-04091: table SCOTT.STUDENT is mutating, trigger/function may not see it ORA-06512: at "SCOTT.T", line 4 ORA-04088: error during execution of trigger 'SCOTT.T' HOW TO AVOID MUTATING TABLE ERROR ?  By using autonomous transaction  By using statement level trigger © Copy rights are reserved.
  • 319. 319 © Copy rights are reserved.
  翻译: